Download: CAUTION You are cautioned that any changes or For the Customers in the U.S.A. Notice on the supplied battery

DSC-P52 SERVICE MANUAL LEVEL 1 US Model Ver 1.0 2003. 03 Canadian Model Revision History AEP Model UK Model E Model Australian Model Hong Kong Model Korea Model Chinese Model Tourist Model Brazilian Model Link SPECIFICATIONS SELF DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION ORNAMENTAL PARTS • INSTRUCTION MANUAL is shown at the end of this document. DIGITAL STILL CAMERA DSC-P52 COVER SPECIFICATIONS xCamera [LCD screen] xAC-LS5 AC Adaptor (not supplied) [System] LCD panel used Power requirements Image device 6.67 mm (1/2.7 type) color 4.0 cm (1.6 type) TFT drive AC 100 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz CCD Total number of dots 11 W 0.1...
Author: Acal1978 Shared: 8/19/19
Downloads: 134 Views: 1046

Content

DSC-P52 SERVICE MANUAL LEVEL 1

US Model Ver 1.0 2003. 03 Canadian Model Revision History AEP Model UK Model E Model Australian Model Hong Kong Model Korea Model Chinese Model Tourist Model Brazilian Model Link SPECIFICATIONS SELF DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION ORNAMENTAL PARTS • INSTRUCTION MANUAL is shown at the end of this document.

DIGITAL STILL CAMERA

,

DSC-P52 COVER SPECIFICATIONS

xCamera [LCD screen] xAC-LS5 AC Adaptor (not supplied) [System] LCD panel used Power requirements Image device 6.67 mm (1/2.7 type) color 4.0 cm (1.6 type) TFT drive AC 100 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz CCD Total number of dots 11 W 0.16 to 0.09 A Primary color filter 61 600 (280×220) dots Rated output voltage Total pixels number of camera DC 4.2 V, 1.5 A[Power, general] Approx. 3 340 000 pixels Operating temperature range Effective pixels number of camera Power AA nickel hydride batteries (2) 0° to +40°C (32° to +104°F) Approx. 3 210 000 pixels 2.4 V Storage temperature range AC-LS5 AC Adaptor Lens 2× zoom lens –20° to +60°C (–4° to +140°F)(not supplied), 4.2 V f=6.3 to 12.6 mm Dimensions 48 × 29 × 81 mm (1 15/16 × 1 3/16 (35 mm camera conversion: 41 to Power consumption (when recording) 3 1/4 inches) (W/H/D, protruding 5 1.6W82 mm (1 /8 to 3 1/4 inches)) parts not included) Operating temperature range F3.8 Mass Approx. 180 g (6 oz) 0° to +40°C (32° to +104°F) Exposure control (adaptor only) Storage temperature range Automatic, Program, Twilight, –20° to +60°C (–4° to +140°F) Twilight portrait, Landscape, Snow, Accessories Beach Dimensions 123.2 × 57.7 × 52 mm HR6 (size AA) Ni-MH batteries (2) 731White balanceAutomatic, Daylight, Cloudy, (4 /8 × 2 /8 × 2 /8 inches) Battery case Fluorescent, Incandescent Mass Approx. 280 g (9.9 oz) (two BC-CS2A/CS2B Ni-MH Battery charger (1) File format (DCF compliant) batteries, “Memory Stick” and wrist Power cord (mains lead) (1) Still images: Exif Ver. 2.2, JPEG strap included) USB cable (1) compliant, GIF (for Clip Motion), Microphone Electret condenser microphone DPOF compatible A/V connecting cable (1) Audio with still image: MPEG1 Speaker Dynamic speaker Wrist strap (1) compliant (Monaural) “Memory Stick” (16MB) (1) Movies: MPEG1 compliant xBC-CS2A/CS2B Ni-MH battery CD-ROM (USB driver: SPVD-010) (1) (Monaural) charger Operating Instructions (1) Recording media “Memory Stick” Power requirements AC 100 to 240V 50/60Hz Design and specifications are subject to change Flash Recommended distance3Wwithout notice. 0.5 to 3.3 m (19 3/4 inches to 10 feet 9 29/32 inches) Output voltage AA : DC 1.4 V 400 mA × 2 [Output connectors] AAA : DC 1.4 V 160 mA × 2 Operating temperature range A/V OUT (MONO) jack (Monaural) 0° to +40°C (32° to +104°F) Minijack Video: 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω, unbalanced, Dimensions 71 × 30 × 91 mm (2 7sync negative /8 × 1 3/ 516 × 3 /8 inches) (W/H/ Audio: 327 mV (at a 47 kΩ load) D) Output impedance 2.2 kΩ Mass Approx. 90 g (3 oz) USB jack mini-B

CAUTION : Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type. SAFETY-RELATED COMPONENT WARNING!! ATTENTION AU COMPOSANT AYANT RAPPORT À LA SÉCURITÉ! COMPONENTS IDENTIFIED BY MARK 0 OR DOTTED LINE WITH LES COMPOSANTS IDENTIFÉS PAR UNE MARQUE 0 SUR LES MARK 0 ON THE SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS AND IN THE PARTS DIAGRAMMES SCHÉMATIQUES ET LA LISTE DES PIÈCES SONT LIST ARE CRITICAL TO SAFE OPERATION. REPLACE THESE CRITIQUES POUR LA SÉCURITÉ DE FONCTIONNEMENT. NE COMPONENTS WITH SONY PARTS WHOSE PART NUMBERS REMPLACER CES COMPOSANTS QUE PAR DES PIÈSES SONY APPEAR AS SHOWN IN THIS MANUAL OR IN SUPPLEMENTS DONT LES NUMÉROS SONT DONNÉS DANS CE MANUEL OU PUBLISHED BY SONY. DANS LES SUPPÉMENTS PUBLIÉS PAR SONY.

— 2 —,

DSC-P52

Checking supplied accessories. Make sure that the following accessories are supplied with your camcorder. Power cord (1)(AUS model) Battery charger (BC-CS2)(1) Connection cord Hand strap (1) 0 1-696-819-21 (US,CND,JE model) (AV Cable 1.5m)(1) 3-070-841-01 Power cord (1)(AEP,E model) 0 1-477-814-11 1-824-111-11 0 1-769-608-11 Battery charger (BC-CS2)(1) Power cord (1)(CH model) (AEP,UK,E,HK,AUS,BR model) 0 1-782-476-13 0 1-477-814-21 Power cord (1)(KR model) Battery charger (BC-CS2)(1) 0 1-776-985-11 (CH, KR model) Power cord (1)(UK,HK model) 0 1-477-814-32 0 1-783-374-11 Power cord (1)(US,CND model) 0 1-790-107-22 Power cord (1)(JE model) Battery carrying case (1) Cord with connector (1) 0 1-790-732-12 3-074-757-01 (USB 5P) 1-827-038-11 Memory stick (1) (MSA-16A) CD-ROM (USB DRIVER) (1) (not supplied) (SPVD-010) 2P conversion adaptor (1) 2P conversion adaptor (1) (AEP,UK,E,HK,AUS, (JE model) (E model) CH,JE,KR,BR model) 1-569-007-12 1-569-008-12 3-078-942-03 HR6 (size AA) Ni-MH CD-ROM (USB DRIVER) (1) batteries (SPVD-010 (I)) (US,CND model) (not supplied) • Abbreviation 3-078-943-03 CND : Canadian model JE : Tourist model HK : Hong Kong model KR : Korea model

Other accessories AUS : Australian model BR : Brazilian model

3-082-146-11 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ENGLISH) CH : Chinese model (US,CND,AEP,UK,E,HK,AUS,CH,JE) 3-082-146-21 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (FRENCH/GERMAN) (CND,AEP,JE) 3-082-146-31 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (SPANISH/PORTUGUESE) (AEP,E,JE) 3-082-146-41 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ITALIAN/DUTCH) (AEP) Note : Note : The components identified by Les composants identifiés par 3-082-146-51 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (CHINESE) (E,HK,CH,JE) mark 0 or dotted line with mark une marque 0 sont critiques 3-082-146-61 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (RUSSIAN/SWEDISH) (AEP,JE) 0 are critical for safety. pour la sécurité. 3-082-146-71 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ARABIC) (E) Replace only with part number Ne les remplacer que par une 3-082-146-81 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (KOREAN) (KR,JE) specified. pièce portant le numéro spécifié.

SAFETY CHECK-OUT

After correcting the original service problem, perform the following safety checks before releasing the set to the customer. 1. Check the area of your repair for unsoldered or poorly-soldered 4. Look for parts which, through functioning, show obvious signs connections. Check the entire board surface for solder splashes of deterioration. Point them out to the customer and and bridges. recommend their replacement. 2. Check the interboard wiring to ensure that no wires are 5. Check the B+ voltage to see it is at the values specified. "pinched" or contact high-wattage resistors. 6. Flexible Circuit Board Repairing 3. Look for unauthorized replacement parts, particularly • Keep the temperature of the soldering iron around 270˚C transistors, that were installed during a previous repair. Point during repairing. them out to the customer and recommend their replacement. • Do not touch the soldering iron on the same conductor of the circuit board (within 3 times). • Be careful not to apply force on the conductor when soldering or unsoldering. — 3 —,

DSC-P52

COVER SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION [Description on Self-diagnosis Display] Self-diagnosis display • C: ss: ss The contents which can be handled by customer, are displayed. • E: ss: ss The contents which can be handled by engineer, are displayed. Display Code Countermeasure Cause Caution Display During Error C:32:01 Turn off the main power then back on. Trouble with hardware. SYSTEM ERROR • The type of memory stick that cannot be Replace the memory stick. used by this machine, is inserted. C:13:01 MS ERROR Format the memory stick with the DSC-P52. • Data is damaged. • Unformatted memory stick is inserted. E:61:00 *1 Checking of lens drive circuit When failed in the focus initialization. — E:61:10 *1 Flash LED Checking of flash unit or replacement of Abnormality when flash is being E:91:01 Flash display flash unit. charged. Flashing at 3.2 Hz Note : The error code is cleared if the battery is removed, except defective flash unit. *1: The error display is given in two ways. — 4 —,

DSC-P52

COVER MAIN PARTS Note: • The parts numbers of such as a cabinet are also appeared in this section. Refer to the parts number mentioned below the name of parts to order. 1. ORNAMENTAL PARTS Jack cover 3-080-985-01 (When change it, need to dismantle the set.) — 5 —,

DSC-P52 Sony EMCS Co. 2003C1600-19-876-248-41 ©2003.3

— 6 — Published by DI Customer Center, 3-082-146-11(1) Getting started _

Digital Still Camera Shooting still images _

Viewing still images _

Operating Instructions

Before operating the unit, please read this manual thoroughly, and Deleting still images _ retain it for future reference.

Owner’s Record Before advanced operations _

The model and serial numbers are located on the bottom. Record the serial number in the space provided below. Refer to these numbers Advanced still image shooting_ whenever you call upon your Sony dealer regarding this product. Model No. DSC-P32/P52/P72 Advanced still image viewing_ Serial No. Still image editing _ Enjoying movies_ Enjoying images on your computer _ Troubleshooting _ Additional information _

DSC-P32/P52/P72

Index _ © 2003 Sony Corporation,

WARNING If you have any questions about this product, you may call: Declaration of Conformity

To prevent fire or shock hazard, do Sony Customer Information Services Center Trade Name: SONY not expose the unit to rain or 1-800-222-SONY (7669) Model No.: DSC-P52Responsible Party:Sony Electronics Inc. moisture. The number below is for the FCC related Address: 680 Kinderkamack matters only. Road, Oradell, NJ

For the Customers in the U.S.A. 07649 USA

Regulatory Information Telephone No.: 201-930-6972

Declaration of Conformity This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the Trade Name: SONY following two conditions: (1) This device Model No.: DSC-P32 may not cause harmful interference, and (2) Responsible Party:Sony Electronics Inc. this device must accept any interference Address: 680 Kinderkamack received, including interference that may Road, Oradell, NJ cause undesired operation. 07649 USA Telephone No.: 201-930-6972

Declaration of Conformity

This symbol is intended to This device complies with Part 15 of the Trade Name: SONY alert the user to the presence FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the Model No.: DSC-P72 of uninsulated “dangerous following two conditions: (1) This device Responsible Party:Sony Electronics Inc. voltage” within the product’s may not cause harmful interference, and (2) Address: 680 Kinderkamack enclosure that may be of this device must accept any interference Road, Oradell, NJ sufficient magnitude to received, including interference that may 07649 USA constitute a risk of electric cause undesired operation. Telephone No.: 201-930-6972 shock to persons. This device complies with Part 15 of the This symbol is intended to FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the alert the user to the presence following two conditions: (1) This device of important operating and may not cause harmful interference, and (2) maintenance (servicing) this device must accept any interference instructions in the literature received, including interference that may accompanying the appliance. cause undesired operation.,

CAUTION

You are cautioned that any changes or For the Customers in the U.S.A. Notice on the supplied battery modifications not expressly approved in this and Canada charger for the customers in manual could void your authority to operate the United Kingdom this equipment. RECYCLING NICKEL METAL

HYDRIDE BATTERIES A moulded plug complying with BS 1363 is

Note: fitted to this equipment for your safety and Nickel Metal Hydride batteries This equipment has been tested and found to convenience. are recyclable. comply with the limits for a Class B digital Should the fuse in the plug supplied need to be You can help preserve our device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. replaced, a 5 AMP fuse approved by ASTA or environment by returning your These limits are designed to provide BSI to BS 1362, (i.e., marked with or used rechargeable batteries to reasonable protection against harmful mark) must be used.the collection and recycling location nearest interference in a residential installation. This you. equipment generates, uses, and can radiate If the plug supplied with this equipment has a radio frequency energy and, if not installed detachable fuse cover, be sure to attach the For more information regarding recycling of and used in accordance with the instructions, fuse cover after you change the fuse. Never rechargeable batteries, call toll free may cause harmful interference to radio use the plug without the fuse cover. If you 1-800-822-8837, or communications. However, there is no should lose the fuse cover, please contact your visit http://www.rbrc.org/ guarantee that interference will not occur in a nearest Sony service station. particular installation. If this equipment does Caution: Do not handle damaged or leaking cause harmful interference to radio or Nickel Metal Hydride batteries. television reception, which can be determined For the Customers in Europe by turning the equipment off and on, the user CAUTION This product has been tested and found is encouraged to try to correct the interference TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO compliant with the limits sets out in the EMC by one or more of the following measures: NOT USE THIS POLARIZED AC PLUG Directive for using connection cables shorter —Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. WITH AN EXTENSION CORD, than 3 meters (9.8 feet). —Increase the separation between the RECEPTACLE OR OTHER OUTLET equipment and receiver. UNLESS THE BLADES CAN BE FULLY Attention —Connect the equipment into an outlet on a INSERTED TO PREVENT BLADE The electromagnetic fields at the specific circuit different from that to which the EXPOSURE. frequencies may influence the picture and receiver is connected. sound of this digital camera. —Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Notice The supplied interface cable must be used If static electricity or electromagnetism causes with the equipment in order to comply with data transfer to discontinue midway (fail), the limits for a digital device pursuant to restart the application or disconnect and Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules. connect the USB cable again., Certain countries may regulate disposal of the battery used to power this product. Please consult with your local authority. “Memory Stick”

N50 For the Customers in the U.S.A.

and Canada THIS CLASS B DIGITAL DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES AND THE CANADIAN ICES-003 OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS: (1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND (2) THIS DEVICE MUST ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE RECEIVED, INCLUDING INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION.

Before using your camera

Trial recording Do not shake or strike the camera Before you record one-time events, you may want to make a trial recording to make sure that the camera is working correctly. No compensation for contents of the recording Contents of the recording cannot be compensated for if recording or playback is not possible due to a malfunction of your camera or recording medium, etc. Back up recommendation To avoid the potential risk of data loss, always copy (back up) data to a disk. Notes on image data compatibility • This camera conforms with the Design rule for Camera File system universal standard established by the JEITA (Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association). • Playback of images recorded with your camera on other equipment and playback of images recorded or edited with other equipment on your camera are not guaranteed. Precaution on copyright Television programs, films, video tapes, and other materials may be copyrighted. Unauthorized recording of such materials may be contrary to the provision of the copyright laws. In addition to malfunctions and inability to record images, this may render the “Memory Stick” unusable or image data breakdown, damage or loss may occur. LCD screen, LCD finder (only models with a LCD finder) and lens • The LCD screen and the LCD finder are manufactured using extremely high- precision technology so over 99.99% of the pixels are operational for effective use. However, there may be some tiny black points and/or bright points (white, red, blue or green in color) that constantly appear on the LCD screen and the LCD finder. These points are normal in the manufacturing process and do not affect the recording in any way. • Be careful when placing the camera near a window or outdoors. Exposing the LCD screen, the finder or the lens to direct sunlight for long periods may cause malfunctions. • Do not press the LCD screen hardly. The screen may be uneven and that may cause a malfunction. • Images may be trailed on the LCD screen in a cold location. This is not a malfunction. The power zoom lens (for the DSC- P72 only) This camera is equipped with power zoom lens. Be careful not to bump the lens, and be careful not to apply force to it., Remove dirt from the surface of the The pictures used in this manual Trademarks flash The photographs used as examples of pictures • “Memory Stick,” , and “MagicGate If the dirt changes color or sticks to the in this manual are reproduced images, and are Memory Stick” are trademarks of Sony surface of the flash due to the heat of the flash, not actual images shot using this camera. Corporation. sufficient light may not be emitted. • “Memory Stick Duo” and The illustrations and screen status are trademarks of Sony Do not get the camera wet used in this manual Corporation. When taking pictures outdoors in the rain or The illustrations and screen status used in this • “Memory Stick PRO” and under similar conditions, be careful not to get manual are of the DSC-P72 unless noted are trademarks of Sony the camera wet. If moisture condensation otherwise. Corporation. occurs, see page 108 and follow the • “MagicGate” and are instructions on how to remove it before using trademarks of Sony Corporation. the camera. • Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of the U.S. Microsoft Do not expose the camera to sand or Corporation in the United States and other dust countries. Using the camera in sandy or dusty locations • Macintosh, Mac OS, QuickTime, iBook, and may cause a malfunction. Power Mac are trademarks or registered trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. Do not aim the camera at the sun or • “Pentium” is a trademark or a registered other bright light trademark of Intel Corporation. This may cause irrecoverable damage to your • In addition, system and product names used eyes or the malfunction of your camera. in this manual are, in general, trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective Notes on locations where you can developers or manufacturers. However, the use the camera ™ or ® marks are not used in all cases in this • Do not use the camera near a location that manual. generates strong radio waves or emits radiation. The camera may not be able to record or play back properly. • Do not use the camera near a TV, radio, or tuner. This may cause noise to interfere the camera.,

Table of contents

Before using your camera ... 4 Inserting the date and time on a still

Advanced still image

Identifying the parts ... 8 image... 35 shooting

Getting started Viewing still images Choosing a focus method...48

Setting the distance to the subject Preparing batteries ... 14 Viewing images on the LCD screen of your – Focus preset ...49 Charging the batteries ... 14 camera ... 36 Adjusting the exposure Inserting the batteries... 16 Viewing images on a TV screen... 38 – EV adjustment ...50 Using an external power source... 19 Selecting a metering mode...51 Using your camera abroad ... 19 Deleting still images Adjusting color tones – White Balance...52 Turning your camera on/off ... 20 How to use the control button... 20 Deleting images ... 40 Adjusting the flash level – Flash level ...53 Setting the date and time... 21 Formatting a “Memory Stick” ... 44 Shooting multiple frames – Clip Motion ...54

Before advanced operations Shooting in Multi Burst modeShooting still images – Multi Burst...55

Inserting and removing a “Memory Stick” How to setup and operate your camera Shooting two images in succession ... 23 ... 45 – Burst 2 ...56 Setting the still image size ... 24 Changing menu settings ... 45 Shooting still images for e-mail Image size and quality ... 25 Changing items in the SET UP screen – E-Mail...56 Basic still image shooting ... 45 Shooting still images with audio files – using auto mode... 26 Deciding the still image quality... 46 – Voice...57 Checking the last image shot Creating or selecting a folder ... 46 Shooting according to scene conditions – Quick Review ... 28 Creating a new folder ... 47 ...58 Using the zoom feature... 29 Selecting the recording folder ... 47 Adding special effects Shooting close-ups – Macro – Picture Effect ...60 (DSC-P72 only)... 30 Using the self-timer ... 31 Selecting a flash mode... 32 Shooting with the finder ... 34,

Advanced still image viewing Enjoying movies Image file storage destinations and file

names ...86 Selecting the folder and playing back Shooting movies ... 72 Copying images to your computer images – Folder ...61 Viewing movies on the LCD screen... 73 – For Macintosh users...88 Enlarging a portion of a still image...62 Deleting movies ... 74 Creating a Video CD ...90 Enlarging an image On the single screen... 74 – Playback zoom...62 On the Index (nine-image) screen ... 74 Troubleshooting Recording an enlarged image On the Index (triple-image) screen... 75 – Trimming ...63 Editing movies ... 76 Troubleshooting ...91 Playing back successive images Cutting movies... 76 Warnings and messages ...98 – Slide show...63 Deleting unnecessary portions of movies Self-diagnosis display – If a code starting Rotating still images – Rotate ...64 ... 77 with an alphabet letter appears...100 Playing back images shot in Multi Burst mode ...65 Enjoying images on your Additional information Playing back continuously ...65 computer The number of images that can be saved/ Playing back frame by frame – Jog playback ...65 Copying images to your computer shooting time...101 – For Windows users... 78 Menu items...102

Still image editing Installing the USB driver... 79

SET UP items ...106 Installing “Image Transfer”... 80 Precautions ...108 Protecting images – Protect...67 Installing “ImageMixer”... 81 The “Memory Stick” ...109 On the single screen...67 Connecting the camera to your computer The nickel-metal hydride batteries ...110 On the Index (nine-image) screen...67 ... 82 The battery charger...111 On the Index (triple-image) screen ...68 Copying images using “Image Transfer” Specifications ...111 Changing image size – Resize...69 ... 83 The LCD screen ...113 Choosing images to print Changing “Image Transfer” settings .. 84 – Print (DPOF) mark ...70 Copying images without using “Image Index On the single screen...70 Transfer” ... 84 Index...116 On the Index (nine-image) screen...70 Viewing the images on your computer On the Index (triple-image) screen ...71 ... 85,

Identifying the parts

(DSC-P72) 172839q; qa A POWER button (20) J Access lamp (23) • Use a tripod with a screw length of less than B Shutter button (26) K “Memory Stick” cover (23) 5.5 mm (7/32 inch). You will be unable to firmly secure the camera to tripods having C Flash (32) longer screws, and may damage the camera. D Microphone • “3.2MEGA PIXELS” shown on the surface of Self-timer lamp (31)/ the camera is the number of effective pixels of E the CCD. However, the maximum number of AF illuminator (33) pixels recorded is 3.1 mega pixels. The F Tripod receptacle (bottom indication of the number of effective pixels of surface) the CCD is a recommendation of the JCIA (Japan Camera Industry Association). G POWER lamp (20) H Finder window I Lens, J RESET button (91) K DC IN jack (19) q; L (USB) jack (82) 2 M A/V OUT (MONO) jack (38) qa3NBattery cover qs O OPEN button (16) qd P Wrist strap hook qf Attaching the wrist strap qg qh qj A Zoom buttons (during shooting) D Finder (34) Q Jack cover (29)/Index buttons (during Self-timer/recording playback) (37) lamp (red) (31/27) B Control button AE/AF lock lamp (Menu on) (v/V/b/B/z) (20)/ (green) (26) (Menu off) ( / /7/ ) (32/31/28/ 30) (Flash charge) C Mode selector (21) lamp (orange) (32) : To view or edit images E LCD screen : To shoot still images F Speaker : To shoot movies/Clip Motion G MENU button (102) images/Multi Burst mode images H (LCD status/LCD on/off) SET UP: To set the SET UP items button (34) I (Image Size/Delete) button (24/40),

Identifying the parts (continued)

(DSC-P52) 1728q; qa A POWER button (20) J Access lamp (23) • Use a tripod with a screw length of less than B Shutter button (26) K “Memory Stick” cover (23) 5.5 mm (7/32 inch). You will be unable to firmly secure the camera to tripods having C Flash (32) longer screws, and may damage the camera. D Microphone • “3.2MEGA PIXELS” shown on the surface of Self-timer lamp (31)/ the camera is the number of effective pixels of E the CCD. However, the maximum number of AF illuminator (33) pixels recorded is 3.1 mega pixels. The F Tripod receptacle (bottom indication of the number of effective pixels of surface) the CCD is a recommendation of the JCIA (Japan Camera Industry Association). G POWER lamp (20) H Finder window I Lens, J RESET button (91) K DC IN jack (19) q; L (USB) jack (82) 2 M A/V OUT (MONO) jack (38) qa3NBattery cover qs O OPEN button (16) qd P Wrist strap hook qf Attaching the wrist strap qg qh qj A Zoom buttons (during shooting) D Finder (34) Q Jack cover (29)/Index buttons (during Self-timer/recording playback) (37) lamp (red) (31/27) B Control button AE/AF lock lamp (Menu on) (v/V/b/B/z) (20)/ (green) (26) (Menu off) ( / /7/ ) (32/31/28/ 51) (Flash charge) C Mode selector (21) lamp (orange) (32) : To view or edit images E LCD screen : To shoot still images F Speaker : To shoot movies/Clip Motion G MENU button (102) images/Multi Burst mode images H (LCD status/LCD on/off) SET UP: To set the SET UP items button (34) I (Image Size/Delete) button (24/40),

Identifying the parts (continued)

(DSC-P32) 5 q; qa A POWER button (20) J Access lamp (23) • Use a tripod with a screw length of less than B Shutter button (26) K “Memory Stick” cover (23) 5.5 mm (7/32 inch). You will be unable to firmly secure the camera to tripods having C Flash (32) longer screws, and may damage the camera. D Finder window • “3.2MEGA PIXELS” shown on the surface of Lens the camera is the number of effective pixels of E the CCD. However, the maximum number of F Tripod receptacle (bottom pixels recorded is 3.1 mega pixels. The surface) indication of the number of effective pixels of G POWER lamp (20) the CCD is a recommendation of the JCIA (Japan Camera Industry Association). H Microphone I Self-timer lamp (31)/ AF illuminator (33), J RESET button (91) K DC IN jack (19) q; L (USB) jack (82) 2 M A/V OUT (MONO) jack (38) qa3NBattery cover qs O OPEN button (16) qd P Wrist strap hook qf Attaching the wrist strap qg qh qj A Zoom buttons (during shooting) D Finder (34) Q Jack cover (29)/Index buttons (during Self-timer/recording playback) (37) lamp (red) (31/27) B Control button AE/AF lock lamp (Menu on) (v/V/b/B/z) (20)/ (green) (26) (Menu off) ( / /7/ ) (32/31/28/ 51) (Flash charge) C Mode selector (21) lamp (orange) (32) : To view or edit images E LCD screen : To shoot still images F Speaker : To shoot movies/Clip Motion G MENU button (102) images/Multi Burst mode images H (LCD status/LCD on/off) SET UP: To set the SET UP items button (34) I (Image Size/Delete) button (24/40),

Getting started Preparing

batteries Use the following batteries in this camera. Acceptable batteries HR 15/51:HR6 (size AA) Nickel-Metal Hydride batteries (2) – NH-AA-DA (2) (supplied) – NH-AA-2DA twin-pack (not supplied) R6 (size AA) alkaline batteries (2) Batteries that cannot be used Manganese batteries, lithium batteries, ni- cad batteries If you use the batteries described above, we cannot guarantee full performance of the camera by property of the batteries, such as brownout of the batteries. The battery remaining indicator does not display the correct information. • When alkaline batteries are used, take note of the following information. – There is a big difference in the performance of batteries of different types and of batteries made by different manufacturers. This is especially true in low temperatures, where some batteries are noticeably weaker. You may not be able to shoot in temperatures below 5°C (41°F). – The battery remaining indicator may not display the correct information.

Charging the batteries

, Insert Nickel-Metal Hydride batteries into the battery charger (supplied) with the correct polarity +/−. • You cannot charge alkaline batteries using the battery charger. • Be sure to charge the Nickel-Metal Hydride batteries supplied with your camera before using them. • Connect the battery charger to an easily accessible wall outlet (wall socket) close by. • Even if the CHARGE lamp is not lit, the set is not disconnected from the AC power source (mains) as long as it is connected to the wall outlet (wall socket). If some trouble occurs while using the battery charger, immediately shut off the power by disconnecting the plug from the wall outlet (wall socket). CHARGE lamp to a wall outlet (wall socket) 2 Power cord (mains lead) , Connect the battery charger to a wall outlet (wall socket) using the power cord (mains lead). Charging starts, and the CHARGE lamp lights. When the CHARGE lamp goes out, charging is finished. For details on the battery charger, see page page 111. To remove the batteries Press the - end of the battery down in order to raise the + end, then remove the battery. • When charging is finished, disconnect the power cord (mains lead) from the wall outlet (wall socket), and remove the Nickel-Metal Hydride batteries from the battery charger.,

Charging time Notes on the Nickel-Metal • To use up the batteries completely, put the

Getting started

Hydride batteries camera in the slide show mode (page 63) and Nickel-Metal Hydride Charging time leave it that way until the batteries are used up.

battery • If the poles of the Nickel-Metal Hydride • Do not peel off the external seals or damage the batteries are dirty, the batteries may not charge batteries. Never use batteries from which the

NH-AA-DA × 2 Approx. 6 hours properly. Occasionally clean the poles of the seals have been partially or completely

(supplied) batteries and the terminals of the charger by removed, or batteries that have been split in any This represents the time required to charge fully wiping them with a dry cloth. way. These may cause leakage, explosion, or depleted Nickel-Metal Hydride batteries using • When transporting the Nickel-Metal Hydride heat-up of the battery, and personal scald or the supplied battery charger in an environment batteries, be sure to use the battery case injury may be caused. These may cause a where the ambient temperature is 25°C (77°F). (supplied). If the +/- metal terminals are malfunction of the battery charger. shorted, there is a possibility of danger from • Charging is complete in approximately six excessive heat or fire. hours. The CHARGE lamp may remain lit • At the time of purchase, or when the Nickel- longer than six hours, but this is not a Metal Hydride batteries have not been used for malfunction. a long time, they may not fully charge. This is • If you use the BC-CSQ2 battery charger typical of this type of battery, and is not a supplied with the STAMINA “Super Quick malfunction. If this happens, repeatedly using charge” kit (not supplied), the batteries will up the battery fully, and then recharging it, charge faster. should correct the problem. Charging time • Even when Nickel-Metal Hydride batteries are When charging two Nickel-Metal Hydride not being used they loose their charge naturally batteries: Approximately 2 hours 30 minutes over time. It is recommended that you recharge When charging four Nickel-Metal Hydride the batteries just before using them. batteries: Approximately 5 hours • If you recharge Nickel-Metal Hydride batteries before fully using up the existing charge, the so-called memory effect* can occur, and the low battery warning will be triggered sooner than expected. Charging the battery after fully depleting the existing charge should correct the problem. * The “memory effect” – the situation in which a battery temporarily accepts a less than full charge.,

Inserting the batteries

21123, Open the battery cover. , Insert the batteries. , Close the battery cover. Slide it in the direction of the arrow with the Match the +/− poles of the batteries to the +/ Close the battery cover while holding the OPEN button pressed, and it opens out. − marks inside the battery case. batteries in. The cover is closed when it clicks. • Occasionally clean the poles of the batteries and the terminals of the battery cover by wiping To remove the batteries them with a dry cloth. If the poles of the Stand the camera on end, open the battery batteries or the terminals become covered with a film of dirt or oil from the skin, the operating cover upward, then remove the batteries. time of the camera can be greatly reduced. • Make sure you do not drop the batteries when opening or closing the battery cover.,

Battery remaining indicator The Power Save function Battery life and the number of

Getting started (When using the Nickel-Metal When the Power Save function is set to On, images that can be recorded/

Hydride batteries) you can shoot for a longer period of time. played back

As the battery power decreases with use, the Turn the mode selector to SET UP, and set The tables show approximate guidelines for the battery remaining indicator displays the [Power Save] in Setup 1 to [On]. The length of time the camera can be used when you amount of power remaining using the factory setting of the camera is set to [On] shoot in Normal mode in an environment where the (page 107). ambient temperature is 25°C (77°F), and the batteries following symbols. are fully charged. The guidelines for the number of We recommend that you set [Power Save] Battery Battery remaining images that can be recorded or played back allow for remaining guidelines to [On] when using alkaline batteries. changing the supplied “Memory Stick” as necessary. indicator (A full charge is 100%) Actual results may differ slightly from these, When the Power Save function is On depending on the conditions of use. Sufficient power remaining • In shooting still images, the focus only focuses Battery half full Shooting still imageswhen the shutter is pushed down halfway. 1) Battery low, recording/ • While charging the flash, the lamp flashes Under the average conditions playback will stop soon. and the LCD screen is turned off. After the NH-AA-DA (2) (supplied) flash is completely charged, the LCD screen Image LCD No. of Battery Change the batteries for fully turns on. size screen images life (min.) charged ones, or charge these DSC-P72 batteries. (The warning indicator flashes.) On Approx. 300 Approx. 1503.1M Off Approx. 500 Approx. 250 On Approx. 300 Approx. 150

VGA

• If the LCD screen is off, press to turn it Off Approx. 500 Approx. 250 on. DSC-P52 • Based on the conditions under which the On Approx. 320 Approx. 160 camera is being used and the state of the 3.1M Off Approx. 540 Approx. 270 charge, or on the environment, this information On Approx. 320 Approx. 160 may not be correctly indicated. VGA • Off Approx. 540 Approx. 270When the AC Adaptor (not supplied) is being used, the remaining battery information is not DSC-P32 displayed. On Approx. 320 Approx. 1603.1M Off Approx. 540 Approx. 270 On Approx. 320 Approx. 160

VGA

Off Approx. 540 Approx. 270 1,

Inserting the batteries (continued)

Playing back2)R6 (Size AA) alkaline battery still images • The battery life and the number of images (2) (not supplied) recordable decrease under the following NH-AA-DA (2) (supplied) Image LCD No. of Battery conditions: size screen images life (min.) No. of Battery life – At low temperatures. Image size images (min.) – Using the flash. DSC-P72 – Turning the camera on and off frequently. On Approx. 70 Approx. 35 DSC-P72 3.1M – Using the zoom heavily (DSC-P72/P52 only) Off Approx. 130 Approx. 65 3.1M Approx. 5400 Approx. 270 – When [LCD Backlight] is set to [Bright]. On Approx. 70 Approx. 35 VGA Approx. 5400 Approx. 270 – When [Power Save] is set to [Off].VGA Off Approx. 130 Approx. 65 – After using the batteries repeatedly over a DSC-P52 long period of time or after often allowing it DSC-P52 3.1M Approx. 6000 Approx. 300 to self-discharge after charging (page 110). On Approx. 80 Approx. 40 3.1M Off Approx. 140 Approx. 70 VGA Approx. 6000 Approx. 300 On Approx. 80 Approx. 40 DSC-P32

VGA

Off Approx. 140 Approx. 70 3.1M Approx. 6000 Approx. 300 DSC-P32 VGA Approx. 6000 Approx. 300 On Approx. 80 Approx. 40 3.1M 2) Off Approx. 140 Approx. 70 Showing single images in order, one On Approx. 80 Approx. 40 approximately every three seconds

VGA

Off Approx. 140 Approx. 70 Shooting3) movies When using Sony alkaline batteries NH-AA-DA (2) (supplied) 1) Shooting under the following conditions: LCD LCD screen – The image quality is set to [Fine]. screen On Off – Shooting one image every 30 seconds. DSC-P72 Approx. 160 Approx. 210 – Alternatively pressing the zoom W and T buttons fully for each shot (DSC-P72/P52 DSC-P52 Approx. 160 Approx. 210 only). DSC-P32 Approx. 160 Approx. 210 – Using the flash once in every two shots. – Turning on and off once in every ten shots. 3) Continuous shooting with a picture size of 160 (Mail),

Using an external power source

AC Adaptor (not Getting started supplied) DC plug Jack cover , Open the jack cover, then connect the AC-LS5 AC

Adaptor (not supplied) to the DC IN jack of the camera.

Connect the plug with the v mark facing toward the LCD screen. • Be sure to use the AC-LS5 AC Adaptor. Other AC adaptors cannot be used with this camera. • Connect the AC Adaptor to an easily accessible wall outlet (wall socket) close by. If some trouble occurs while using the adaptor, immediately shut off the power by disconnecting the plug from the wall outlet (wall socket). 2 To a wall outlet (wall socket) Power cord 2 (mains lead) , Connect the power cord (mains lead) to the AC Adaptor and to a wall outlet (wall socket). • When you have finished using the AC Adaptor, disconnect it from the DC IN jack of the camera. • The set is not disconnected from the AC power source (mains) as long as it is connected to the wall outlet (wall socket), even if the unit itself has been turned off.

Using your camera

abroad Power sources You can use your camera in any country or area with the supplied battery charger or AC Adaptor (not supplied) within 100 V to 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz. Use a commercially available AC plug adaptor [a], if necessary, depending on the design of the wall outlet (wall socket) [b]. BC-CS2A/CS2B • Do not use an electrical transformer (travel converter), as this may cause a malfunction.,

Turning your camera on/off The Auto Power Off function

POWER lamp

POWER POWER

, Press POWER to turn on the camera. The POWER lamp lights in green and the power is on. When you turn on the camera for the first time, the Clock Set screen appears (page 21). To turn off the power Press POWER again, the POWER lamp goes out, and the camera turns off. • Do not remove the batteries or AC Adaptor with the lens portion pulled out. This may cause a malfunction (DSC-P72 only). • When you turn the power on with the mode selector set to or , the lens begins to move (DSC-P72 only). Please be careful not to touch the lens. If no tasks are performed for a while* when shooting, viewing images, or setting up the camera while using the batteries, power is automatically shut off to preserve battery power. However, in the following circumstances, even if the batteries are being used to power the camera, the Auto Power Off function will not work. • Movies are being played back • A slide show is being shown • A cable is connected to the (USB) jack or the A/V OUT (MONO) jack * When [Power Save] is set to [On]: approximately 90 seconds When [Power Save] is set to [Off]: approximately three minutes

How to use the

control button Program Auto Camera Mode Voice E-Mail Burst 2 Normal REC Mode To change the current settings of the camera, bring up the menu or the SET UP screen (page 45), and use the control button to make the changes. For each item, press v/V/b/B to select the desired value, then press z or b/B to make the setting.,

Setting the date and time

Getting started Mode selector POWER Clock Set Y/M/D Clock Set Y/M/DM/D/Y M/D/Y D/M/Y D/M/Y 2003 / 1 / 1 12 : 00 OK 2003 / 1 / 1 12 : 00 OK AM AM Cancel Cancel OK OK123, Set the mode selector to . , Press POWER to turn on the , Select the desired date format camera. with v/V on the control button, • You can carry out this operation even when the then press z. mode selector is set to or . The POWER lamp lights in green and the • To set the time and the date again, set the mode Clock Set screen appears on the LCD You can select from [Y/M/D] (year/month/ selector to SET UP, select [Clock Set] in screen. day), [M/D/Y], and [D/M/Y]. (Setup 1) (pages 45, 107), then proceed from Step 3. • If the rechargeable button battery, which provides the power for saving the time data, ever loses its charge (page 109), the Clock Set screen automatically reappears. If this happens, start from Step 3 to set up the date and time again., Clock Set Y/M/D Clock Set Y/M/D Clock Set Y/M/D M/D/Y M/D/Y M/D/Y D/M/Y D/M/Y D/M/Y 2003 / 1 / 1 12 : 00 OK 2003 / 7 / 4 12 : 00 OK 2003 / 7 / 4 10 : 30 OK AM AM AM Cancel Cancel Cancel OK OK OK456, Select the year, month, day, , Set the desired numerical , Select [OK] with B on the hour, or minute item you want value with v/V on the control control button, then press z. to set with b/B on the control button, then press z. The date and time are set and the clock will button. After setting the current numerical value, start to keep time. v is shown above and V is shown below the set the next item. Repeat the above process selected item. until all of the items have been set. • To cancel the setting process, select [Cancel], then press z. • If you select [D/M/Y] in Step 3, set the time on a 24- hour cycle.,

Shooting still images Inserting and removing a “Memory Stick”

Shooting still images Terminal Access lamp Label side side123, Open the “Memory Stick” , Insert the “Memory Stick.” , Close the “Memory Stick” cover. cover. Insert the “Memory Stick” all the way in Slide the cover in the direction of the arrow. until it clicks as shown in the illustration. To remove the “Memory Stick” Open the “Memory Stick” cover, then push • For more information about the “Memory • Whenever you insert a “Memory Stick,” push it the “Memory Stick” to pop it out. Stick,” see page 109. as far as it can go. If you do not insert it correctly, a proper recording or playback may • Whenever the access lamp is lit, the not be carried out. camera is recording or reading out an image. Never remove the “Memory Stick” or turn off the power at this time. The data may be corrupted.,

Setting the still image size

3.1M VGA Mode selector 3.1M 3.1M 2.8M(3:2) 2.8M(3:2) 2.0M 2.0M 1.2M 1.2M VGA VGA Image Size Image Size123, Set the mode selector to . , Turn on the camera, then press , Select the desired image size (Image Size). with v/V on the control button. The Image Size setup item appears. The image size is set. After the setting is completed, press • For more information about the image size, see (Image Size). The Image Size setup item page 25. disappears from the screen. • The image size value selected here is preserved even when the camera is turned off.,

Image size and quality

You can choose image size (number of The number of images that can b Shooting still images pixels) and image quality (compression ratio) based on the kind of images you want to shoot. The larger you make the image size and the higher you make the image quality, the better your image, but also the larger the amount of data needed to preserve your image. This means you can save fewer images in your “Memory Stick.” Choose an image size and quality level appropriately for the kind of images you want to shoot. You can resize the images later (Resize function, see page 69). You can choose an image size from among the five options in the following tables. The image sizes shown below show minimum settings as examples. When you want to improve image quality, select a larger image size. Image size Examples 3.1M 2048×1536 Printing A4 size images 2.8M (3:2) 2048(3:2) 3:2 prints1) 2.0M 1632×1224 Printing A5 size images 1.2M 1280×960 Printing postcard size images VGA 640×480 Creating your home page 1) This option records images in a horizontal to vertical proportion of 3:2 to match the size of the print paper used. e saved in a “Memory Stick”2) The number of images that can be saved in Fin number of images) Capacity Image 16MB 32MB 64MB size 3.1M 10 (18) 20 (37) 41 (74) 2.8M (3:2) 10 (18) 20 (37) 41 (74) 2.0M 16 (30) 33 (61) 66 (123) 1.2M 24 (46) 50 (93) 101 (187) VGA 97 (243) 196 (491) 394 (985) 2) When [REC Mode] is set to [Normal] For the number of images that can be saved in other modes, see page 101. 3) For more information about the image quality mode, see page 46. • “3.2MEGA PIXELS” shown on the surface of the camera is the number of effective pixels of the CCD. However, the maximum number of pixels recorded is 3.1 mega pixels. • When the images recorded using other Sony devices are played back, the image size indication may be different from the actual image size. e (Standard)3) mode are shown below. (Units: 128MB MSX-256 MSX-512 MSX-1G 82 (149) 148 (264) 302 (537) 617 (1097) 82 (149) 148 (264) 302 (537) 617 (1097) 133 (246) 238 (446) 484 (907) 988 (1852) 202 (376) 357 (649) 726 (1320) (2694) 1428 2904 5928 790 (1975) (3571) (7261) (14821) • When the images are viewed on the LCD screen of the camera, they all look the same size. • Number of shooting images can differ from these values according to shooting conditions. • When the remaining number of images recordable is more than 9999, “>9999” is indicated.,

Basic still image shooting – using auto mode

VGAFINE 101 Mode selector 98 F2.8 AE/AF lock indicator123Flashes in green t Remains on , Set the mode selector to , , Hold the camera steadily with , Press and hold the shutter and turn on the camera. both hands and position a button halfway down. subject in the center of the The recording folder name is indicated on The camera beeps. When the AE/AF lock the LCD screen for about five seconds. focus frame. indicator stops flashing and remains on, the Do not cover the lens, flash, or microphone camera is ready for shooting. (The screen • The lens cover opens when the power is turned with your fingers. may be frozen for a split second depending on. on the subject.) • Do not touch the lens portion while it is operating, such as when you press POWER to • The minimum focal distance to a subject is as • If you release your finger from the shutter turn on the power or when the zoom function is follows: 3 button, shooting will be canceled. working (DSC-P72 only) (page 29). DSC-P72: 50 cm (19 /4 inches) • DSC-P52: 8 cm (3 1/ inches) (W)/40 cm • When the camera does not beep, the AF You can create a new folder in the “Memory 4 Stick” and select the folder for storing images (15 /4 inches) (T) adjustment is not complete. You can continue to DSC-P32: 10 cm (4 inches) shoot, but the focus is not set properly.(page 46). To shoot subjects at distances closer than this, • The frame indicated on the LCD screen shows use the macro mode (DSC-P72 only) (page 30). the focus adjustment range. (AF range finder, see page 48.),

The position on the mode Twilight mode [ ]

Shooting still images VGA 101 97 selector See page 58. When the mode selector is set to , the functions that can be selected change Twilight portratit mode [ ] according to the (Camera) setting in the See page 58. menu settings as follows: Landscape mode [ ] See page 58. 4 Snow mode [ ] Program See page 58. , Press the shutter button fully AutoCamera Mode down. Beach mode [ ] See page 58. The shutter clicks, the shooting is Auto mode shooting [Auto] completed, and the still image is saved in You can shoot your subject easily since this To change the camera mode the “Memory Stick.” When the recording mode automatically adjusts the focus, lamp (pages 9, 11, 13) goes out, you can exposure, and white balance. In this mode, 1 Set the mode selector to . shoot the next image. [Mode] is set to [Fine], the AF range finder 2 Press MENU. is set to [Multi AF], and the metering mode 3 Select (Camera) with b on the • When you are shooting with the batteries, if no is set to multi-pattern metering (pages 48, control button. tasks are performed for a while with the camera 51). The menu items you can display are turned on, power is automatically shut off to 4 Select the desired camera mode with v/limited to (Camera) and [Mode] (REC preserve battery power (page 20). V on the control button.Mode). Program mode shooting [Program] You can set the shooting functions in the menu settings according to your shooting condition.,

Basic still image shooting –

using auto mode (continued)

About Auto Focus

When you try to shoot a subject that is hard to focus on, the AE/AF lock indicator will change to flashing slowly. The Auto Focus function may be difficult to use with in the following subjects. In such cases, release the shutter button, then try to recompose the shot and focus again. • The subject is distant from the camera and dark • The contrast between the subject and its background is poor • The subject is seen through glass, such as a window • A fast-moving subject • The subject has a reflection, such as that from a mirror, or there is a luminous body and a lustrous subject • A flashing subject. • A backlit subject There are two methods for Auto Focus function: Multipoint AF and Center AF (page 48). When [ ] (Camera) is set to [Auto] in the menu settings, the Multipoint AF is automatically selected.

Checking the last image shot – Quick Review VGA

101 98 Review 101-0008 20037410:30PM

RETURN

, Press b (7) on the control button. To return to shooting mode, press the shutter button lightly or press b (7) on the control button again. To delete the image displayed on the LCD screen 1 Press (Delete). 2 Select [Delete] with v on the control button, then press z. The image is deleted.,

Using the zoom feature

W (wide-angle) T (telephoto) Smart zoom Shooting still images Zoom scaling indicator VGA 101 VGA 101 98 98 You can zoom in on the image using a x1.1 x5.0 digital zoom process with no deterioration The T side of this line shows the extent of smart zoom in the image quality. The maximum zoom scale depends on the image size. x2.5 DSC-P72 DSC-P52 DSC-P32 2.0M 3.8× 2.5× 1.3× 1.2M 4.8× 3.2× 1.6×

Press the zoom buttons to VGA 9.6× 6.4× 3.2×,

choose the desired zoom When the image size is [3.1M] or DSC-P32 position, and shoot your [2.8M (3:2)], the smart zoom does not The DSC-P32 does not have an optical work. zoom. It has only the smart zoom.image. The minimum distance needed to DSC-P72/DSC-P52 • You cannot confirm the image using the finder focus on a subject When the zoom exceeds 3× (DSC-P72) or when using the smart zoom function. • When using the smart zoom, the image on the Approximately 50 cm (19 3/4 inches) from 2× (DSC-P52), enlargement is carried out LCD screen may look rough. However, this the end of the lens (DSC-P72) using the smart zoom. When the smart phenomenon has no effect on the recorded Approximately 8 cm (3 1/4 inches) (W)/ zoom is not needed, set [Smart Zoom] to image. 40 cm (15 3/4 inches) (T) from the end of the [Off] in the SET UP settings (page 106). • AF range finder is not shown when using the lens (DSC-P52) Pressing the zoom buttons displays the smart zoom. When 9 (Focus) is set to [Multi zoom scaling indicator on the LCD screen. AF] or [Center AF], or flashes and the Approximately 10 cm (4 inches) from the centrally-located subject has priority to focus end of the lens (DSC-P32) on. • The lens moves when the zoom feature is being used (DSC-P72 only). Be very careful not to touch the lens. • You cannot change the zoom scaling while shooting movies (page 72).,

Shooting close-ups – Macro (DSC-P72 only)

VGA 101 VGA FINE 101 98 9712For close-ups of small subjects like flowers , Set the mode selector to , , Center the subject in the frame, or insects, shoot using the macro feature. and press B ( ) on the control and press the shutter button You can use this feature for close-ups of button. fully down. subjects up to the distances specified below. The (Macro) indicator appears on the To return to normal shooting When the zoom is set all the way to LCD screen. Press B ( ) on the control button again. the W side: 10 cm (4 inches) from the end The indicator disappears from the LCD of the lens • If the menu is currently displayed, press MENU screen. When the zoom is set all the way to first to make the menu disappear. 3 • You can carry out this operation even when the the T side: 50 cm (19 / inches) from the • Use the LCD screen to shoot when using the 4 mode selector is set to . macro feature. If you use the finder, the limits end of the lens of what you see and what you actually shoot may be different.,

Using the self-timer

Shooting still images VGA 101 VGAFINE 101 98 98 F2.812, Set the mode selector to , , Center the subject in the frame, and press V ( ) on the control and press the shutter button button. fully down. The (Self-timer) indicator appears on the The Self-timer lamp (pages 8, 10, 12) will LCD screen. flash in orange, and you will hear a beeping sound. The image will be shot after • If the menu is currently displayed, press MENU approximately 10 seconds. first to make the menu disappear. • You can carry out this operation even when the To cancel the self-timer during the mode selector is set to . operation Press V ( ) on the control button again. The indicator dissapears from the LCD screen. • If you stand in front of the camera and press the shutter button, the focus and the exposure may not be correctly set.,

Selecting a flash mode

(No flash): The flash will not be used. When shooting against a light VGA 101 98 source • If the menu is currently displayed, press MENU first to make the menu disappear. In Auto mode, shooting against a light • You can carry out this operation even when the source automatically flashes even when mode selector is set to (Clip motion). there is enough light around the subject. • The recommended distance using the flash is as (Daylight synchro) follows (when [ISO] is set to [Auto]): – About 0.5 m to 3.8 m (19 3/4 inches to 12 feet 19 Before flashed5 /32 inches) (W)/0.5 m to 2.5 m (19 3/4 inches to 8 feet 2 7/16 inches) (T) (DSC-P72).

Set the mode selector to , – About 0.5 m to 3.3 m (19

3/4 inches to 10 feet , 9 29/32 inches) (DSC-P52). and press v ( ) on the control – About 0.5 m to 3.8 m (19 3/4 inches to 12 feet button repeatedly to selecta519/32 inches) (DSC-P32). flash mode. • You can change the brightness of the flash using [Flash Level] in the menu settings (page 103). The flash mode has the following features. • Because the shutter speed is slower under dark When flashed conditions when (Slow synchro) or (No No indicator (Auto): The camera decides flash) is selected, it is recommended that you to use the flash based on lighting use a tripod. • While the flash is being charged, the lamp conditions. The flash will be used when flashes. After charging is completed, the lamp there is not enough light or when shooting a goes out. subject against a light source. • The flash mode selected here is preserved even (Forced flash): The flash will be used when the camera is turned off. regardless of the amount of ambient light. • The best performance may not be given (Slow synchro): The flash will be depending on shooting conditions. used regardless of the amount of ambient • When you do not want to use the flash, set the light. In this mode, the shutter speed is flash mode to (No flash). slower under dark conditions, so you can clearly shoot a background that is out of the flash-lit area.,

To reduce “red-eye” when Shooting with the AF DSC-P32: Up to approximately 2.5 m (8 feet

Shooting still images shooting live subjects illuminator 2 /16 inches) • If AF illuminator light misses the center of the The flash pre-strobes before shooting to This is additional lighting provided to assist image somewhat, the camera will focus reduce the red-eye phenomenon. Set [Red in focusing when shooting in dark places. properly as long as it reaches the subject. Eye Reduction] to [On] in the SET UP Set [AF Illuminator] to [Auto] in the SET • When the focus preset distance is set (page 49), settings (page 106). appears on the UP settings (page 106). If you try to shoot the AF illuminator does not function. • When 9 (Focus) is set to [Multi AF] or LCD screen. under insufficient lighting conditions, ON [Center AF], the AF range finder is not appears on the LCD screen; the AF displayed. or flashes and the centrally- illuminator will emit a red light located subject has priority to focus on. automatically during the time between • When [ ] (Camera) is set to one of the when the shutter button is pressed halfway following items in the menu settings, the AF down and the focus locks. illuminator will not function (page 58). – When shooting in Twilight mode – When shooting in Landscape mode m VGA FINE 10198 • The AF illuminator is a bright light. There are no safety hazards, but when shooting at short ON F2.8 30 distances, do not aim it directly at the subject’s eyes. • Even when the AF illuminator flashes, but • The amount of red-eye reduction possible sufficient light does not reach the subject*, or varies according to the individual. In addition, the subject has weak contrast, the camera may the distance to the subject, and whether or not not focus properly. the subject has seen pre-strobe light begin to * The recommend distance for this feature is as strobe may also reduce the effectiveness of the follows: red-eye reduction process. DSC-P72: Up to approximately 3.8 m (12 feet 5 19/32 inches) (W)/Up to approximately 2.5 m (8 feet 2 7/16 inches) (T) DSC-P52: Up to approximately 3.3 m (10 feet 9 29/32 inches),

Shooting with the finder

All of the indicators are turned off • This setting is maintained even when the power is turned off. Finder r The LCD screen is turned off. r All of the available indicators are turned on. VGA 101 The finder is convenient when you want to 98 save battery power, or when it is difficult to confirm the image using the LCD screen. Each time you press , the display changes in the following order. • The image through the finder does not indicate the actual recordable range. To confirm the recordable range, use the LCD screen. • For details on the items displayed, see page 113. • Just as with the AE/AF lock indicator on the LCD screen, when the AE/AF lock lamp of the finder section stops flashing and remains on, you can start shooting (page 26). • When the LCD screen is turned off, the smart zoom does not function (page 29). • If you press (Flash mode)/ (Self-timer)/ (Macro) (DSC-P72) or (Spot meter) (DSC- P52/P32) with the LCD screen turned off, the image will be displayed on the screen for approximately two seconds so you can check or change the setting.,

Inserting the date and time on a still image

Shooting still images Camera Camera Camera Moving Image: MPEG Movie Moving Image: Day&Time Moving Image: MPEG Movie Smart Zoom: On Smart Zoom: Date Smart Zoom: On Date/Time: Off Date/Time: Off Date/Time: Date Red Eye Reduction: Off Red Eye Reduction: Red Eye Reduction: Off AF Illuminator: Auto AF Illuminator: AF Illuminator: Auto SELECT OK PAGE SELECT123, Set the mode selector to SET , Select (Camera) with v on , Select the date and time setting

UP. the control button, then press with v/V on the control button,

then press z.

The SET UP screen appears. B. Select [Date/Time] with v/V, Day&Time: Inserts the date and the time of

• When images are shot with the date and time then press B. shooting into the image inserted, the date and time cannot be removed Date: Inserts the year, the month and the later. • When shooting images with the date and time date of shooting into the image inserted, the actual date and time are not Off: Does not insert date/time data into the displayed on the LCD screen, and is image displayed in the upper-left portion of the LCD After the setting has been completed, set the screen instead. The actual date and time are mode selector to to shoot your image. indicated in red on the lower-right corner when the image is played back. • When you chose [Date], the date will be inserted in the order set in “Setting the date and time” (page 21). • This setting is maintained even when the power is turned off.,

Viewing still images Viewing images on the LCD screen of your

camera Single Index (single-image) screen (nine-ima

VGA

101 8/9 101-0008 20037410:30PM BACK/NEXT VOLUME SINGLE DISPLAY You can view images shot with the camera almost immediately on the screen. You can select the following three methods for viewing images. Single (single-image) screen You can view one image at a time, occupying the entire screen. Index (nine-image) screen Nine images are displayed simultaneously in separate panels on the screen. Index (triple-image) screen Three images are displayed simultaneously in separate panels on the screen. Various image information items are also displayed. Index ge) screen (triple-image) screen Aperture Value: F2.8 Shutter Speed: 1/30 Exposure Value: 0.0 ISO: 100 101-0002 20037410:30PM MOVE SINGLE DISPLAY BACK/NEXT • For details on the movies, see page 73. • For a detailed description of the screen indicators, see page 115.

Viewing on the single-image

screen

VGA

101 8/9 101-0008 20037410:30PM BACK/NEXT VOLUME , Set the mode selector to , and turn on the camera. The newest image in the selected recording folder (page 47) is displayed., Viewing still images

VGA

101 3/9 101-0003 20037410:30PM BACK/NEXT VOLUME , Select the desired still image with b/B on the control button. b : Displays the previous image. B : Displays the next image.

Viewing on the index (nine- or triple-image) screen

SINGLE DISPLAY MOVE , Press the zoom W (index) button once. The display switches to the Index (nine- image) screen. To display the next (previous) Index screen Press v/V/b/B on the control button to move the yellow frame up/down/left/right. Aperture Value: F2.8 Shutter Speed: 1/30 Exposure Value: 0.0 ISO: 100 101-0002 20037410:30PM SINGLE DISPLAY BACK/NEXT , Press the zoom W (index) button once more. The display switches to the Index (triple- image) screen. Pressing v/V on the control button shows the remaining image information. To display the next (previous) Index screen Press b/B on the control button. To return to the single-image screen Press the zoom T button repeatedly, or press z on the control button.,

Viewing images on a TV screen

A/V connecting cable (supplied)

VGA

101 2/9 101-0002 20037410:30PM BACK/NEXT VOLUME A/V OUT 1 (MONO) jack 2 TV/Video switch 3 , Connect the supplied A/V , Turn on the TV, and set the TV/ , Set the mode selector to , connecting cable to the A/V Video switch to “Video.” and turn on the camera.

OUT (MONO) jack of the

Press b/B on the control button to select the camera and the audio/video • The name and location of this switch may differ depending on your TV. For details, refer to the desired image. input jacks of the TV. operating instructions supplied with the TV. • When using the camera abroad, it may be If your TV has stereo type input jacks, necessary to switch the video output signal to connect the audio plug (black) of the A/V match that of your TV system (page 107). connecting cable to the Lch audio input jack. • Turn off both the camera and the TV before connecting the camera and the TV with the A/V connecting cable., Watching images on a TV screen SECAM system Viewing still images If you want to view images on a TV, you Bulgaria, France, Guiana, Hungary, Iran, need a TV having a video input jack and the Iraq, Monaco, Poland, Russia, Ukraine, etc. A/V connecting cable (supplied). The color system of the TV must match as that of your digital still camera. Check the following list: NTSC system Bahama Islands, Bolivia, Canada, Central America, Chile, Colombia, Ecuador, Jamaica, Japan, Korea, Mexico, Peru, Surinam, Taiwan, the Philippines, the U.S.A., Venezuela, etc. PAL system Australia, Austria, Belgium, China, Czech Republic, Denmark, Finland, Germany, Holland, Hong Kong, Italy, Kuwait, Malaysia, New Zealand, Norway, Portugal, Singapore, Slovak Republic, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Thailand, United Kingdom, etc. PAL-M system Brazil PAL-N system Argentina, Paraguay, Uruguay,

Deleting still images Deleting images

VGA VGA VGA 101 2/9 101 2/9 101 2/9 Delete Delete 101-0002 20037410:30PM Exit Exit BACK/NEXT VOLUME OK BACK/NEXT OK BACK/NEXT123, Set the mode selector to , , Press (Delete). , Select [Delete] with v on the and turn on the camera. control button, then press z. The image has not yet been deleted at this

Select the image you want to point. “Memory Stick access” appears on the

delete with b/B on the control screen. When this message disappears, the button. • You cannot delete protected images (page 67). image has been deleted. To delete other images continuously Select the image you want to delete with b/ B on the control button. Next, select [Delete] with v on the control button, then press z. To cancel the deletion Select [Exit] with V on the control button, then press z.,

Deleting on the Index (nine-image) screen

Deleting still images Delete Exit Select All In Folder Delete Exit Select All In Folder SELECT MOVE TO NEXT123, While an Index (nine-image) , Select [Select] with b/B on the , Select the image you want to screen (page 37) is displayed, control button, then press z. delete with v/V/b/B on the press (Delete). control button, then press z. To delete all the images in the folder Select [All In Folder] with on the control The (Delete) mark is indicated on the B button, then press . Next, select [OK], selected image. The image has not yet been z then press . All of the unprotected images deleted at this point. Put the mark on all z in the folder are deleted. To cancel the of the images you want to delete. deletion, select [Cancel], then press z. • To cancel your selection, select images you want to cancel and press z again. The mark disappears.,

Deleting on the Index (nine-

image) screen (continued) Delete Exit OK , Press (Delete).

Select [OK] with B on the

control button, then press z. “Memory Stick access” appears on the screen. When this message disappears, all of the images with marks have been deleted. To cancel the deletion Select [Exit] with b on the control button, then press z.

Deleting on the Index (triple-image) screen

Aperture Value: F2.8 Shutter Speed: 1/30 Exposure Value: 0.0 ISO: 100 101-0002 20037410:30PM SINGLE DISPLAY BACK/NEXT , While an Index (triple-image) screen (page 37) is displayed, move the image you want to delete to the center with b/B on the control button. Delete Exit 101-0002 20037410:30PM OK BACK/NEXT , Press (Delete). The image has not yet been deleted at this point., Deleting still images Delete Exit 101-0002 20037410:30PM OK BACK/NEXT , Select [Delete] with v on the control button, then press z. “Memory Stick access” appears on the screen. When this message disappears, the image has been deleted. To cancel the deletion Select [Exit] with V on the control button, then press z.,

Formatting a “Memory Stick”

Memory Stick Tool Format: OK Format File Number: Cancel Create REC. Folder: Change REC. Folder: All data will be erased Ready? O K Cancel

OK OK

123, Insert the “Memory Stick” you , Select (Memory Stick Tool) , Select [OK] with v on the want to format into the camera. with v/V on the control button. control button, then press z.

Set the mode selector to SET Select [Format] with B, then,

The “Formatting” message appears on the

UP, and turn on the camera. press B. screen. When this message disappears, the Select [OK] with v , then press format is complete.

• The term “formatting” means preparing a z. “Memory Stick” to record images; this process is also called “initialization.” The supplied “Memory Stick” and those available To cancel the formatting commercially, are already formatted, and can be used immediately. Select [Cancel] with V on the control • When you format a “Memory Stick,” be button, then press z. aware that all of the data in the “Memory Stick” will be permanently erased. Protected images are also erased.,

Before advanced operations

Before advanced operations

Changing menu settings Changing items in the SET How to setup and Press MENU. UP screenoperate your camera a

The menu appears. a Set the mode selector to SET This section describes the most frequently UP. used menus and the SET UP screen. The SET UP screen appears. Camera Control button Program Auto Moving Image: MPEG Movie Camera Mode Smart Zoom: OnMENU Date/Time: Off Red Eye Reduction: Off AF Illuminator: Auto Mode selector b Select the setting item you want to change with b/B on SELECT the control button. b Select the setting item you The letters and symbols of the item want to change with v/V/b/B you select turn yellow. on the control button. The frame of the item you select turns yellow. Voice E-Mail Burst 2 Normal Setup 1 REC Mode Power Save: LCD Brightness: LCD Backlight: Beep: c Select the desired setting with Language: OK Clock Set: Cancel v/V on the control button.

OK

The frame of the selected setting turns yellow, and the setting is entered. c Press z on the control button to enter the setting.

To turn off the menu display

Press MENU. To turn off the SET UP screen display Set the mode selector to any position other than SET UP., c Select (P. Quality) with b/B,

Deciding the still then select the desired image Creating or selecting

image quality quality with v/V. a folder

FINE Mode selector: Mode selector: SET UP

You can select the still image quality from Your camera can create multiple folders [Fine] or [Standard]. Fine within a “Memory Stick.” You can select Standard P.Quality the folder used to store images. When not ISO Mode PFX Before operation creating a new folder, “101MSDCF” folder Set (Camera) to any mode other than is selected as the recording folder. [Auto] in the menu settings (page 27). • You can carry out this operation even when the You can create folders up to “999MSDCF.” mode selector is set to (Multi Burst). • The image quality value selected here is Control button preserved even when the camera is turned off. Control button MENU MENU Mode selector Mode selector • Up to 4000 images can be stored in one folder. a Set the mode selector to . When the folder capacity is exceeded, a new b Press MENU. folder is automatically created. The menu appears., Before advanced operations

Creating a new folder Selecting the recording

folder a Set the mode selector to SET a Set the mode selector to SET

UP. UP.

b Select (Memory Stick Tool) b Select (Memory Stick Tool) with v/V, [Create REC. Folder] with v/V, [Change REC. with B/v/V, and [OK] with B/v , Folder] with B/v/V, and [OK] then press z. with B/v , then press z. The following screen appears. The recording folder selection screen appears. Create REC. Folder Select REC. Folder 2/2 Creating REC. folder 102MSDCF Folder Name: 102MSDCF No. Of Files: 0 Ready? Created: 200374OK1:05:34 AM Cancel OKOKCancel OK BACK/NEXT c Select [OK] with v , then press z. c Select the desired folder with A new folder is created with a number b/B, and [OK] with v , then one higher than the largest number in press z. the “Memory Stick,” and the folder becomes the recording folder. To cancel changing the recording folder

To cancel folder creation Select [Cancel] in step 2 or 3.

Select [Cancel] in step 2 or 3. • You cannot select the “100MSDCF” folder as a • Once you create a new folder, you cannot delete recording folder. the new folder with the camera. • The image is stored in the newly selected • Recorded images are recorded in the newly folder. You cannot move images to other created folder until a different folder is created folders using the camera. or selected., Advanced still image shooting Before operation Multipoint AF

Choosing a focus When shooting still images, set

VGAFINE 101 method (Camera) to any mode other than [Auto] in 98 the menu settings (page 27). Mode selector: / AF range finder Control button

Multipoint AF MENU

The camera calculates the distance in three areas to the left, and right and in the center Mode selector Center AF of the image, letting you shoot using the auto fucus function without worrying about VGAFINE 10198 the image composition. This is useful when it is difficult to focus on the subject because AF range it is not in the center of the frame. The AF finder range finder that was used changes to green after the focus is achieved. a Set the mode selector to or • When you are shooting movies (MPEG movie)

Center AF . and you choose Multipoint AF, the distance to

the center of the screen is estimated as an The AF range finder is only the center of the b Press MENU. average, so the AF works even with a certain frame. You can shoot in desired image The menu appears. amount of vibration. The Center AF composition using the AF lock method. automatically focuses only on the center of the c Select 9 (Focus) with b/B, image, so it is convenient when you want to then select [Multi AF] or focus only on what you aim at. [Center AF] with / . • When you use the smart zoom or AFvVilluminator, priority AF movement is given to The focus is adjusted automatically. subjects in or near the center of the frame. In The color of the AF range finder frame this case, or flashes and the AF range changes from white to green. finder is not displayed., Advanced still image shooting Shooting techniques AE/AF lock indicator Even if it is difficult to focus in AF shooting because the subject is not in the center of the VGAFINE 101 frame, you can focus in this situation using 98 Center AF. For example, when you are shooting two subjects, and there is a gap F2.830 AF range between them, the camera may focus on the finder background visible in the gap. In a case like this, use AF lock to ensure the subjects are in correct focus. Compose the shot so that the subject is m centered in the AF range finder, and press the shutter button halfway down. VGAFINE 101 When the AE/AF lock indicator stops flashing 97 and remains on, return to the fully composed shot, and press the shutter button fully down. F2.8 • When you are using AF lock, you can capture an image with the correct focus even if the subject is at the edge of the frame. • You can carry out the AF lock adjustment process before you press the shutter button fully down.

Setting the distance

to the subject – Focus preset

Mode selector: /

When shooting an image using a previously set distance to the subject, or when shooting a subject through a net or through window glass, it is difficult to get the proper focus in auto focus mode. In these cases, use of the Focus preset is convenient. Before operation When shooting still images, set (Camera) to any mode other than [Auto] in the menu settings (page 27). Control button

MENU

Mode selector, a Set the mode selector to or b Press MENU.Adjusting the The menu appears. exposure b Press MENU. c Select (EV) with b/B. The menu appears. – EV adjustment The value of the exposure adjustment c Select 9 (Focus) with b/B, Mode selector: / is displayed. then select the distance to the Used when you want to change the subject with v/V. automatic exposure to one of your own 0EV You can select from the following choice. The value can be set a range from distance settings. +2.0EV to –2.0EV, in 1/3EV increments. 0EV EV WB 0.5m, 1.0m, 3.0m, 7.0m, ∞ (unlimited distance) Before operation When shooting still images, set d Select the exposure (Camera) to any mode other than [Auto] in adjustment value. 1.0m 7.0m 3.0m the menu settings (page 27). Select the exposure adjustment value 1.0m 0.5m with v/V. Center AF Multi AF Control button Make your adjustment while Focus WB MENU confirming the brightness of the background of the subject on the LCD Mode selector

To return to auto focus mode screen.

In step 3, select 9 (Focus), then select To return to auto adjust mode [Multi AF] or [Center AF]. Return the exposure adjustment value to • (Metering Mode) is not displayed on the 0EV. menu of the DSC-P52/P32. • Focal point information may not show the exact • (Metering Mode) is not displayed on the distance. Use it as a guide. menu of the DSC-P52/P32. • If you point the lens up or down, the error • When the subject is extremely bright or increases (DSC-P72 only). extremely dark, or when you are using the a Set the mode selector to or flash, the adjustment may not work. ., Advanced still image shooting Before operation Shooting techniques Selecting a metering When shooting still images, set In normal shooting, the camera makes mode (Camera) to any mode other than [Auto] in automatic exposure adjustments. Check the image to be shot, if it looks like the image the menu settings (page 27). below, you should make manual adjustments. Mode selector: / If you are shooting a back-lit person or a This function enables you to select a Control button snowy scene, make your adjustments in the + metering mode to suit the shooting plus direction; if you are shooting a dark MENU subject that fills the screen, making your conditions and purpose. Mode selector adjustments in the – direction should give the best results. Multi-pattern metering The image is divided into multiple regions and metering is performed for each region. The camera judges the subject position and background brightness, and determines a well-balanced exposure. Underexposured The camera is set to multi-pattern metering t Adjust in the + direction as the factory setting. For the DSC-P72

Spot metering a Set the mode selector to or

Spot metering lets you adjust the exposure . to the subject even when the subject is backlit or there is strong contrast between b Press MENU. the subject and the background. Position the Appropriate exposure The menu appears. spot metering cross hair at the point you want to shoot. c Select (Metering Mode) with b/B, then select [Multi] or [Spot] with v/V. Spot Overexposed t Adjust in metering the – direction cross hair, For the DSC-P52/P32 Auto (No indicator) a Set the mode dial to or . Adjusting color tones The white balance is adjusted automatically. b Press B ( ) on the control – White Balance button to turn spot metering Mode selector: / Before operation on. When shooting still images, set When the white balance is set to Auto, the The spot metering cross hair appears. white balance is set automatically in (Camera) to any mode other than [Auto] in the menu settings (page 27). response to the condition of the subject, and

To cancel spot metering the overall color balance is adjusted

accordingly. When you want to fix the Control buttonPress B ( ) again to turn spot metering off. The spot metering cross hair conditions under which the image is MENU disappears, and the camera returns to multi- captured, or when shooting under special Mode selector pattern metering. lighting conditions, you can select the settings manually. (Incandescent) • Used when shooting, for example, at a party, where the lighting conditions change often. • Used in a studio, or under video lights. (Fluorescent) a Set the mode selector to or Used when shooting under fluorescent . lights. b Press MENU. (Cloudy) The menu appears. Used when shooting under a cloudy sky. c Select [WB] (White Bal) with b/ B, then select the desired (Daylight) setting with v/V. Used when shooting outdoors, and for shooting at night, under neon lights, for To return to automatic settings fireworks, sunrise, and twilight gloom. In Step 3, select [Auto]., Advanced still image shooting • Under fluorescent lights that flicker, even if you High: Makes the flash level higher choose , the white balance may not be Adjusting the flash than normal. properly adjusted. Normal: Normal setting. • When the flash is triggered, the manual setting level Low: Makes the flash level lower than of white balance is cancelled, and the shooting of the image is done in Auto mode. – Flash level normal.

Mode selector: • You can carry out this operation even when the

Shooting techniques You can adjust the amout of flash light. mode selector is set to (Clip Motion only). The color of the subject that you see will be captured according to the lighting Before operation conditions. Under the bright summer sun, Set (Camera) to any mode other than everything will appear bluish, under a light [Auto] in the menu settings (page 27). sources like a light bulb, white objects will appear reddish. The human eye has an excellent ability to adjust. Even when Control button lighting conditions change, the eye can MENU adjust and recognize the correct color almost instantly. However, digital still cameras are Mode selector greatly influenced by light. Normally, this camera adjusts automatically, but if you notice that the color of the entire image seems to be a bit unnatural when replaying an image on the LCD screen, it is recommended that you adjust the white balance. a Set the mode selector to . b Press MENU. The menu appears. c Select [ ] (Flash Level) with b/B, then select the desired setting with v/V., Before operation d Shoot one frame.

Shooting multiple Set [Moving Image] to [Clip Motion] in the

frames SET UP settings (pages 45, 106). – Clip Motion Making "Clip Motion" Mode selector: Control button You can shoot a number of still images Mode selector consecutively (GIF animation). Because the Shutter button e Shoot the next frame. file size is small, these images are ideal for use on a home page, or for attaching to an e- Press the shutter button once to shoot the next frame, then repeat this mail message. operation until you have shot the desired number of frames. • Clip Motion images are restricted to color levels of 256 colors and below. This isafPress z. characteristic of GIF format recording. For this reason, the image quality of some images may All of the frames will be saved in the deteriorate. “Memory Stick.” a Set the mode selector to . Normal (160×120) To delete shot images in the The maximum number of frames you can b Press (Image Size). midst of shooting shoot in one Clip Motion shot is 10. This is The Image Size setup item appears. 1 In Steps 4 or 5, press b (7). suitable for use on a home page. c Select the desired mode with Shot images will be played back in / . order, playback stops when the last Mobile (120×108) v V image is reached. Two frames is the maximum number that You can select from [Normal] or [Mobile]. 2 Press (Delete), and select either can be shot in Clip Motion in this mode. [Delete Last] or [Delete All], then press This is suitable for use with portable data z. terminals. 3 Select [Delete], then press z. If you • Mobile mode has strict file size limits, so chose [Delete Last] in Step 2, repeat picture quality falls accordingly. Steps 1 to 3 to delete the images in order, from the latest one shot., Advanced still image shooting • If you do not complete Step 6, all the images a Set the mode selector to . will not be saved in the “Memory Stick.” Shooting in Multi • In Clip Motion, the date and time cannot be b Press MENU. inserted. Burst mode The menu appears. • When you view Clip Motion images using the Index screen, the images may appear different – Multi Burst c Select (Interval) with b/B, from the actual image recorded. • GIF files made on other cameras may not be Mode selector: then select the desired displayed correctly on this camera. Pressing the shutter button once records 16 between-frame interval with v/ • For the number of images you can record using frames in a row. This is convenient for V. Clip Motion, see page 101. checking your form in sports, for example. 1/30 1/7.5 1/15 1/30 WB Interval You can choose the frame interval from the menu settings (page 104). Before operation d Shoot your image. Set [Moving Image] to [Multi Burst] in the 16 frames will be recorded as one SET UP settings (pages 45, 106). image (image size: 1.2M). Control button • (Metering Mode) is not displayed on the menu of the DSC-P52/P32. MENU • When you play back images recorded in Multi Mode selector Burst mode on the camera, see page 65. • For the number of images that can be recorded, Shutter button see page 101. • The flash cannot be used. • In Multi Burst, the date and time cannot be inserted., c Select [Mode] (REC Mode) with

Shooting two images b/B, then select [Burst 2] with Shooting still images

in succession v/V. for e-mail – Burst 2 – E-Mail Mode selector: Mode selector: Voice You can shoot two images in succession E-Mail You can shoot images and save them in a Burst 2 while pressing the shutter button only once. Normal file that is small enough (320×240) to attach ISO REC Mode PFX to an e-mail message. The normal mode Control button image that was selected using the Image MENU d Shoot your image. Size setup item (page 24) is also recorded. You can do the next shooting after Mode selector “Recording” disappears from the LCD Control button Shutter button screen. MENU To return to normal mode Mode selector In Step 3, select [Normal]. Shutter button • The flash cannot be used. • The image is not displayed during shooting. Compose the picture before pressing the shutter button. • The interval needed for recording is about 0.5 a Set the mode selector to . second. b Press MENU. The menu appears. a Set the mode selector to . b Press MENU. The menu appears., Advanced still image shooting c Select [Mode] (REC Mode) with If you hold down the shutter b/B, then select [E-Mail] with Shooting still images button, sound is recorded until you v/V. with audio files release the shutter button for up to 40 seconds. d Shoot your image. – Voice You can do the next shooting after To return to normal modeMode selector: “Recording” disappears from the LCD In Step 3, select [Normal]. screen. You can record still images with audio files. • To view images recorded in Voice mode, carry Control button To return to normal mode out the same procedure described in “Viewing movies on the LCD screen” (page 73). In Step 3, select [Normal]. MENU • For the number of images that can be recorded, Mode selector see page 101. • For instructions on how to attach your images to an e-mail message, refer to the Help files of Shutter button the e-mail software you are using. • For the number of images that can be recorded, see page 101. a Set the mode selector to . b Press MENU. The menu appears. c Select [Mode] (REC Mode) with b/B, then select [Voice] with v. d Shoot your image. If you press and release the shutter button, sound is recorded for five seconds., Twilight portrait mode Snow mode

Shooting according to Use this mode when shooting people in the When the whole of the screen turns white,

scene conditions foreground at night. This mode allows you such as when you are shooting a snowscape, to shoot images of people in the foreground use this mode. This mode prevents the Mode selector: with distinct outlines without losing the image from losing color and brighten each When shooting night scenes, shooting feeling that you are shooting at night. color. people at night, shooting landscapes, or Because the shutter speed is slow, it is shooting a waterfront or a snowscape, use recommended that you use a tripod. the modes listed below to increase the quality of your images. Twilight mode Under dark lighting conditions, you can • The flash is set to (Forced flash) or (No shoot a distant night view. However, flash). because the shutter speed is slower under • The flash forcely strobes. these conditions, we recommend you use a Beach mode tripod. Landscape mode When shooting at the seaside or the Focuses on images far away, so is lakeside, the blue of the sea is clearly convenient for shooting landscapes at a recorded. distance. • You cannot shoot in Macro mode. • The flash cannot be used. • The flash is set to (Forced flash) or (No • You cannot shoot in Macro mode. flash). • The flash is set to (Forced flash) or (No flash)., Advanced still image shooting NR slow shutter The NR slow shutter mode removes noise Control button from recorded images, providing clear MENU images. When the shutter speed is slow, the camera automatically works the NR slow Mode selector shutter mode and “NR” is indicated next to the shutter speed indicator. Press the shutter F2.8 button fully down. NR2'' r Then the screen a Set the mode selector to turns black. Capturing b Press MENU. The menu appears. r c Select (Camera) with b, Finally, when then select the desired mode “Processing” Processing with v/V. disappears, the image has been recorded.

To return to the normal shooting

In Step 3, select [Auto] or [Program]. • To eliminate the effects of vibration, use of a tripod is recommended. • The setting is maintained even when the power is turned off. • Even when you select Twilight or Twilight portrait mode in Burst 2 mode, the shutter speed setting of the Burst 2 mode has priority. So, the image may not be recorded exactly as you intended., Before operation

Adding special effects When shooting still images, set

(Camera) to any mode other than [Auto] in – Picture Effect the menu settings (page 27). Mode selector: / You can add special effects to bring out the Control button contrast in your images. MENU Solarize B&W Mode selector Like an illustration In black and white with clearly delineated bright and dark portions a Set the mode selector to or Sepia Neg.Art . b Press MENU. The menu appears. c Select [PFX] (P.Effect) with b/ B, then select the desired Colored to look like an Made to look like a old photograph negative image mode with v/V.

To cancel Picture Effect

In Step 3, select [Off].,

Advanced still image viewing

Advanced still image viewing d Select the desired folder with On the Index (nine-image) screen

Selecting the folder b/B.

and playing back Select Folder 2/2 images 102Folder Name: 102MSDCF No. Of Files: 9 Created: 2003741:05:34 AM – FolderOK

Mode selector: Cancel SINGLE DISPLAY MOVE

OK BACK/NEXT Select the folder that images you want to On the Index (triple-image) screen play back are stored. e Select [OK] with v , then press z. Control button Aperture Value: F2.8 Shutter Speed: 1/30 MENU To cancel the selection Exposure Value: 0.0ISO: 100 Mode selector In step 5, select [Cancel]. 101-0001 20037410:30PM SINGLE DISPLAY BACK/NEXT

When multiple folders are

created in the “Memory Stick” • When no images are stored in the folder, “No file in this folder” appears. When the first or last image in the folder is • You can play back images from a last-shot one displayed, the following icons are indicated without selecting the folder. on the screen. : Moves to the previous folder. : Moves to the next folder. a Set the mode selector to . : Moves to both the previous and next folders. b Press MENU. On the single screen The menu appears.

VGA

101 9/9 c Select [Folder] with b, then press z. 101-0009 20037410:30PM BACK/NEXT VOLUME,

Enlarging an image e Adjust the zoom with the zoom Enlarging a portion of – Playback zoom W/T buttons.

a still image a Set the mode selector to .

Mode selector: b Display the image you want to

You can enlarge an image up to five times enlarge. the size of the original image. You can also record the enlarged image as a new file. c Press the zoom T button to enlarge the image. Control button d Select a portion of the image

MENU

to enlarge with v/V/b/B. Mode selector To cancel enlarged viewing Zoom buttons Press Press z.v • You cannot use Playback zoom with movies (MPEG movie), or images recorded in Clip Press Press Motion/Multi Burst modes. b B • If you press the zoom W button when you are viewing images that have not been enlarged, the Index screen will appear (page 37). • The images displayed in Quick Review (page 28) can be enlarged using the procedures Press V outlined in Steps 3 to 5. v: To view a portion of the top of the image V: To view a portion of the bottom of the image b: To view a portion of the left side of the image B: To view a portion of the right side of the image, Advanced still image viewing

Recording an enlarged c Select [Slide] with b/B, then

image – Trimming Playing back press z. successive images a After you have viewed an Set the following items with v/V/b/B. image using playback zoom, – Slide show Interval settings press MENU. 3 sec/5 sec/10 sec/30 sec/1 minMode selector: The menu appears. You can play back recorded images in Image b Select [Trimming] with B, then succession, one after another. This is useful Folder:Plays back all the images in the selected folder. press z. for checking your images, or for giving a All:Plays back all the images in the presentation. c Select the image size with / , “Memory Stick.”v V then press z. Control button Repeat The image is recorded, and the screen MENU On:Plays the images back repeatedly. image returns to the size it was before Off:Plays through the images one time enlargement. Mode selector and then stops. d Select [Start] with V/B, then • The trimmed image is recorded in the recording press z. folder as the newest file, and the original image is retained. The slide show begins. • The trimmed image may suffer some deterioration in image quality. To cancel the slide show setting • You cannot trim to 3:2-sized image. In Step 3, select [Cancel]. a Set the mode selector to . To stop slide show playback Press z, select [Exit] with B, then press z. b Press MENU. The menu appears.,

To skip to the next/previous a Set the mode selector to ,

image during slide show Rotating still images and display the image you Press B (next), or b (previous). – Rotate want to rotate. • The interval settings are just guidelines. The Mode selector: b Press MENU. actual intervals differ, based on factors like the Images shot when holding the camera The menu appears. size of the image. vertically can be rotated and displayed c Select [Rotate] with b/B, then horizontally. press z. d Select with v , and rotate the image with b/B. e Select [OK] with v/V, then press z.

To cancel the rotation

In Step 4 or 5, select [Cancel]. • Protected images, movies (MPEG movie), or images recorded in Clip Motion/Multi Burst modes cannot be rotated. • You may not be able to rotate images shot with other cameras. Control button • Also, when viewing images on a computer, the image rotation information may not be MENU reflected depending on the application Mode selector software., Advanced still image viewing

Playing back continuously Playing back frame by frame Playing back images

shot in Multi Burst a Set the mode selector to . – Jog playback mode b Select the Multi Burst image a Set the mode selector to . with b/B. b Select the Multi Burst image

Mode selector: The selected Multi Burst image is with b/B.

You can play back Multi Burst images played back continuously. The selected Multi Burst image is continuously or play them back frame by played back continuously. frame. This function is used for checking 101 14/14 the images. c Press z when the desired frame is displayed. Control button “Step” appears. 101-0014 20037410:30PM PAUSE BACK/NEXT VOLUME

MENU

101 14/14 Step Mode selector 3/16

To pause

Press z. To resume playback, press z again. The playback starts from the frame 101-0014 20037410:30PMPLAY FRAME BACK/NEXT VOLUME displayed on the LCD screen. d Advance the frame with b/B. B:The next frame is displayed. When you press and hold B, the frame advances. • When the images are played back on a b:The previous frame is displayed. computer, the 16 frames you shot will all be When you press and hold b, the displayed at the same time as part of one image. frame advances in the reverse • When Multi Burst images are played back on a direction. camera without the Multi Burst feature, the 16 frames will all be displayed at the same time, as part of one image, just as they are on a To return to normal playback computer. In Step 4, press z. The playback starts from the frame displayed on the LCD screen.,

To delete shot images

When using this mode, you cannot delete only certain frames. When you delete images, all 16 of the frames are deleted at the same time. 1 Display the Multi Burst image you want to delete. 2 Press (Delete). 3 Select [Delete], then press z. All of the frames are deleted., Still image editing Still image editing

On the single screen On the Index (nine-image) Protecting images

Set the mode selector to . screena – Protect b Display the image you want to a Set the mode selector to , Mode selector: protect with / . press the zoom W (index) b B To prevent accidental erasure of an button once to switch to the important image, you can protect it. c Press MENU. Index (nine-image) screen. The menu appears. Control button b Press MENU. d Select [Protect] with b/B, then The menu appears. MENU press z. c Select [Protect] with b/B, then Mode selector The image currently being displayed is now protected, and the - (Protect) press z. Zoom buttons mark is indicated on the screen. d Select [Select] with b/B, then VGA press z. 101 2/9 e Select the image you want to protect with v/V/b/B, then Protect Exit press z. OK BACK/NEXT The green - (Protect) mark is indicated on the selected image. e To protect other images, display the image you want to protect with b/B, then press z. SELECT MOVE MENU TO NEXT

To cancel the protection

In Step 4 or 5, press z again. The - f To protect other images, mark disappears. repeat Step 5. g Press MENU., h Select [OK] with B, then press On the Index (triple-image) To release protection z. screen In Step 4, select the image from which The - mark turns white and the you want to release protection, and press z. a Set the mode selector to , selected image is protected. To release protection from all of your press the zoom W (index) images, repeat this process for each of them.

To cancel the protection button twice to switch to the

In Step 4, select [Cancel], or in Step 8, Index (triple-image) screen. select [Exit]. b Move the image you want to protect to the center with b/B.

To release protection

In Step 5, select an image for which you c Press MENU. want to release protection with v/V/b/B The menu appears. and press z. The - mark turns gray and repeat this operation for all the images for d Select [Protect] with v/V, then which you want to release protection. Then, press z. press MENU, select [OK], and press z. The center image is protected, and the - (Protect) mark is indicated on that

To protect all the images in image.

folder In Step 4, select [All In Folder], then press z. Next, select [On], then press z. DPOF Protect Folder

To release protection of all the 101-0002 20037410:30PMOK BACK/NEXT

images in the folder In Step 4, select [All In Folder], and press e To protect other images, move z. Then select [Off], and press z. the image you want to protect to the center with b/B, and repeat Step 4., Still image editing d Select [Resize] with b/B, then

Changing image size press z.

– Resize e Select the new size with v/V,

Mode selector: then press z.

You can change the image size of a The resized image is recorded in the recorded image, and save it as a new file. recording folder as the newest file. You can resize to the following sizes. 3.1M, 2.0M, 1.2M, and VGA. To cancel the resizing The original image is retained even after In Step 5, select [Cancel]. resizing. • Movies (MPEG movie), or images recorded in Control button Clip Motion/Multi Burst modes cannot be resized. MENU • When images are resized from a smaller to a larger size, the image quality will deteriorate. Mode selector • You cannot resize to 3:2-sized image. • If you try to resize a 3:2-sized image, black bands will appear at the top and bottom of the image. a Set the mode selector to . b Display the image you want to resize with b/B. c Press MENU. The menu appears.,

On the single screen On the Index (nine-image) Choosing images to

print a Set the mode selector to . screen Display the image you want to a Set the mode selector to b – Print (DPOF) mark print with / . and press the zoom W (index) b B Mode selector: button once to switch to the c Press MENU. Index (nine-image) screen. You can designate certain images to be The menu appears. printed. b Press MENU. This mark is convenient when you want to d Select [DPOF] with b/B, then The menu appears. print images at a shop that conforms with press z. the DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) c Select [DPOF] with B, then The mark is indicated on this standard. image. press z. Control button VGA d Select [Select] with b/B, then 101 2/9 press z.

MENU

• You cannot mark using the [All In Folder] Mode selector option.

DPOF

Exit Zoom buttons OK BACK/NEXT e Select the images you want to print with v/V/b/B, then press e To mark other images, display z. the image you want to mark The green mark is indicated on the with b/B, then press z. selected image.

To delete the mark

In Step 4 or 5, press z again. The • You cannot mark movies (MPEG movie) or mark disappears. images recorded in Clip Motion mode. • In E-Mail mode, the print (DPOF) mark is SELECT MOVE MENU TO NEXT marked on the normal size image that was recorded at the same time. • When you mark images shot in Multi Burst f To mark other images, repeat mode, all the images are printed on one sheet Step 5 for each of them. divided into 16 panels., Still image editing g Press MENU. On the Index (triple-image) To delete the mark Select [OK] with , then press screen In Step 4, press z again.h B The mark disappears. To delete the z. a Set the mode selector to , marks from all of your images, repeat The mark turns white and the press the zoom W (index) this process for each of them. setting is completed. button twice to switch to the Index (triple-images) screen.

To delete the mark

In Step 5, select the image you want to b Move the image you want to delete the mark with v/V/b/B, and print to the center with b/B. press z. c Press MENU.

To delete all the marks from The menu appears.

the images in the folder d Select [DPOF] with v , then In Step 4, select [All In Folder], then press press z. z. Next, select [Off], then press z. The mark is indicated on the center image.

To cancel the marking

In Step 4, select [Cancel], or in Step 8, select [Exit].

DPOF

Protect Folder 101-0002 20037410:30PM OK BACK/NEXT e To mark other images, move the image you want to print to the center with b/B, and repeat Step 4., Enjoying movies a Set the mode selector to . Indicators on the screen while

Shooting movies you are shooting movies

b Press (Image Size). These indicators are not recorded. Mode selector: The Image Size setup item appears. Each time you press , the status of the You can shoot movies (MPEG movies). c Select the desired mode with LCD screen changes as follows: Indicators v/V. off t LCD off t Indicators on. See

Before operation page 114 for a detailed description of the

You can choose from 640 (VGA) or Set [Moving Image] to [MPEG Movie] in 160 (Mail). indicated items. the SET UP settings (pages 45, 106). See page 101 for the recording time allowed for each image size. To shoot close-ups (Macro) Control button (DSC-P72 only) d Press the shutter button fully Mode selector Set the mode selector to and follow the down. procedure on page 30. Shutter button “REC” appears on the screen and the camera starts recording the image and To shoot with a self-timer sound. Set the mode selector to and follow the 160 101 procedure on page 31. REC 00:00:02[00:10:48] • Be careful not to touch the microphone (pages 8, 10, 12) during shooting. • The flash cannot be used. • In MPEG movie, the date and time cannot be inserted. • When the capacity of the “Memory Stick” • You cannot change the zoom scaling while is used up, recording stops. shooting movies. e Press the shutter button fully down again to stop recording., Enjoying movies b Select the desired movie with To fast-forward / rewind

Viewing movies on b/B. Press B (next) or b (previous) while

the LCD screen Movies with the image size [160 playing back a movie. (Mail)] are displayed a size smaller To return to normal playback, press z.

Mode selector: than still images.

You can view movies on the LCD screen of Indicators on the screen while the camera and hear sounds from the 101 10/10 you are viewing movies 00:00:00 speaker of the camera. Each time you press , the status of the LCD screen changes as follows: Indicators off t LCD off t Indicators on. See 101_0010 20037410:30PM PLAY BACK/NEXT VOLUME page 115 for a detailed description of the Movies with the image size [640 indicated items. Mode selector (VGA)] are displayed on the full Control button screen. • The procedure for viewing movies on a TV is the same as that for viewing still images c Press z. (page 38). The movie images and sound are • A movie recorded using other Sony devices is displayed a size smaller than still images. played back. B (playback) appears on the LCD screen while a movie is playing back. Speaker 101 10/10 00:00:03 a Set the mode selector to . Playback bar 101_0010 20037410:30PM STOP REV/CUE VOLUME

To stop playback

Press z.

To adjust the volume

Press v/V.,

On the single screen On the Index (nine-image) Deleting movies

a Set the mode selector to screen . Mode selector: Select the movie you want to a Set the mode selector to b You can delete unwanted movies. delete with / . and press the zoom W (index) b B button once to display an Control button c Press (Delete). Index (nine-image) screen. The movie has not yet been deleted at Mode selector this point. b Press (Delete). Zoom buttons d Select [Delete] with v , then c Select [Select] with b/B, then press z. press z. “Memory Stick access” appears on the d Select the movies you want to screen. When this message disappears, the image has been deleted. delete with v/V/b/B, then press z. e To delete other movies, display The (Delete) mark is indicated on the movie you want to delete the selected movie. with b/B, then repeat Step 4.

To cancel the deletion

In Step 4 or 5, select [Exit]. SELECT MOVE TO NEXT The movie has not yet been deleted at this point. e Repeat Step 4 to delete other movies. f Press (Delete)., Enjoying movies g Select [OK] with B, then press On the Index (triple-image) z. screen “Memory Stick access” message a Set the mode selector to appears on the screen. When this message disappears, the movie has and press the zoom W (index) been deleted. button twice to switch to the Index (triple-image) screen.

To cancel the deletion

b Move the movie you want to In Step 3 or 7, select [Exit]. delete to the center with b/B.

To delete all the images in the c Press (Delete).

folder The menu appears. In Step 3, select [All In Folder], then press z. Next, select [OK], then press z. To cancel the deletion, select [Cancel] with b, then press z. Delete Exit 101_0010 20037410:30PM OK BACK/NEXT The movie has not yet been deleted at this point. d Select [Delete] with v , then press z. “Memory Stick access” message appears on the screen. When this message disappears, the movie has been deleted.

To cancel the deletion

In Step 4, select [Exit]., Cutting the movie numbered Cutting movies

Editing movies 101_0002

101_0001 101_0003 Control button Mode selector:

MENU

You can cut movies, or delete unnecessary123portions of movies. This is the Mode selector recommended mode to use when the 101_0002 “Memory Stick” capacity is insufficient, or 1. Cutting scene A. when you attach movies to your e-mail messages. 1A2B3101_0002

The file numbers assigned when Divide point

2. Cutting scene B. movies are cut 101_0004 The cut movies are assigned new numbers and recorded as the newest files in the13A2BaSet the mode selector to . recording folder. The original movie is deleted and its file number is skipped. 101_0005 b Select the movie you want to Divide point cut with b/B. 3. Deleting scenes A and B if they are unnecessary. c Press MENU. 101_0004 101_0007 The menu appears. 13A2BdSelect [Divide] with B, then press z. Next, select [OK] with Delete 101_0006 Delete v , then press z. 4. Only the desired scenes remain. The playback of the movie starts. 132101_0006, Enjoying movies e Decide on a cutting point. • You cannot cut the following images. Deleting unnecessary Press at the desired cutting point. – Clip Motionz portions of movies – Multi Burst – Still image 160 a Cut an unnecessary portion of 101 10/10 – Movies not long enough to cut Divide 00:00:02 Dividing – Protected movie a movie (page 76). Point • You cannot restore movies once you cut them. O K Cancel • The original movie is deleted when you cut it. b Display the portion of the Exit • The cut movie is recorded in the selected movie you want to delete.

OK

recording folder as a newest file. When you want to adjust the cutting c Press (Delete). point, select [c/C] (frame The movie has not yet been deleted at forward/ rewind) and adjust the cutting this point. point with b/ B. If you want to change d Select [Delete] with v , then the cutting point, select [Cancel]. The playback of the movie starts again. press z. The movie currently displayed on the f When you have decided on a screen is deleted. cutting point, select [OK] with v/V, and press z. g Select [OK] with v , then press z. The movie is cut.

To cancel cutting

In Step 5 or 7, select [Exit]. The movie appears on the screen again., Enjoying images on your computer

USB mode x Image Transfer Copying images to There are two modes for a USB connection, This application is used to easily transfer

your computer [Normal] and [PTP]* modes. The factory images from the camera to a computer. – For Windows users setting is the [Normal] mode. x ImageMixer * Compatible only with Windows XP. When This application is used to display and edit connected to a computer, only the data in the images that are stored in a computer.

Recommended computer folder selected by the camera is copied to the

environment computer. To select the folder, follow the procedure on page 61. • This section describes the procedures OS: Microsoft Windows 98, Windows using Windows Me as an example. The 98SE, Windows 2000 Professional, Windows Millennium Edition, Windows Communication with your required operations may differ depending on your OS. XP Home Edition, or Windows XP computer • Close down all applications Professional When your computer resumes from the running on the computer before The above OS must be installed at the suspend or sleep mode, communication installing the USB driver and factory. Operation is not assured in an between your camera and your computer application. environment upgraded to the operating may not recover at the same time. • When using Windows XP or Windows systems described above or in a multi-boot 2000, log on as Administrators. environment. When a USB connector is not • The display settings should be 800 × 600 CPU: MMX Pentium 200 MHz or faster provided on your computer dots or more and High Color (16-bit USB connector: Provided as standard When neither a USB connector nor a color, 65 000 colors) or more. When set Display: 800 × 600 dots or more “Memory Stick” slot is provided, you can to less than 800 × 600 dots or 256 colors High Color (16-bit color, 65 000 colors) or copy images using an additional device. See or less, the install title screen does not more the Sony Website for details. appear. http://www.sony.net/ • If you connect two or more USB equipment to a single computer at the same time, some equipment, including your camera, may not Contents of the CD-ROM operate depending on the type of USB equipment. x USB Driver • Operations are not guaranteed when using a This driver is needed in order to connect the USB hub. camera to a computer. • Operations are not guaranteed for all the When using Windows XP, you need not recommended computer environments mentioned above. install the USB driver., Enjoying images on your computer

Installing the USB driver c Click [USB Driver] on the title e Click [Yes, I want to restart my

screen. computer now], then click When using Windows XP, you need not install the USB driver. [Finish]. Once the USB driver is installed, you need not install the USB driver. a Turn on your computer, and insert the supplied CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. Do not connect your camera to your computer at this time. The “InstallShield wizard” screen appears. The model selection screen appears. If Your computer restarts. Then, you can it does not appear, double-click d Click [Next]. When the establish USB connection. (My Computer) t [ImageMixer] in “Information” screen appears, that order. click [Next]. b Click [Cyber-shot] on the model selection screen. The installation menu screen appears. The USB driver installation starts. When the installation is completed, the screen informs you of completion.,

Installing “Image Transfer” c Click [Next]. When “License e Select the folder to be

Agreement” screen appears, installed, then click [Next]. You can use the “Image Transfer” software to copy images to your computer click [Yes]. Select the program folder, then automatically when you connect the camera Read the agreement carefully. If you click [Next]. to your computer. accept the terms of the agreement, proceed with the installation. The a Click [Cyber-shot] on the “Information” screen appears. model selection screen. The installation menu screen appears. b Click [Image Transfer] on the f Confirm if the checkbox is installation menu screen. checked on the “Image Select the desired language, d Click [Next]. Transfer Settings” screen, then click [OK]. then click [Next]. The “Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard” screen appears. When the installation is completed, the screen informs you of completion. • This section describes the English screen., Enjoying images on your computer g Click [Finish]. Installing “ImageMixer” • If DirectX8.0a or a later version is not installed in your computer, the “Information” screen You can use the “ImageMixer Ver. 1.5 for appears. Follow the procedure on the screen. Sony” software to copy, view and edit c Restart your computer images. For details, see the software’s help files. according to the screen. a Click [ImageMixer] on the d Remove the CD-ROM. installation menu screen.

Select the desired language,

The “InstallShield Wizard” screen then click [OK]. closes. The “Welcome to the InstallShield If you wish to continue with the Wizard” screen appears. installation of “ImageMixer,” click [ImageMixer] on the title screen and then follow the procedure. • The USB driver is needed in order to use “Image Transfer.” If the necessary driver is not already installed on your computer, a screen that asks if you want to install the driver will appear. Follow the instructions that appear on the screen. • This section describes the English screen. b Follow instructions on each succeeding screen. Install “ImageMixer” according to the screen. • When you use Windows 2000 or Windows XP, install “WinASPI.”,

Connecting the camera to c Connect the supplied USB • When using Windows XP, the AutoPlay

your computer cable to the (USB) jack of wizard automatically appears on the desktop. Proceed to page 85. the camera. a Insert the “Memory Stick” with the images you want to copy into the camera. USB MODENORMAL Access indicators* “USB MODE NORMAL” appears on the LCD screen of the camera. When a USB connection is established for the first time, your computer automatically runs the used program to recognize the d Connect the USB cable to your camera. Wait for a while. computer. * During communication, the access indicators turn red. • If “USB MODE NORMAL” does not appear, • Be sure to use fully charged nickel-metal confirm that [USB Connect] is set to [Normal] hydride batteries or the AC Adaptor (not in the SET UP settings (page 107). supplied). When you copy images to your computer using weak batteries, copying may fail or the data may be corrupted if the camera shuts off due to weak batteries. • For further details on the AC Adaptor, see page 19. • For further details on the “Memory Stick,” see page 23. • When using a desktop computer, connect the b Turn on your computer and the USB cable to the USB connector on the rear panel. camera., Enjoying images on your computer

P Removing the USB cable, Copying images using – Windows XP

removing the “Memory Stick,” “Image Transfer” Connect the camera and your or turning off the camera computer with the USB cable. – Windows 98/98SE/2000/Me during a USB connection “Image Transfer” starts up automatically Connect the camera and your For Windows 2000, Me, or XP users and the images are automatically copied to computer with the USB cable. the computer. 1 Double-click on the task tray. “Image Transfer” launches and the images Windows XP is set so that the OS AutoPlay 2 Click (Sony DSC), then click [Stop]. are automatically copied to the computer. Wizard activates. 3 When copying is complete, “ImageMixer” Confirm the device on the confirmation If you want to cancel the setting, follow the automatically launches and images appear. window, then click [OK]. procedure below. 4 Click [OK]. a Click [Start], then click [My Step 4 is unnecessary for Windows XP Computer]. users. 5 Disconnect the USB cable, remove the b Right-click [Sony “Memory Stick,” or turn off the camera. MemoryStick], then click [Properties]. For Windows 98 or 98SE users c Cancel the setting. Confirm that the access indicators (page 82) on the LCD screen are turned white and 1Click [AutoPlay]. carry out only Step 5 above. 2 Set [Content type] to [Pictures]. 3Check [Select an action to perform] • Normally “Image Transfer” and “Date” folders under [Actions], select [Take no are created inside the “My Documents” folder, action], then click [Apply]. and all of the image files recorded with the 4 Set [Content type] to [Video files] camera are copied into these folders. and proceed step 3. Set [Content • You can change the “Image Transfer” settings type] to [Mixed content] and (page 84). proceed step 3. 5Click [OK]. The [Properties] screen closes. The OS AutoPlay Wizard does not start up automatically even if the USB connection is made next time.,

Changing “Image Transfer” Copying images without • When you try to copy an image to a folder in

settings using “Image Transfer” which an image with the same file name is stored, the overwrite confirmation message You can change “Image Transfer” settings. – Windows 98/98SE/2000/Me appears. When you overwrite the existing image with the new one, the original file is Right-click the “Image Transfer” icon on If you do not set to launch “Image Transfer” deleted. the task tray, select [Open Settings]. The automatically, you can copy images as settings you can set are as follows: [Basic], following procedure. When a removable disk icon is [Copy], and [Delete]. a Double-click [My Computer], not shown Right-click here then double-click [Removable 1 Right-click [My Computer], then click Disk]. [Properties]. The contents of the “Memory Stick” The “System Properties” screen appears. inserted in your camera appear. • For Windows 2000 users, click the [Hardware] • tab on the “System Properties” screen.This section describes an example of copying When the “Image Transfer” starts, the images to the “My Documents” folder. 2 Confirm if other devices are already below window appears. • When the “Removable Disk” icon is not shown, installed. see the right column. 1Click [Device Manager]. • When using Windows XP, see page 85. 2Double-click [ Other Devices]. b Double-click [DCIM], then 3Confirm if there is a “ Sony double-click the folder that the DSC” with a mark. image files you want to copy 3 If you find either of the devices above, follow the steps below to delete them. are stored. 1Click [ Sony DSC]. (In case of The folder opens. Windows 2000, right-click [ c Drag and drop the image files Sony DSC].) 2Click [Remove]. (In case of into the “My Documents” Windows 2000, click [Uninstall].) When you select [Settings] from the above folder. The “Confirm Device Removal” window, you can only change the [Basic] The image files are copied to the “My screen appears. setting. Documents” folder. 3Click [OK]. The device is deleted. Try the USB driver installation again using the supplied CD-ROM (page 79)., Enjoying images on your computer – Windows XP e Select [Nothing. I’m finished Viewing the images on your working with these pictures], computer

Copying images using the then click [Next]. Windows XP AutoPlay wizard a Double-click [My Documents] The “Completing the Scanner and

Make a USB connection on the desktop.a Camera Wizard” screen appears. (page 82). Click [Copy pictures The “My Documents” folder contents f Click [Finish]. are displayed. to a folder on my computer The wizard closes. using Microsoft Scanner and • This section describes the procedure for Camera Wizard], then click • To continue copying other images, follow the viewing images in the “My Documents” folder. [OK]. procedure given under P on page 83 to • When using Windows XP, double-click [Start] disconnect the USB cable and reconnect it. t [My Documents] in that order. The “Scanner and Camera Wizard” Then, perform the procedure from step 1 • You can use the “ImageMixer Ver. 1.5 for screen appears. again. Sony” software to view and edit images on your computer. For details, see the software’s help b Click [Next]. files. The images stored on the “Memory b Double-click the desired folder Stick” are displayed. and image file. c Click the checkbox of images The image is displayed. that you do not want to copy to your computer to remove the checkmark, then click [Next]. The “Picture Name and Destination” screen appears. d Select a name and destination for your pictures, then click [Next]. Image copying starts. When the copying is completed, the “Other Options” screen appears.,

Image file storage destinations and file names

The image files recorded with your camera are grouped as folders in the “Memory Stick.” Example: when viewing folders on Windows Me Folder containing image data which was recorded using the camera not equipped with the folder creating function. Folder containing image data which was recorded using your camera. When not creating any folders, there is only the “101MSDCF” folder. Folder containing E-Mail mode image data/ movie data/ Voice mode audio data which was recorded using the camera not equipped with the folder creating function. • You cannot record any images to “100MSDCF” or “MSSONY” folders. The images in these folders are available only for viewing. • For more information about the folder, see pages 46, 61., Enjoying images on your computer Folder File name File meaning 101MSDCF to DSC0ssss.JPG • Still image files shot normally 999MSDCF – Normal mode (page 26) – Burst 2 mode (page 56) • Multi Burst mode files (page 55) • Still image files shot in – E-Mail mode (page 56) – Voice mode (page 57) DSC0ssss.JPE • Small-size image files shot in E-Mail mode DSC0ssss.MPG • Audio files shot in Voice mode CLP0ssss.GIF • Clip Motion files shot in Normal mode (page 54) CLP0ssss.THM • Index image files of Clip Motion files shot in Normal mode MBL0ssss.GIF • Clip Motion files shot in Mobile mode (page 54) MBL0ssss.THM • Index image files of Clip Motion files shot in Mobile mode MOV0ssss.MPG • Movie files shot in MPEG Movie mode (page 72) • ssss stands for any number within the range from 0001 to 9999. • The numerical portions of the following files are the same. – A small-size image file shot in E-Mail mode and its corresponding image file – An audio file shot in Voice mode and its corresponding image file – An image file shot with Clip Motion and its corresponding index image file,

USB mode a Installing the USB driver Copying images to There are two modes for a USB connection, 1 Turn on your computer, and set the

your computer [Normal] and [PTP]* modes. The factory supplied CD-ROM into the CD-ROM – For Macintosh users setting is the [Normal] mode. drive. * Compatible only with Mac OS X. When The model selection screen appears. connected to a computer, only the data in the

Recommended computer folder selected by the camera is copied to the 2 Click [Cyber-shot] on the model

environment computer. selection screen. The installation menu appears. OS: Mac OS 8.5.1, 8.6, 9.0, 9.1, 9.2, or Mac OS X (v10.0/v10.1/v10.2) Communication with your 3 Click [USB Driver]. The above OS must be installed at the computer The “USB Driver” screen appears. factory. For the following models, update When your computer resumes from the 4 Double-click the icon of the hard disk your OS to Mac OS 9.0 or 9.1. suspend or sleep mode, communication containing the OS to open the screen. – iMac with Mac OS 8.6 installed at the between your camera and your computer 5 Drag and drop the following two files factory, and a slot loading type CD-ROM may not recover at the same time. from the screen opened in step 3 into the drive System Folder icon in the screen opened – iBook or Power Mac G4 with the Mac OS When a USB connector is not in step 4. 8.6 installed at the factory provided on your computer • Sony USB Driver USB connector: Provided as standard • Sony USB Shim Display: 800 × 600 dots or more When neither a USB connector nora6When the message for confirmation is 32 000-color mode or more “Memory Stick” slot is provided, you can • If you connect two or more USB equipment to copy images using an additional device. See shown, click “OK.” a single computer at the same time, some the Sony Website for details. 7 Restart the computer and remove the equipment, including your camera, may not http://www.sony.net/ CD-ROM from the CD-ROM drive. operate depending on the type of USB equipment. b Connecting your camera to • Operations are not guaranteed when using a Steps your OS requires your computer USB hub. Follow the steps below, according to your For details, see page 82. • Operations are not guaranteed for all the OS. recommended computer environments mentioned above. OS Steps Mac OS 8.5.1/8.6/9.0 Steps 1 to 4 Mac OS 9.1/9.2/Mac OS X Steps 2 to 4 (v 10.0/v 10.1/v10.2), Enjoying images on your computer Removing the USB cable, removing d Viewing the images on your For Mac OS X users the “Memory Stick,” or turning off computer When you click an E-MAIL mode image the camera during a USB connection file, “There is no application available to Drag and drop the drive icon or the icon of 1 Double-click the hard disk icon. open the document "DSC0ssss.JPE".” the “Memory Stick” to the “Trash” icon, 2 Double-click the desired image file in may be shown. In this case, carry out the then remove the USB cable, remove the the folder containing the copied files. follwing setup. The screen may differ “Memory Stick,” or turn off the camera The image file opens. depending on your OS version. • If you are using Mac OS X v10.0, remove the USB cable etc., after you have turned your 1 Click [Choose Application...] on the • Close down all applications running on computer off. the computer before installing the USB screen “There is no application available driver and application. to open the document c Copying images • You can use the “ImageMixer Ver. 1.5 for "DSC0ssss.JPE".” 1 Double-click the newly recognized icon Sony” software to copy images to your 2 Change [Recommended Applications] computer and to view images on your on the desktop. computer. For details on installing, see to [All Applications]. The contents of the “Memory Stick” operating instructions supplied with the CD- 3 Select [QuickTime Player] from the inserted in your camera appear. ROM. For details on operation, see the application list, then click [Open]. 2 Double-click “DCIM.” software’s help files. • “ImageMixer Ver. 1.5 for Sony” cannot be used 3 Double-click the folder that the images with Mac OS X. you want to copy are stored. • “Image Transfer” cannot be used with 4 Drag and drop the image files to the hard Macintosh. disk icon. The image files are copied to your hard disk. For details on the storage location of the images and file names, see page 86., d Click .

Creating a Video CD For the Macintosh edition

• “Toast” by Roxio (not supplied) is required You can create a Video CD using your to create a Video CD. • The playback time of a movie file on the computer. The created Video CD can be preview screen may be shorter. played back on a Video CD-compatible DVD player. When playing back on a computer, use application software used to play back a Video CD. a Start “ImageMixer.” You can preview the image. b Click . e Click . The video CD creating mode turns on. The disc creation dialogue appears. c Drag & drop the desired file or album to the menu screen. The selected image is added to the menu screen. f Insert a blank CD-R into the CD-R drive and click the [OK] button. The disc creation process starts. • You cannot use CD-RW discs. • A CD-R drive is required to create a Video CD., Troubleshooting Troubleshooting 2 Press the RESET button located inside 3 Consult your Sony dealer or local

Troubleshooting the jack cover, then turn on the camera authorized Sony service facility.

again. (This will clear the date and time If you have trouble with your camera, try settings, etc.) the following solutions. 1 Check the items on pages 91 to 97. If the screen shows “C:ss:ss,” the RESET self-diagnosis function is working. Please see page 100.

Battery and power

Symptom Cause Solution The battery remaining • You have used the camera in an extremely cold — indicator is incorrect. Or location. the sufficient battery • The batteries are discharged. p Install charged batteries (page 14). remaining indicator is • The battery contacts or the terminals on the p Wipe any dirt off from them with a dry cloth (page 16). displayed but the power battery cover are dirty. soon runs out. • The nickel-metal hydride batteries are exhibiting p To restore the batteries to their original condition, use them until the “memory effect” (page 15). they are drained before recharging them. • A mismatch has occurred in the remaining p Fully charge the batteries (page 14). battery time information. • The batteries are dead (page 110). p Replace the batteries with new ones. The battery runs down too • You are recording/playing back images in an — quickly. extremely cold location. • The batteries are not charged enough. p Fully charge the batteries (page 14). • The batteries are dead (page 110). p Replace the batteries with new ones. The power cannot be • The batteries are not installed properly. p Properly install the batteries (page 16). turned on. • The AC Adaptor (not supplied) is disconnected. p Connect it securely to your camera (page 19). • The batteries are discharged. p Install charged batteries (page 14). • The batteries are dead (page 110). p Replace the batteries with new ones., Symptom Cause Solution The power turns off • If you do not operate the camera for about 90 p Turn on the camera again (page 20). suddenly. seconds while the power is on, the camera turns off automatically to prevent wearing down the battery (when [Power Save] is [Off], after three minutes.) (page 17). • The batteries are discharged. p Install charged batteries (page 14).

Shooting still images / movies

Symptom Cause Solution The LCD screen is not • The power was turned off with the LCD screen p Turn on the LCD screen (page 34). turned on even when the turned off the last time you used the camera. power is turned on. The subject is not visible • The mode selector is not set to or . p Set the mode selector to or (pages 26, 72). on the LCD screen. The image is out of focus. • The subject is too close. p Set the macro recording mode (DSC-P72 only). Make sure to place the lens farther away from the subject than the shortest shooting distance when shooting (page 30). • While shooting still images, (Camera) is p Cancel the mode (page 58). set to or . • You set the focus preset distance. p Set to the auto focus mode (page 49). Unable to zoom (DSC-P52/ • You cannot zoom while shooting a movie — P72 only). (MPEG movie). Smart zoom does not • You cannot use smart zoom while shooting a — function. movie (MPEG movie). • The LCD screen is turned off. p Turn on the LCD screen (page 34). • The image size is set to [3.1M] or [2.8M (3:2)]. p Set image size to other settings except [3.1M] and [2.8M (3:2)] (page 29). • [Smart Zoom] is set to [Off] in the SET UP p Set [Smart Zoom] to [On] (page 106). settings (DSC-P52/P72 only). The image is too dark. • You are shooting a subject with a light source p Adjust the exposure (page 50). behind the subject. • The brightness of the LCD screen is too low. p Adjust the brightness of the LCD screen (page 107)., Troubleshooting Symptom Cause Solution The image is too bright. • You are shooting a spot lighted subject in a dark p Adjust the exposure (page 50). location such as on a stage. • The brightness of the LCD screen is too high. p Adjust the brightness of the LCD screen (page 107). The image is • [PFX] (P. Effect) is set to [B&W]. p Cancel the mode (page 60). monochrome (black and white). Vertical streaks appear • The smear phenomenon is occurring. p This is not a malfunction. when you are shooting a very bright subject. When looking at the LCD • The camera temporarily brightens the LCD p This will have no effect on the image you shoot. screen in a dark place, screen to allow you to check the image being some noise may show up displayed while you are using the camera in a on the screen. dark place. You cannot shoot images. • No “Memory Stick” is inserted. p Insert a “Memory Stick” (page 23). • The capacity of the “Memory Stick” is p Delete the images saved in the “Memory Stick,” or format it. insufficient. p Change the “Memory Stick.” • The write-protect switch on the “Memory Stick” p Set it to the recording position (page 109). is set to the LOCK position. • You cannot shoot while the flash is charging. — • The mode selector is not set to when you p Set the mode selector to (page 26). want to shoot a still image. • The mode selector is not set to when you p Set the mode selector to (page 72). want to shoot a movie. The macro mode does not • When shooting still images, (Camera) is set p Cancel the mode (page 58). function (DSC-P72 only). to or . Cannot shoot images with • The mode selector is set to or SET UP. p Set it to a setting other than , or SET UP (page 32). the flash. • The flash is set to (No flash). p Set the flash to “Auto” (No indicator), (Forced flash), or (Slow synchro) (page 32). • When shooting still images, (Camera) is set p Cancel the mode (page 58). to . • [Moving Image] is not set to [Clip Motion] in the p Set it to [Clip Motion] (page 106). SET UP settings. The eyes of the subject — p Set [Red Eye Reduction] to [On] (page 33). come out red., Symptom Cause Solution The date and time are • The date and time are not set correctly. p Set the correct date and time (page 21). recorded incorrectly.

Viewing images

Symptom Cause Solution The image cannot be • The mode selector is not set to . p Set the mode selector to (page 36). played back. • You cannot play back the image on the camera, — if it is modified on a computer or its folder/file name is changed. • The camera is in USB mode. p Cancel USB communication (page 83). The image is coarse right — p This is not a malfunction. after being played back. The images cannot be • The [Video Out] setting for the camera in SET p Set [Video Out] to [NTSC] or [PAL] (page 107). played back on a TV. UP is incorrect. • The connection is not correct. p Check the connection (page 38). The images cannot be — p See page 95. played back on a computer. Unknown beeps are heard • These beeps are heard when the auto focus is p This is not a malfunction. Shoot in focus preset mode (page 49). from the camera while working. viewing a movie.

Deleting/editing an image

Symptom Cause Solution Your camera cannot • The image is protected. p Cancel the protection (page 67). delete an image. • The write-protect switch on the “Memory Stick” p Set it to the recording position (page 109). is set to the LOCK position. You have deleted the • Once you have deleted an image, you cannot p Protecting the image can prevent accidental erasure (page 67). image by mistake. restore it. p The write-protect switch on the “Memory Stick” will prevent you from deleting images by mistake (page 109)., Troubleshooting Symptom Cause Solution The resizing function • Movie (MPEG movie)/Clip Motion/Multi Burst — does not work. files cannot be resized. You cannot attach a print • Print (DPOF) marks cannot be attached to movie — (DPOF) mark. (MPEG movie)/Clip Motion files. You cannot cut a movie. • The movie is not long enough to cut. — • Protected movie (MPEG movie), Clip Motion, — Multi Burst files and still images cannot be cut.

Computers

Symptom Cause Solution You do not know whether — p Check “Recommended computer environment” (pages 78, 88). or not your OS can be used with the camera. You cannot install the — p In Windows 2000, log on as Administrator (authorized USB driver. Administrators). Your computer does not • The camera is turned off. p Turn on the camera (page 20). recognize your camera. • The battery level is too low. p Use the AC Adaptor (not supplied) (page 19). • You are not using the supplied USB cable. p Use the supplied USB cable (page 82). • The USB cable is not connected securely. p Disconnect the USB cable, and securely connect it again. Make sure that “USB MODE” is displayed on the LCD screen (page 82). • [USB Connect] is set to [PTP] in the SET UP p Set it to [Normal] (page 107). settings. • The USB connectors on your computer are p Disconnect the USB cables except for those connected to the connected to other equipment besides the keyboard and the mouse. keyboard, the mouse. • The camera is not directly connected to your p Directly connect the camera and your computer without using a computer. USB hub. • The USB driver is not installed. p Install the USB driver (page 79). • Your computer does not properly recognize the p Delete the erroneously recognized device from your computer, device because you connected the camera and then install the USB driver (pages 79, 84). your computer with the USB cable before you installed the “USB Driver” from the supplied CD-ROM., Symptom Cause Solution You cannot copy images. • The camera is not correctly connected to your p Connect the camera and your computer correctly (page 82). computer. • The copy procedure differs depending on your p Follow the copy procedure for your OS (pages 83, 84, 88). OS. p If you are using the “ImageMixer Ver. 1.5 for Sony” software, — click on HELP. p If you are using the “Image Transfer” software, see page 83. After making a USB — p Select [Launch Image Transfer automatically when the camera, connection, “Image etc., is connected.] at [Basic] setting (page 84). Transfer” does not — p Make a USB connection when the computer is turned on automatically start. (page 82). The image cannot be — p If you are using the “ImageMixer Ver. 1.5 for Sony” software, played back on a click on HELP. computer. — p Consult the computer or software manufacturer. The image and sound are • You are playing back the movie directly from p Copy the movie to the hard disk of the computer and then play affected by noise when the “Memory Stick.” the movie file back from the hard disk (page 88). you play back a movie on a computer. You cannot print an — p Check the printer settings. image. p If you are using the “ImageMixer Ver. 1.5 for Sony” software, click on HELP. The error message — p Set the display mode of your computer as follows: appears when loading the For Windows, 800 × 600 dots or more, high color (16-bit color, supplied CD-ROM. 65 000 colors) or more. For Macintosh, 800 × 600 dots or more, 32 000 colors or more. “Memory Stick” Symptom Cause Solution You cannot insert a • You are inserting it backwards. p Insert it from the right side (page 23). “Memory Stick.” You cannot record on a • The write-protect switch on the “Memory Stick” p Set it to the recording position (page 109). “Memory Stick.” is set to the LOCK position. • The “Memory Stick” is full. p Delete unnecessary images (pages 40, 74)., Troubleshooting Symptom Cause Solution You cannot format a • The write-protect switch on the “Memory Stick” p Set it to the recording position (page 109). “Memory Stick.” is set to the LOCK position. You have formatted a • All the data on the “Memory Stick” are erased by p We recommend that you set the “Memory Stick” write-protect “Memory Stick” by formatting. switch to the LOCK position to protect accidental erasure mistake. (page 109).

Others

Symptom Cause Solution The camera does not • The battery level is low or zero (The p Charge the batteries (page 14). work, no operations can indicator appears.). be performed. • The AC Adaptor (not supplied) is not connected p Connect it securely to the DC IN jack of the camera and to a wall securely. outlet (wall socket) (page 19). The power is on, but the • The internal system is not working properly. p Disconnect, and then, after one minute, reconnect all power camera does not work. sources and turn on the camera. If this does not work, press the RESET button located inside the jack cover with a pointed object, then turn the power on again. (This will clear the date and time settings, etc.) You cannot identify the — p Check the indicator (pages 113 to 115). indicator on the LCD screen. The lens gets fogged. • Condensation is occurring. p Turn off the camera, leave the camera for about an hour and then try to use it again (page 108). The camera gets hot if you — p This is not a malfunction. use it for a long time. The lens does not move • The batteries are discharged. p Replace them with charged batteries or use the AC Adaptor (not when you turn off the supplied) (pages 14, 16, 19). camera. (DSC-P72 only),

Warnings and

messages The following messages appear on the LCD screen. Message Meaning/ Corrective Action No Memory Stick • Insert a “Memory Stick” (page 23). System error • Turn the power off and on again (page 20). Memory Stick error • The inserted “Memory Stick” cannot be used with your camera (page 109). • Insert the “Memory Stick” correctly (page 23). • The “Memory Stick” is damaged, or the terminal section of the “Memory Stick” is dirty. Memory Stick type error • The inserted “Memory Stick” cannot be used with your camera (page 109). Format error • The “Memory Stick” format failed. Format the “Memory Stick” again (page 44). Memory Stick locked • The write-protect switch on the “Memory Stick” is set to the LOCK position. Set it to the recording position (page 109). No memory space • The capacity of the “Memory Stick” is insufficient. You cannot record images. Delete unnecessary images (pages 40, 74). No file in this folder • No images have been recorded in this folder. Folder error • A folder with the same first three digits number already exists in the “Memory Stick.” (For example: 123MSDCF and 123ABCDE) Select other folders, or create a new folder. Cannot create more folders • The folder whose first three digits of the name is “999” exists in the “Memory Stick.” You cannot create any folders. Cannot record • You attempt to select the folder that is available only for viewing with your camera. Select other folders (page 47). File error • An error occurred while playing back the image. File protect • The image is protected against erasure. Release the protection (page 67). Image size over • You are playing back an image of a size that cannot be played back on your camera. Can not divide • The movie is not long enough to be divided. • The file is not a movie (MPEG movie). Invalid operation • You are playing back a file that was created on equipment other than your camera. • The battery level is low or zero. Charge the battery (page 14). Depending on the conditions of use or the type of battery, the indicator may flash even though there are still 5 to 10 minutes of remaining battery time left., Troubleshooting Message Meaning/ Corrective Action • Camera shake may occur due to insufficient light. Use the flash, mount the camera on a tripod, or otherwise secure the camera in place. Turn the power off and on • A problem with the lens caused an error. again,

Self-diagnosis display

– If a code starting with an alphabet letter appears Your camera has a self-diagnosis display. This function displays the condition of the camera on the LCD screen using a combination of a letter and four numerical digits. If this occurs, check the following code chart and take the corresponding countermeasure. The last two digits (indicated by ss)will differ depending on the state of the camera. Self-diagnosis display Code Cause Countermeasure C:32: ss There is trouble with your Turn the power off and on again (page 20). camera’s hardware. C:13: ss The camera cannot read or write Re-insert the “Memory Stick” several data on the “Memory Stick.” times. An unformatted “Memory Stick” Format the “Memory Stick” (page 44). is inserted. The inserted “Memory Stick” Insert a new “Memory Stick” (page 23). cannot be used with your camera, or the data is damaged. E:61: ss A camera malfunction that you Press the RESET button (page 91) located E:91: ss cannot reverse has occurred. inside the jack cover, then turn on the E:92: ss camera again. If your camera is not still functioning well after trying the countermeasure a couple of times, the camera may be repaired. Contact your Sony dealer or local autholized Sony service facility and inform them of the 5- digit code. Example: E:61:10, Additional information Additional information

The number of images

that can be saved/ shooting time The number of images that can be saved and the shooting time are different, depending on the capacity of the “Memory Stick,” the image size, and the image quality. Refer to the following charts when you choose a “Memory Stick.” • The number of images is listed in Fine (Standard) order. • The values for the number of images that can be saved and the shooting time may vary, depending on the shooting conditions. • For normal shooting times and numbers of images that can be saved, see page 25. • When the remaining number of images recordable is more than 9999, “ >9999 ” is indicated. E-mail (Units: images) 16MB 32MB 64MB 128MB MSX-256 MSX-512 MSX-1G 3.1M 10 (18) 20 (36) 40 (73) 81 (146) 145 (255) 296 (518) 604 (1058) 2.8M (3:2) 10 (18) 20 (36) 40 (73) 81 (146) 145 (255) 296 (518) 604 (1058) 2.0M 16 (29) 32 (59) 65 (119) 131 (239) 230 (420) 468 (854) 956 (1743) 1.2M 24 (44) 49 (89) 98 (179) 197 (359) 340 (595) 691 (1210) 1411 (2470) VGA 88 (194) 178 (392) 358 (788) 718 (1580) 1190 (2381) 2420 (4841) 4940 (9881) Voice (Units: images) 16MB 32MB 64MB 128MB MSX-256 MSX-512 MSX-1G 3.1M 9 (17) 19 (34) 39 (69) 79 (138) 142 (246) 290 (500) 592 (1022) 2.8M (3:2) 9 (17) 19 (34) 39 (69) 79 (138) 142 (246) 290 (500) 592 (1022) 2.0M 15 (26) 31 (54) 62 (109) 125 (219) 223 (396) 453 (806) 926 (1646) 1.2M 22 (38) 45 (78) 91 (157) 183 (316) 324 (549) 660 (1117) 1347 (2280) VGA 69 (121) 140 (245) 281 (492) 564 (987) 1020 (1785) 2074 (3630) 4234 (7410) Clip Motion (Units: images) 16MB 32MB 64MB 128MB MSX-256 MSX-512 MSX-1G Normal 88 178 358 718 1190 2420 4940 Mobile 486 982 1971 3951 3571 7261 14821 Normal: When 10 frames are shot Mobile: When two frames are shot MPEG movie (Units: seconds) 16MB 32MB 64MB 128MB MSX-256 MSX-512 MSX-1G 640 (VGA) 42 87 176 354 641 1304 2663 160 (Mail) 673 1363 2740 5494 9935 20203 41239 Multi Burst (Units: images) 16MB 32MB 64MB 128MB MSX-256 MSX-512 MSX-1G 1.2M 24 (46) 50 (93) 101(187) 202 (376) 357 (649) 726 (1320) 1482 (2694),

Menu items

Menu items that can be changed differ depending on the position of the mode selector. The LCD screen shows only the items you can operate based on the current position of the mode selector. Factory settings are indicated with x.

When the mode selector is set to

Item Setting Description (Camera) / / / / / Program/ Selects the camera mode (pages 27, 58). x Auto (EV)* +2.0EV / +1.7EV / +1.3EV / Adjusts the exposure (page 50). +1.0EV / +0.7EV / +0.3EV / x0EV / −0.3EV / −0.7EV / −1.0EV / −1.3EV / −1.7EV / −2.0EV 9 (Focus)* ∞ / 7.0m / 3.0m / 1.0m / 0.5m / Chooses the auto focus method (page 48), or sets the focus preset distance (page 49). Center AF / x Multi AF (Metering Mode)* Spot / x Multi Selects the metering mode to suit the shooting conditions and purpose. (page 51). (DSC-P72 only) WB (White Bal)* / / / / xAuto Sets the white balance (page 52). ISO* 400 / 200 / 100 / xAuto Selects the ISO sensitivity. When shooting under dark conditions or shooting a fast- moving subject, use a high-number setting. When recording high-quality images, use a low-number setting. (When the (Camera) is not set to [Auto] or [Program], this setting cannot be carried out.) (P.Quality)* xFine / Standard Records images with fine image quality mode. / Records images in the standard image quality mode (page 46)., Additional information Item Setting Description Mode (REC Mode) Voice – Records an audio file (with a still image) in addition to the JPEG file (page 57). E-Mail – Records a small-size (320×240) JPEG file in addition to the selected image size (page 56). Burst 2 – Records two images continuously (page 56). xNormal – Records an image using the normal recording mode. (Flash Level)* High / xNormal / Low Selects the amount of flash light (page 53). PFX (P.Effect)* Solarize / B&W / Sepia /Neg.Art / Sets the special effects for the image (page 60). xOff * When (Camera) is set to [Auto], these items are not displayed.

When the mode selector is set to (when [Moving Image] is set to [MPEG Movie] in the SET UP

settings) Item Setting Description (EV) +2.0EV / +1.7EV / +1.3EV / Adjusts the exposure (page 50). +1.0EV / +0.7EV / +0.3EV / x0EV / −0.3EV / −0.7EV / −1.0EV / −1.3EV / −1.7EV / −2.0EV 9 (Focus) ∞ / 7.0m / 3.0m / 1.0m / 0.5m / Chooses the auto focus method (page 48), or sets the focus preset distance (page 49). Center AF / x Multi AF (Metering Mode) Spot / x Multi Selects the metering mode to suit the shooting conditions and purpose. (page 51). (DSC-P72 only) WB (White Bal) / / / / xAuto Sets the white balance (page 52). PFX (P.Effect) Solarize / B&W / Sepia /Neg.Art / Sets the special effects for the image (page 60). xOff,

When the mode selector is set to (when [Moving Image] is set to [Clip Motion] in the SET UP settings)

Item Setting Description (EV) +2.0EV / +1.7EV / +1.3EV / Adjusts the exposure (page 50). +1.0EV / +0.7EV / +0.3EV / x0EV / −0.3EV / −0.7EV / −1.0EV / −1.3EV / −1.7EV / −2.0EV 9 (Focus) ∞ / 7.0m / 3.0m / 1.0m / 0.5m / Chooses the auto focus method (page 48) or sets the focus preset distance (page 49). Center AF / x Multi AF (Metering Mode) Spot / x Multi Selects the metering mode to suit the shooting conditions and purpose. (page 51). (DSC-P72 only) WB (White Bal) / / / / xAuto Sets the white balance (page 52). (Flash Level) High / xNormal / Low Selects the amount of flash light (page 53). PFX (P.Effect) Solarize / B&W / Sepia /Neg.Art / Sets the special effects for the image (page 60). xOff

When the mode selector is set to (when [Moving Image] is set to [Multi Burst] in the SET UP settings)

Item Setting Description (EV) +2.0EV / +1.7EV / +1.3EV / Adjusts the exposure (page 50). +1.0EV / +0.7EV / +0.3EV / x0EV / −0.3EV / −0.7EV / −1.0EV / −1.3EV / −1.7EV / −2.0EV 9 (Focus) ∞ / 7.0m / 3.0m / 1.0m / 0.5m / Chooses the auto focus method (page 48) or sets the focus preset distance (page 49). Center AF / x Multi AF (Metering Mode) Spot / x Multi Selects the metering mode to suit the shooting conditions and purpose. (page 51). (DSC-P72 only) WB (White Bal) / / / / xAuto Sets the white balance (page 52). (Interval) 1/7.5 / 1/15 / x1/30 (NTSC) – In NTSC mode, choose the Multi Burst between-frame shutter interval. 1/6.3 / 1/12.5 / x1/25 (PAL) – In PAL mode, choose the Multi Burst between-frame shutter interval. • The choices of between-frame shutter interval differ depending on the setting of the [Video Out] item in the SET UP setting (page 107)., Additional information Item Setting Description (P.Quality) xFine / Standard Records images with fine image quality mode. / Records images in the standard image quality mode (page 46). PFX (P.Effect) Solarize / B&W / Sepia /Neg.Art / Sets the special effects for the image (page 60). xOff

When the mode selector is set to

Item Setting Description Folder OK/Cancel Select the folder that contains the images you want to play back (page 61). Protect — Protects images against accidental erasure (page 67). DPOF — Selects still images you want to attach/cancel the print (DPOF) mark (page 70). Slide Interval – Sets the slide show interval. (For single-image screen only.) x3 sec/ 5 sec/ 10 sec/ 30 sec/ 1 min Image – Selects images from either folder or “Memory Stick.” xFolder/All Repeat – Repeats the slide show. xOn/Off Start – Starts the slide show. Cancel – Cancels the settings and execution of the slide show. Resize 3.1M / 2.0M / 1.2M / VGA / Cancel Changes the recorded image size (page 69). (For single-image screen only.) Rotate (counter-clockwise) / Rotates the still image (page 64). (For single-image screen only.) (clockwise) / OK / Cancel Divide OK / Cancel Divides a movie (page 76). (For single-image screen only.),

SET UP items

Set the mode selector to SET UP. The SET UP screen appears. Factory settings are indicated with x. (Camera) Item Setting Description Moving Image xMPEG Movie / Clip Motion / Selects the shooting mode (pages 54, 55, 72). Multi Burst Smart Zoom xOn / Off Selects whether to use the smart zoom (page 29). (DSC-P52/P72 only) Date/Time Day&Time / Date / xOff Selects whether to insert the date and time into the image (page 35). When shooting movies, or images recorded in Clip Motion/Multi Burst modes, the date and time cannot be inserted in the image. Also, the date and time will not be displayed when shooting. The date and time will be displayed when the image is played back. Red Eye Reduction On / xOff Reduces the red-eye phenomenon when using a flash (page 33). AF Illuminator xAuto / Off Selects whether to emit an AF assist light in the dark. Helps when it is hard to focus on the subject under dark lighting (page 33). (Memory Stick Tool) Item Setting Description Format OK / Cancel Formats the “Memory Stick.” Note that formatting erases all data on a “Memory Stick,” including even protected images (page 44). File Number x Series – Assigns numbers to files in sequence even if the “Memory Stick” is changed or the recording folder is changed. Reset – Resets the file numbering and starts from 0001 each time the folder is changed. (When the recording folder contains a file, a number one higher than the largest number is assigned.), Additional information Item Setting Description Create REC. OK / Cancel Creates a folder for recording images (page 46). Folder Change REC. OK / Cancel Changes a folder for recording images (page 46). Folder (Setup 1) Item Setting Description Power Save x On / Off Selects whether to use the Power Save mode (page 17). Displayed only when you are using the camera with the batteries. LCD Brightness Bright/ xNormal/ Selects the LCD brightness. This has no effect on the recorded images. Dark LCD Backlight Bright/Normal/ Selects the brightness of the LCD backlight. Selecting [Bright] makes the screen bright and easy to see xDark when using the camera outdoors or in other bright locations, but also uses up the battery charge faster. Displayed only when you are using the camera with the batteries. Beep Shutter – Turns on the shutter sound when you press the shutter button. x On – Turns on the beep/shutter sound when you press the control button/ press the shutter button. Off – Turns off the beep/shutter sound. Language — Displays the menu items, warnings and messages in selected language. Clock Set OK / Cancel Sets the date and time (pages 21, 45). (Setup 2) Item Setting Description USB Connect PTP/xNormal Switches the USB mode (page 78). Video Out NTSC – Sets the video output signal to NTSC mode (e.g., Japan, USA). PAL – Sets the video output signal to PAL mode (e.g., Europe)., Cleaning the camera surface Moisture condensation occurs easily

Precautions Clean the camera surface with a soft cloth when:

slightly moistened with water, then wipe the • The camera is brought from a cold

Do not leave the camera in the surface with a dry cloth. Do not use the location such as a ski slope into a warmly

following places following as this may damage the finish or heated room. • In extremely hot place, such as in a car the casing. • The camera is taken from an air- parked in the sun. The camera body may • Thinner conditioned room or car interior to the hot become deformed or this may cause a • Benzine outdoors, etc. malfunction. • Alcohol • Under direct sunlight or near a heater. • Diposable cloth To prevent moisture condensation The camera body may become deformed • Volatile insecticide When bringing the camera from a cold or this may cause a malfunction. • Contact with rubber or vinyl for a long place to a warm place, seal the camera in a • On rocking vibration time plastic bag and leave it in the new location • Near strong magnetic place for about an hour. Remove the plastic bag • On sandy or in dusty place Note on operating temperature when the camera has adapted to the new Do not let sand get into the camera. Sand The camera is designed for use within a temperature. or dust may cause the camera to temperature range of 0°C to 40°C (32°F to malfunction and sometimes this 104°F). Shooting in extremely cold or hot If moisture condensation occurs malfunction cannot be repaired. locations that exceed this range is not Turn off the camera and wait about an hour recommended. for the moisture to evaporate. Note that if you attempt to shoot with moisture

Cleaning On moisture condensation remaining inside the lens, you will be Cleaning the LCD screen unable to record clear images.

Clean the screen surface with an LCD If the camera is brought directly from a cold cleaning kit (not supplied) to remove to a warm location, or is placed in a very fingerprints, dust, etc. damp room, moisture may condense inside or outside the camera. This moisture Cleaning the lens condensation may cause a malfunction of Wipe the lens with a soft cloth to remove the camera. fingerprints, dust, etc., Additional information

The internal rechargeable button ** The camera cannot record or play back the

battery The “Memory Stick” data needed by the MagicGate function. We cannot ensure all of the functions of each This camera has an internal rechargeable “Memory Stick.” button battery for maintaining the date and “Memory Stick” is a new compact, portable time and other settings regardless of and versatile IC recording medium with a data capacity that exceeds the capacity of a Notes on use of the “Memory Stick” whether the power is on or off. floppy disk. (supplied)This rechargeable button battery is • You cannot record, edit, or delete images when continually charged as long as you are using You can use the “Memory Stick” as an the write-protect switch is set to LOCK. The the camera. However, if you use the camera external recording media that can be position or the shape of the write-protect switch for only short periods it discharges attached or removed as well as exchanging may differ depending on the “Memory Stick” you use. gradually, and if you do not use the camera data between the units. at all for about one month it becomes There are two types of “Memory Stick”: an Terminal completely discharged. In this case, be sure ordinary “Memory Stick” and a to charge this rechargeable button battery “MagicGate Memory Stick” that are before using the camera. equipped with the MagicGate copyright Note that even if this rechargeable button protection technology. You can use both battery is not charged, you can still use the types of “Memory Stick” with your camera. Write-protect switch camera as long as you do not record the date However, because your camera does not and time. support the MagicGate standards, data Labeling position recorded with your camera is not subject to • Data may be damaged in the following cases: How to charge MagicGate* copyright protection. – Removing the “Memory Stick” or turning off Connect the camera to a wall outlet (wall You can also use the “Memory Stick Duo” the camera while reading or writing data. socket) using the AC Adaptor (not and “Memory Stick PRO” with the camera. – Using the camera in a location subject to the supplied), or install charged batteries, and * MagicGate is copyright protection technology effects of static electricity or noise. leave the camera for 24 hours or more with that uses encryption technology. • We recommend you back up any important the power turned off. • The “Memory Stick” formatted with a computer data. is not guaranteed to operate with this camera. • Do not attach any other material than the supplied label on the labeling position. “Memory Stick” Recording/ • When you attach the supplied label, be sure to Playback attach it to the labeling position. Be careful that Memory Stick (Memory Stick Duo) a the label does not stick out. MagicGate Memory Stick • When you carry or store the “Memory Stick,” a** (MagicGate Memory Stick Duo) put it in the case supplied with it. Memory Stick PRO ** • Do not touch the terminals of a “Memory a Stick” with your hand or a metal object., • Do not strike, bend or drop a “Memory Stick.” Battery life • Do not disassemble or modify a “Memory The nickel-metal • The battery life is limited. Battery Stick.” • Do not expose the “Memory Stick” to water. hydride batteries capacity decreases little by little as you • Avoid using or storing the “Memory Stick” in use it more and more, and as time passes. the following places: Effective use of the battery When the battery operating time seems to – In a car parked in the sun, or at a high have been considerably shortened, a temperature. • Battery performance decreases in low- probable cause is that the battery has – Under direct sunlight. temperature surroundings, and the battery reached the end of its life. – In a humid place or near corrosive material. life is shortened under such • The battery life varies depending on Notes on use of the “Memory Stick circumstances. To use the battery longer, storage, operating conditions, and Duo” (not supplied) we recommend you keep the battery environment, and is different for each • Be sure to insert the “Memory Stick Duo” into stored in the supplied battery case, in a battery. the “Memory Stick Duo” Adaptor when using pocket close to your body to warm it, and the “Memory Stick Duo” with the camera. insert it in your camera just before you • Verify that you are inserting the “Memory Stick start shooting. Duo” in the proper direction when inserting it • If you shoot a lot using the zoom and into the “Memory Stick Duo” Adaptor. • Verify that you are inserting the “Memory Stick flash, the battery power will be used up Duo” Adaptor in the proper direction when faster. inserting it into the camera. Inserting it in the • We recommend having spare batteries wrong direction may cause a malfunction. handy for two or three times the expected • Do not insert a “Memory Stick Duo” that is not shooting time, and try test shooting inserted into a “Memory Stick Duo” Adaptor before the actually using the camera. into a “Memory Stick”-compatible unit. This may cause a malfunction of the unit. • Do not expose the battery to water. The battery is not water-resistant. Note on use of the “Memory Stick PRO” (not supplied) “Memory Stick PRO” with a capacity of up to 1 GB is verified for this camera., Additional information File format (DCF compliant)

The battery charger Specifications Still images: Exif Ver. 2.2, JPEG

compliant, GIF (for Clip Motion), DPOF compatible • Do not charge any other batteries except x Camera Audio with still image: MPEG1 the Sony nickel hydride battery using the [System] compliant (Monaural) supplied battery charger. If you charge Movies: MPEG1 compliant Image device 6.67 mm (1/2.7 type) color other types of battery (manganese, (Monaural)CCD alkaline, lithium, ni-cd batteries, etc.), Recording mediaPrimary color filter “Memory Stick” this may cause leakage, explosion, or Total pixels number of camera Flash Recommended distance overheating of the battery, and personal Approx. 3 340 000 pixels DSC-P72 scald or injury may be caused. Effective pixels number of camera 0.5 to 3.8 m (19 3/4 inches to Approx. 3 210 000 pixels • Do not recharge a fully charged nickel 12 feet 5 19/32 inches) (W)/ Lens DSC-P72 0.5 to 2.5 m (19 3/ inches to hydride battery. This may cause leakage, 43× zoom lens 8 feet 2 7/16 inches) (T) explosion, or overheating of the battery. f=6.0 to 18.0 mm DSC-P52 • When charging a high capacity battery (35 mm camera conversion: 39 to 0.5 to 3.3 m (19 3/4 inches to other than the supplied battery using the 117mm (1 9/ to 4 5/ inches)) 10 feet 9 /32 inches)16 8 F2.8-5.6 DSC-P32supplied battery charger, the full capacity DSC-P52 0.5 to 3.8 m (19 3/4 inches to of the battery may not be available. 192× zoom lens 12 feet 5 /32 inches) • When the CHARGE lamp flashes, the f=6.3 to 12.6 mm (when ISO sensitivity is set to Auto) battery may cause a malfunction if an (35 mm camera conversion: 41 to unspecified battery was inserted. First, 82 mm (1 5/ to 3 1/ inches)) [Output connectors]8 4 verify that the battery is specified for use F3.8 A/V OUT (MONO) jack (Monaural) DSC-P32 Minijack with the charger. If the battery is Single focal lens Video: 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω, unbalanced, specified for use with the charger, remove f=5.0 mm sync negative all the batteries from the battery charger, (35 mm camera conversion: 33 mm Audio: 327 mV (at a 47 kΩ load) insert other batteries, such as new ones, (1 / inches)) Output impedance 2.2 kΩ16 USB jack mini-B and check that the battery charger works F2.8 properly. When the battery charger works Exposure control Automatic, Program, Twilight, [LCD screen] properly, the batteries may be the cause Twilight portrait, Landscape, Snow, LCD panel used of the malfunction. Beach DSC-P72 White balance 3.8 cm (1.5 type) TFT drive Automatic, Daylight, Cloudy, DSC-P52 Fluorescent, Incandescent 4.0 cm (1.6 type) TFT drive, DSC-P32 Mass DSC-P72 Rated output voltage 4.0 cm (1.6 type) TFT drive Approx. 259 g (9.1 oz) (two DC 4.2 V, 1.5 A Total number of dots batteries, “Memory Stick” and wrist Operating temperature range DSC-P72 strap included) 0° to +40°C (32° to +104°F) 123 200 (560×220) dots DSC-P52 Storage temperature range DSC-P52 Approx. 280 g (9.9 oz) (two −20° to +60°C (−4° to +140°F) 61 600 (280×220) dots batteries, “Memory Stick” and wrist DSC-P32 strap included) Maximum dimensions 61 600 (280×220) dots DSC-P32 Approx. 48 × 29 × 81 mm (1 15/16 × Approx. 217 g (7.7 oz) (two 1 3/ × 3 116 /4 inches) (W/H/D)batteries, “Memory Stick” and wrist [Power, general] strap included) Mass Approx. 130 g (5 oz) Power AA nickel hydride batteries (2) Microphone Electret condenser microphone 2.4 V AccessoriesSpeaker Dynamic speaker AC-LS5 AC Adaptor • HR6 (size AA) Ni-MH batteries (2) (not supplied), 4.2 V • Battery case Power consumption (when recording) • Exif print Compatible • BC-CS2A/CS2B Ni-MH Battery charger (1) DSC-P72 PRINT image matching II 1.7W Compatible • Power cord (mains lead) (1) DSC-P52 • USB cable (1) 1.6W x BC-CS2A/CS2B Ni-MH battery • A/V connecting cable (1) DSC-P32 charger • Wrist strap (1)1.7W • “Memory Stick” (16MB) (1) Operating temperature range Power requirements 0° to +40°C (32° to +104°F) AC 100 to 240V 50/60Hz • CD-ROM (USB driver: SPVD-010) (1) Storage temperature range3W• Operating Instructions (1) −20° to +60°C (−4° to +140°F) Output voltage AA : DC 1.4 V 400 mA × 2 Design and specifications are subject to change Dimensions DSC-P72 119.5 × 57.7 × 36.8 mm AAA : DC 1.4 V 160 mA × 2 without notice. (4 3/ × 2 3/ × 1 1/ inches) Operating temperature range4820° to +40°C (32° to +104°F) DSC-P52 123.2 × 57.7 × 52 mm Dimensions 71 × 30 × 91 mm (4 7/ × 2 3/ × 2 1/ inches) (2 7/8 × 1 3/16 × 3 5/8 inches) (W/H/888DSC-P32 D) 101.3 × 57.7 × 35.2 mm Mass Approx. 90 g (3 oz) (4 × 2 3/8 × 1 7/16 inches) (W/H/D, protruding portions not x AC-LS5 AC Adaptor (not supplied) included) Power requirements AC 100 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz 11 W 0.16 to 0.09 A, Additional information J Low battery warning (98)

The LCD screen K AF range finder (48)

L Spot metering cross hair (51)

For shooting still images M Image quality indicator (25, 46)

N Recording folder indicator (46) O Remaining number of recordable 1 qd images indicator (25)/ 2 qf Self-diagnosis display (100) qg P Remaining “Memory Stick” 4 capacity indicator qh 5 VGA 101 Q Center AF /Multi AF 3:2 qj 6 indicator (48)/ Solarize qk Focus preset value (49)7 F2.8 + 125 ql R EV adjustment indicator (50)8 S Iris value indicator 9 w; T Shutter speed indicator q; wa WB U Macro (DSC-P72) (30) ws V Self-timer indicator (31) qa wd W Vibration warning indicator (99) qs X Menu/Guide menu (45) wf • Pressing the MENU button switches the menu/ guide menu on/off. A Image size indicator (24, 25) E Flash mode (32)/ • (Metering Mode) is not displayed on the B Recording mode indicator Red-eye reduction (33)/ menu of the DSC-P52/P32. (54–57) White balance indicator (52)/ The page numbers in parentheses indicate C AE/AF lock indicator (26, 49) AF illuminator indicator (33) the location of additional important D Battery remaining indicator (17) F Camera mode indicator (27, 58) information. G Date/time indicator (35) H ISO sensitivity (102) I Picture effect indicator (60),

For shooting movies

q; 160 101 3 STBY 00:00:00 [00:28:25] qa qs 4 Solarize 5 + qd 6 qf 7 qg WB PFX qh A Recording mode indicator (72) L Center AF /Multi AF B Battery remaining indicator (17) indicator (48)/ C White balance indicator (52) Focus preset value (49) D Picture effect indicator (60) M EV adjustment indicator (50) E Low battery warning (98) N Macro (DSC-P72) (30) F Spot metering cross hair (51) O Self-timer indicator (31) G AF range finder (48) P Menu/Guide menu (45) H Image size indicator (72) I Recording time (Maximum • Pressing the MENU button switches the menu/ recordable time) indicator (101)/ guide menu on/off. • (Metering Mode) is not displayed on the Self-diagnosis display (100) menu of the DSC-P52/P32. J Recording folder indicator (46) K Remaining “Memory Stick” capacity indicator, Additional information

For still image playback For movie playback The page numbers in parentheses indicate

1 the location of additional important qh information.2 qs VGA qj 3 101 12/12 8 qd qk 4 x1.3 160 ql 9 qf 101 8/8 5 00:00:12 w; q; qg wa BACK/NEXT VOLUME qa ws A Image size indicator (24, 25) Folder Protect DPOF Slide wd B Recording mode indicator (54– OK 57) L Image size indicator (73) C Volume indicator (57)/Protect M Recording mode indicator (73) mark indicator (67)/Print (DPOF) N Playback indicator (73)/Volume mark indicator (70) indicator (73) D Zoom indicator (62)/Jog O Low battery warning (98) playback indicator (65) P Change folder indicator (61) E Low battery warning (98) Q Playback folder indicator (61) F Folder-file number (87) R Image number/Number of G Playback folder indicator (61) images recorded in the playback H Remaining “Memory Stick” capacity indicator folder I Number of images recorded in S Remaining “Memory Stick” the playback folder/Image capacity indicator number T Counter (73) J Change folder indicator (61) U Playback screen (73) K Recording date/time of the V Playback bar (73) image (21)/Menu/Guide menu W Menu/Guide menu (45) (45) 1,

Index D G Index Date and time ... 21, 35 GIF ... 54, 87

DC plug ... 19

A Deleting images ... 40, 74 I

A/V connecting cable ... 38 Divide ... 76 Image Access lamp ... 23 Copying images to your computer ... 78, 88 AE/AF lock ... 26, 49 E File names ... 87 AE/AF lock lamp ... 9, 11, 13 Editing still images Image file storage destinations ... 86 AF illuminator ... 8, 10, 12, 33 Print (DPOF) mark ... 70 Image quality ... 25, 46 AF lock ... 26, 49 Protect ... 67 Image size ... 24, 25, 101 Auto focus mode ... 28, 48 Resize ... 69 Image Transfer ... 80, 83 Auto Power Off feature ... 20 E-Mail ... 56 ImageMixer ... 81 EV adjustment ... 50 Index screen ... 36

B Exposure Installation ... 79, 88

Battery EV adjustment ... 50 ISO ... 102 Battery life ... 17 Charging the battery ... 14FJCharging time ... 15 File JPG ... 87 Remaining indicator ... 17 File names ... 87 Beep/shutter sound ... 107 Image file storage destinations ... 86 L Finder ... 34 LCD

C Flash LCD brightness ... 107

Changing the recording folder ... 47 Daylight synchro ... 32 LCD screen display ... 113, 114, 115 Charging Flash Level ... 53 LCD status/LCD on/off ... 34 Charging the battery ... 14 Red Eye Reduction ... 33 Charging time ... 15 Selecting a flash mode ... 32 M Cleaning ... 108 Focus Memory Stick Computer AE/AF lock lamp ... 9, 11, 13 AF lock ... 26, 49 Formatting a Memory Stick ... 44Copying images to your computer ... 78, 88 Inserting a Memory Stick ... 23 USB cable ... 82 Focus preset ... 49 Number of shooting images ... 25 USB driver ... 79, 88 Folder The number of images that can be saved/ Control button ... 20 Folder for playback ... 61 shooting time ... 25, 101 Creating a new folder ... 47 Recording folder ... 47 Format ... 44, Index Menu Self-timer ... 31 Smart zoom ... 29 Changing menu ...45 Setting Spot metering ... 51 Metering mode ...51 Changing menu ... 45 The number of images that can be saved/ Mode selector ...9, 11, 13 Date and time ... 21 shooting time ... 17, 25, 101 Moisture condensation ...108 Image size ... 24 Using auto mode ... 26 Movie SET UP ... 45 Using the self-timer ... 31 Continuous shooting ...18 Shooting close-ups (Macro) ... 30 White balance ... 52 Cutting movies ...76 Shooting mode Deleting movies ...74 Clip Motion ... 54 T Shooting movies ...72 E-Mail ... 56 Trimming ... 63 Viewing ...73 MPEG Movie ... 72 MPG ...87 Shooting (using auto mode) ... 26 Shooting according to scene conditions ... 58 U

N Shooting in Multi Burst mode ... 55 USB

NR slow shutter ...59 Voice ... 57 Cancel the USB connection ... 83, 89 NTSC ...107 Shooting with the date and time inserted ... 35 Installing the USB driver ... 79, 88 Still image playback USB connection ... 82, 88 Index (nine or triple-image) screen ... 36 Using your camera abroad ... 19

P Playback zoom ... 62

PAL ...107 Quick Review ... 28 V Picture effect ...60 Rotate ... 64 Viewing on the single-image screen ... 36 Power Slide show ... 63 Voice ... 57 An external power source ...19 Viewing images on a TV screen ... 38 Battery ...14 Viewing on the single-image screen ... 36 Inserting battery ...16 WViewing the images on your computer On/Off ...20 Warnings and messages ... 98 ... 85, 89 Precautions ...108 White balance ... 52Still image shooting Auto focus mode ... 28, 48

R EV adjustment ... 50 Z

Red Eye Reduction ...33 Image size ... 24, 25, 101 Zoom RESET button ...91 Inserting the date and time ... 35 Playback zoom ... 62 Number of shooting images ... 25 Using the zoom feature ... 29

S Picture effect ... 60

Selecting a flash mode ... 32 Self-diagnosis display ...100 Shooting close-ups (Macro) ... 30, Printed on 100% recycled paper using VOC (Volatile Organic Additional information on this product and answers to frequent Compound)-free vegetable oil asked questions can be found at our Customer Support Website. based ink. Sony Corporation Printed in Japan308214611,

Reverse 987624841.pdf Revision History

Ver. Date History Contents S.M. Rev. issued 1.0 2003.03 Official Release — —,

DSC-P52 SERVICE MANUAL LEVEL 2 US Model Ver 1.0 2003. 03 Canadian Model

Revision History AEP Model

UK Model E Model Australian Model Hong Kong Model Korea Model Chinese Model Tourist Model Brazilian Model Link

SPECIFICATIONS BLOCK DIAGRAMS PRINTED WIRING BOARDS SERVICE NOTE FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS REPAIR PARTS LIST DISASSEMBLY SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS • For INSTRUCTION MANUAL, refer to SERVICE MANUAL, LEVEL 1 (987624841.pdf). • Reference No. search on printed wiring boards is available. On the SY-91 board This service manual provides the information that is premised the circuit board replacement service and not intended repair inside the SY-91 board. Therefore, schematic diagram, printed wiring board, waveforms, mounted parts location and electrical parts list of the SY-91 board are not shown. The following pages are not shown. Schematic diagram ...Pages 4-7 to 4-26 Mounted parts location ...Page 4-48 Printed wiring board ...Pages 4-39 to 4-42 Electrical parts list ... Pages 5-7 to 5-13 Waveforms ... Pages 4-45 to 4-46

DIGITAL STILL CAMERA

,

DSC-P52 COVER SPECIFICATIONS

xCamera [LCD screen] xAC-LS5 AC Adaptor (not supplied) [System] LCD panel used Power requirements Image device 6.67 mm (1/2.7 type) color 4.0 cm (1.6 type) TFT drive AC 100 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz CCD Total number of dots 11 W 0.16 to 0.09 A Primary color filter 61 600 (280×220) dots Rated output voltage Total pixels number of camera DC 4.2 V, 1.5 A[Power, general] Approx. 3 340 000 pixels Operating temperature range Effective pixels number of camera Power AA nickel hydride batteries (2) 0° to +40°C (32° to +104°F) Approx. 3 210 000 pixels 2.4 V Storage temperature range AC-LS5 AC Adaptor Lens 2× zoom lens –20° to +60°C (–4° to +140°F)(not supplied), 4.2 V f=6.3 to 12.6 mm Dimensions 48 × 29 × 81 mm (1 15/16 × 1 3/16 (35 mm camera conversion: 41 to Power consumption (when recording) 3 1/4 inches) (W/H/D, protruding 5 1.6W82 mm (1 /8 to 3 1/4 inches)) parts not included) Operating temperature range F3.8 Mass Approx. 180 g (6 oz) 0° to +40°C (32° to +104°F) Exposure control (adaptor only) Storage temperature range Automatic, Program, Twilight, –20° to +60°C (–4° to +140°F) Twilight portrait, Landscape, Snow, Accessories Beach Dimensions 123.2 × 57.7 × 52 mm HR6 (size AA) Ni-MH batteries (2) 731White balanceAutomatic, Daylight, Cloudy, (4 /8 × 2 /8 × 2 /8 inches) Battery case Fluorescent, Incandescent Mass Approx. 280 g (9.9 oz) (two BC-CS2A/CS2B Ni-MH Battery charger (1) File format (DCF compliant) batteries, “Memory Stick” and wrist Power cord (mains lead) (1) Still images: Exif Ver. 2.2, JPEG strap included) USB cable (1) compliant, GIF (for Clip Motion), Microphone Electret condenser microphone DPOF compatible A/V connecting cable (1) Audio with still image: MPEG1 Speaker Dynamic speaker Wrist strap (1) compliant (Monaural) “Memory Stick” (16MB) (1) Movies: MPEG1 compliant xBC-CS2A/CS2B Ni-MH battery CD-ROM (USB driver: SPVD-010) (1) (Monaural) charger Operating Instructions (1) Recording media “Memory Stick” Power requirements AC 100 to 240V 50/60Hz Design and specifications are subject to change Flash Recommended distance3Wwithout notice. 0.5 to 3.3 m (19 3/4 inches to 10 feet 9 29/32 inches) Output voltage AA : DC 1.4 V 400 mA × 2 [Output connectors] AAA : DC 1.4 V 160 mA × 2 Operating temperature range A/V OUT (MONO) jack (Monaural) 0° to +40°C (32° to +104°F) Minijack Video: 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω, unbalanced, Dimensions 71 × 30 × 91 mm (2 7sync negative /8 × 1 3/ 516 × 3 /8 inches) (W/H/ Audio: 327 mV (at a 47 kΩ load) D) Output impedance 2.2 kΩ Mass Approx. 90 g (3 oz) USB jack mini-B

CAUTION : Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type. SAFETY-RELATED COMPONENT WARNING!! ATTENTION AU COMPOSANT AYANT RAPPORT À LA SÉCURITÉ! COMPONENTS IDENTIFIED BY MARK 0 OR DOTTED LINE WITH LES COMPOSANTS IDENTIFÉS PAR UNE MARQUE 0 SUR LES MARK 0 ON THE SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS AND IN THE PARTS DIAGRAMMES SCHÉMATIQUES ET LA LISTE DES PIÈCES SONT LIST ARE CRITICAL TO SAFE OPERATION. REPLACE THESE CRITIQUES POUR LA SÉCURITÉ DE FONCTIONNEMENT. NE COMPONENTS WITH SONY PARTS WHOSE PART NUMBERS REMPLACER CES COMPOSANTS QUE PAR DES PIÈSES SONY APPEAR AS SHOWN IN THIS MANUAL OR IN SUPPLEMENTS DONT LES NUMÉROS SONT DONNÉS DANS CE MANUEL OU PUBLISHED BY SONY. DANS LES SUPPÉMENTS PUBLIÉS PAR SONY.

— 2 —,

DSC-P52 SAFETY CHECK-OUT

After correcting the original service problem, perform the following safety checks before releasing the set to the customer. 1. Check the area of your repair for unsoldered or poorly-soldered Unleaded solder connections. Check the entire board surface for solder splashes Boards requiring use of unleaded solder are printed with the lead- and bridges. free mark (LF) indicating the solder contains no lead. 2. Check the interboard wiring to ensure that no wires are (Caution: Some printed circuit boards may not come printed with the lead free mark due to their particular size.) "pinched" or contact high-wattage resistors. 3. Look for unauthorized replacement parts, particularly transistors, that were installed during a previous repair. Point : LEAD FREE MARK them out to the customer and recommend their replacement. Unleaded solder has the following characteristics. 4. Look for parts which, through functioning, show obvious signs • Unleaded solder melts at a temperature about 40°C higher than of deterioration. Point them out to the customer and ordinary solder. recommend their replacement. Ordinary soldering irons can be used but the iron tip has to be applied to the solder joint for a slightly longer time. 5. Check the B+ voltage to see it is at the values specified. Soldering irons using a temperature regulator should be set to 6. Flexible Circuit Board Repairing about 350°C. • Keep the temperature of the soldering iron around 270˚C Caution: The printed pattern (copper foil) may peel away if the during repairing. heated tip is applied for too long, so be careful! • Do not touch the soldering iron on the same conductor of the • Strong viscosity circuit board (within 3 times). Unleaded solder is more viscous (sticky, less prone to flow) than • Be careful not to apply force on the conductor when soldering ordinary solder so use caution not to let solder bridges occur such or unsoldering. as on IC pins, etc. • Usable with ordinary solder It is best to use only unleaded solder but unleaded solder may also be added to ordinary solder. — 3 —,

DSC-P52

TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. SERVICE NOTE ... 1-1 4-5. MOUNTED PARTS LOCATION ·································4-47 2. DISASSEMBLY Mounted parts location of the SY-91 board is not shown. 2-1. CABINET (REAR) BLOCK ASSEMBLY ····················· 2-2 Page 4-48 is not shown. 2-2. BLOCK LIGHT GUIDE PLATE, LCD MODULE, CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (SW-392), LITHIUM 5. REPAIR PARTS LIST BATTERY ······································································· 2-3 5-1. EXPLODED VIEWS ······················································ 5-1 2-3. MAIN BLOCK ASSEMBLY ·········································· 2-4 5-1-1.CABINET (FRONT) SECTION ····································· 5-3 2-4. UNIT PARTS (UA-003), DC 8C-028G MOTOR ··········· 2-4 5-1-2.CABINET (REAR) BLOCK SECTION ························· 5-4 2-5. OPTICAL FINDER (B148B), VIDEO LENS (B147A), 5-1-3.MAIN BLOCK SECTION-1 ··········································· 5-5 CCD BLOCK ASSEMBLY ············································ 2-5 5-1-4.MAIN BLOCK SECTION-2 ··········································· 5-6 2-6. CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (RL-060), 5-2. ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST ········································ 5-14 ST-82 BOARD ································································ 2-5 2-7. MEMORY STICK CONNECTOR, Parts list of the SY-91 board are not shown. JK-BLOCK (JK-256) ······················································ 2-6 Pages from 5-7 to 5-13 are not shown. 2-8. SY-91 BOARD ································································ 2-7 2-9. OPTICAL FINDER (B148B), VIDEO LENS (B147A) ··· 2-9 2-10. FLASH UNIT ·································································· 2-9 2-11. CIRCUIT BOARDS LOCATION ································· 2-10 2-12. FLEXIBLE BOARDS LOCATION ······························ 2-11 HELP (List of caution points is shown here) 3. BLOCK DIAGRAMS 3-1. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM ···································· 3-1 3-2. CAMERA BLOCK DIAGRAM ····································· 3-3 3-3. FRONT/LCD BLOCK DIAGRAM ································ 3-5 3-4. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM ········································· 3-7 4. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS 4-1. FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (1/2) ······················· 4-1 FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (2/2) ······················· 4-3 4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS Shematic diagram of the SY-91 board are not shown. Pages from 4-7 to 4-26 are not shown. • ST-82 (FLASH DRIVE)/FP-643 FLEXIBLE SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-27 • JK BLOCK (JK-256) (JACK) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-29 • CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (SW-392) (LCD, CONTROL SW) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-31 • RL-060 (POWER/SHUTTER SW) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-33 • UA-003 (AF LED, SW) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-34 4-3. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS • ST-82 (FLASH DRIVE) PRINTED WIRING BOARD ······················· 4-37 Printed wiring board of the SY-91 board are not shown. Pages from 4-39 to 4-42 are not shown. • JK BLOCK (JK-256) (JACK) FLEXIBLE BOARD ····································· 4-43 4-4. WAVEFORMS ······························································ 4-45 Waveforms of the SY-91 board are not shown. Pages 4-45 to 4-46 are not shown. — 4 —,

DSC-P52

COVER SECTION 1

SERVICE NOTE

• NOTE FOR REPAIR Make sure that the flat cable and flexible board are not cracked of When remove a connector, don't pull at wire of connector. bent at the terminal. Be in danger of the snapping of a wire. Do not insert the cable insufficiently nor crookedly. When installing a connector, don't press down at wire of connector. Be in danger of the snapping of a wire. Cut and remove the part of gilt which comes off at the point. (Take care that there are some pieces of gilt left inside) [Discharging of the FLASH unit’s charging capacitor] The charging capacitor of the FLASH unit is charged up to the maximum 300 V potential. There is a danger of electric shock by this high voltage when the capacitor is handled by hand. The electric shock is caused by the charged voltage which is kept without discharging when the main power of the DSC-P52 is simply turned off. Therefore, the remaining voltage must be discharged as described below. Preparing the Short Jig 1 kΩ/1 W To preparing the short jig. a small clip is attached to each end of a resistor of 1 kΩ /1 W (1-215-869-11) Wrap insulating tape fully around the leads of the resistor to prevent electrical shock. Wrap insulating tape. Discharging the Capacitor Short circuits between the positive and the negative terminals of charged capacitor with the short jig about 10 seconds. Capacitor Shorting jig (1kΩ / 1w) ST-82 board 1-1,

DSC-P52

[Description on Self-diagnosis Display] Self-diagnosis display • C: ss: ss The contents which can be handled by customer, are displayed. • E: ss: ss The contents which can be handled by engineer, are displayed. Display Code Countermeasure Cause Caution Display During Error C:32:01 Turn off the main power then back on. Trouble with hardware. SYSTEM ERROR • The type of memory stick that cannot be Replace the memory stick. used by this machine, is inserted. C:13:01 MS ERROR Format the memory stick with the DSC-P52. • Data is damaged. • Unformatted memory stick is inserted. Flash LED Checking of flash unit or replacement of Abnormality when flash is being E:91:01 Flash display flash unit. charged. Flashing at 3.2 Hz E:61:00 *1 Checking of lens drive circuit When failed in the focus initialization. — E61:10 *1 Note : The error code is cleared if the battery is removed, except defective flash unit. *1: The error display is given in two ways. 1-2E,

DSC-P52 COVER SECTION 2 DISASSEMBLY HELP The following flow chart shows the disassembly procedure. DISASSEMBLY

SY-91 board service position

DISASSEMBLY HELP

Discharging the Capacitor

DISASSEMBLY

DISASSEMBLY DISASSEMBLY

DISASSEMBLY DISASSEMBLY DISASSEMBLY HELP PROCEDURE OF REMOVING THE SY-91 BOARD (SERVICE POSITION)

1 2-1. CABINET (REAR) BLOCK ASSEMBLY ... (page 2-2) 2 2-2. BLOCK LIGHT GUIDE PLATE, LCD MODULE, ... (page 2-3) CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (SW-392), LITHIUM BATTERY 3 2-3. MAIN BLOCK ASSEMBLY ... (page 2-4) 4 2-4. UNIT PARTS (UA-003), DC 8C-028G MOTOR ... (page 2-4) 5 2-5. OPTICAL FINDER (B148B), VIDEO LENS (B147A), CCD BLOCK ASSEMBLY ... (page 2-5) 6 2-6. CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (RL-060), ST-82 BOARD ... (page 2-5) 7 2-7. MEMORY STICK CONNECTOR, JK BLOCK (JK-256) ... (page 2-6) 8 2-8. SY-91 BOARD ... (page 2-7) 2-1,

DSC-P52

NOTE: Follow the disassembly procedure in the numerical order given. 2-1. CABINET (REAR) BLOCK ASSEMBLY

Caution

Attach the Tape (Y) as shown in the illustration. 6 Claw SY-91 board Tape (Y) 7 Claw qs Control switch block (SW-392) (39P) qa Tape (Y) 1 Screw (M2 × 4), 3 Screw (M2 × 4), lock ace, p2 8 Claw lock ace, p2 2 Screw (M2 × 4), lock ace, p2 4 Open the MS lid. q; Claw 5 Screw (M2 × 4), lock ace, p2 9 Claw qd Cabinet (rear) block assembly 2-2,

DSC-P52

2-2. BLOCK LIGHT GUIDE PLATE, LCD MODULE, CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (SW-392),

LITHIUM BATTERY

Lithium battery

Caution Caution

When installing it, Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. align the switch position Replace only with the same or equivalent type. as shown. Control switch block (SW-392) 3 Claw 7 Remove soldering from the two points. 6 Control switch block (SW-392) 1 Five tapping screws 5 LCD module (24P) (M1.7 × 4) 8 Lithium battery 2 Two tapping screws (M1.7 × 4) 4 Block light guide plate (6P) 2-3,

DSC-P52

2-3. MAIN BLOCK ASSEMBLY

Caution

The power supply capacitor of the Flash unit is charged to the voltage as high as 300 V at a maximum. The high voltage is not discharged even after the main power of the machine is simply turned off and the charged potential still remains. Discharge the residual voltage by referring to Service Note (page 1-1). 3 Two claws Capacitor Flash unit Shorting jig (1kΩ / 1w) ST-82 board 1 Unit parts (UA-003) (10P) 4 Main block assembly 2 DC 8C-028G motor (2P) 2-4. UNIT PARTS (UA-003), DC 8C-028G MOTOR 2 Claw 4 Tapping screw, p2 3 Unit parts (UA-003) (1.7 × 5) 5 DC 8C-028G motor 1 Two tapping screws, p2 (1.7 × 5) 2-4,

DSC-P52

2-5. OPTICAL FINDER (B148B), VIDEO LENS (B147A), CCD BLOCK ASSEMBLY 1 FP689 flexible board (21P) 9 Optical finder (B148B), video lens (B147A) 2 Optical finder (8P) 7 Two bosses q; Optical filter block 4 Lens frame (R) qd CCD block assembiy 8 two bosses qa Seal rubber (DQ) 3 Tapping screw 5 Two tapping screws ,p2 qs Remove the solderings. (1.7 × 4) (1.7 × 5)

Caution

When installing the CCD block assy, align the CCD block assy with the mark as shown 6 Tapping screw in the illustration. (1.7 × 4) mark mark 2-6. CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (RL-060), ST-82 BOARD 2 Control switch block (RL-060) 1 Two claws (10P) 5 FP-643 flexible board (12P) 6 ST-82 board 3 Control switch block (RL-060) 4 Two claws 2-5,

DSC-P52

2-7. MEMORY STICK CONNECTOR, JK BLOCK (JK-256)

Caution

Attach the Tape (Y) as shown in the illustration. SY-91 board Tape (Y) 6 Tape (Y) 2 Claw 7 JK BLOCK (JK-256) 4 Memory stick connector (39P) 8 JK BLOCK (JK-256) 1 Tapping screw 5 Tapping screw, p2 (1.7 × 4) (1.7 × 5) 3 JK BLOCK (JK-256) (10P) 2-6,

DSC-P52

2-8. SY-91 BOARD

Caution

When removing the harness, be sure to pull the harness up at the right angle with the board while pressing down the connector on the circuit board. Connector 2 Battery holder (with terminal)(4P) 1 Four screws(M1.7 × 2.5) 3 SY-91 board 2-7,

DSC-P52

[SERVICE POSITION (SY-91 BOARD)] Memory stick connector Cabinet (rear) block assembly (39P) AC power AC IN JK BLOCK adaptor (JK-256) (10P) CN702 (39P) DC jack (10P) CN701 CN706 SY-91 board Unit parts (UA-003) CN203 CN704 CN705 (12P) CN201 By using an adhesive tape, press the SENCV OPEN switch. ST-82 board (10P) (8P) (21P) Optcal finder (B148B), video lens (B147A) Control switch block (RL-060) “ Never remove the lens unless removal is required at the event of checking the CCD imager and others.’’

PROCEDURE OF REMOVING THE SY-91 BOARD (SERVICE POSITION)

1 2-1. CABINET (REAR) BLOCK ASSEMBLY ... (page 2-2) 2 2-2. BLOCK LIGHT GUIDE PLATE, LCD MODULE, ... (page 2-3) CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (SW-392), LITHIUM BATTERY 3 2-3. MAIN BLOCK ASSEMBLY ... (page 2-4) 4 2-4. UNIT PARTS (UA-003), DC 8C-028G MOTOR ... (page 2-4) 5 2-5. OPTICAL FINDER (B148B), VIDEO LENS (B147A), CCD BLOCK ASSEMBLY ... (page 2-5) 6 2-6. CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (RL-060), ST-82 BOARD ... (page 2-5) 7 2-7. MEMORY STICK CONNECTOR, JK BLOCK (JK-256) ... (page 2-6) 8 2-8. SY-91 BOARD ... (page 2-7) 2-8,

DSC-P52

2-9. OPTICAL FINDER (B148B), VIDEO LENS (B147A) 5 FP689 flexible board (21P) 1 Tapping screw (1.7 × 4) 3 Two bosses 4 Optical finder (B148B) 6 Video lens (B147A) 2 Two tapping screws (1.7 × 4) 2-10.FLASH UNIT 1 Remove soldering from the two points. 2 Flash unit 2-9,

DSC-P52

2-11.CIRCUIT BOARDS LOCATION SY-91 ST-82 Board Name Function SY-91 CCD IMAGER CAMERA A/D CONV., LENS DRIVE, CAMERA DSP, VIDEO AMP, SH DSP, CLK GEN, LCD DRIVE TIMING GENERATOR,FRONT CONTROL, AUDIO I/O, DC IN, DC-DC CONVERTER, CONNECTOR ST-82 FLASH DRIVE 2-10,

DSC-P52

2-12.FLEXIBLE BOARDS LOCATION The flexible boards contained in the VIDEO LENS are not shown. CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (SW-392) CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (RL-060) UNIT PARTS (UA-003) FP-643 FP-689 JK BLOCK (JK-256) 2-11E,

DSC-P52

19/Mar/2003. Update

HELP

Sheet attachment positions and procedures of processing the flexible boards/harnesses are shown.

MAIN BLOCK SECTION

SY-91 board Tape (Y) SY-91 board Caution B (260) label Caution A (260) label SY-91 board Busteraid 260 SY-91 board

HELP

, DSC-P52

COVER

3. BLOCK DIAGRAMS Link OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM FRONT/LCD BLOCK DIAGRAM CAMERA BLOCK DIAGRAM POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM,

DSC-P52 COVER SECTION 3 3. BLOCK DIAGRAMS BLOCK DIAGRAMS

3-1. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM ( ) : Number in parenthesis ( ) indicates the division number of schematic diagram where the component is located.

SY-91 BOARD (3/10)

(1/10) (1/10) PANEL UNITPANEL R,G,B (5/10)

LENS BLOCK IC301 3 IC801 VR,VG,VB CAMERA

IRIS IC351 CCD OUT IC901 DATA BUS 14 DSP PANEL V,HD O LCD CONTROL CCD H1,H2 CAMERA DRIVER(HM (3M SA) 2 SWITCH LCD901 IMAGER MODULE CLK TG BOARD) BLOCK COLOR V1,V2,V3A,V3B (CH-122 CCD FD,CLD HD LCD V4,V5A,V5B,V6 (3M) (3/10) (SW-392) MONITOR BOARD) (1/2) V SUB XCAM SO,XCAM SCK YO IC601 (5/10) VIDEO IC802 AMP LCD

TG

(4/10) (7/10) BL H ND901BACK LIGHT X781 IC781 TG CLK A OUT L MC CLK1 IC151 27MHz CLOCK A IN GEN. USB CLK (4/10) AUDIOAMP V AMP ON SP901

IC501 SPEAKER FP-689 DATA BUS MC CAM(2/10)

(FLEXIBLE) SH DSP IRIS 4M IRIS METER ADDRESS BUS4 DRIVER UA-003

IC203 (2/10) (FLEXIBLE) MIC MIC901 IC202 S101,102

H 7ch LENS SENCVCONTROL DRIVER 2 OPEN/CLOSESIG SHUTTER IC201 MOTOR SHUTTER (4/10)M 2 (2/10) DRIVER JK-256(2/2)

IC502 (FLEXIBLE) FOCUS

MOTOR FOCUS EEPROMM V OUT 4 MOTOR J102DRIVER AV JACK IN A/V OUT AU OUT (MONO) ZOOM ZOOM SYS V MOTOR M MOTOR 4 STRB ONDRIVER MS DIO,MS SCLK,MS BS ZOOM RESET 2 (MS SOCKET) SENSOR XMS IN CN101 FOCUS RESET USB DATA+/-

SENSOR

FR SI,FR SO,XFR SCK USB JACK IN (USB) LENS TEMP

SENSOR

XCAM SO,XCAM SCK OVF RESET (2/10)

SENSOR

(6/10) LENS BARIA CLOSE IC205 RL-060 LENS BARIA OPEN (FLEXIBLE)SHUTTER 2 DRIVER 2 IC401 S002 FRONT POWER (2/10) CONT

IC204

XCAM SO,XCAM SCK D/A CONV S003 SP VOL (SHUTTER) (9/10) KEY AD0,AD1 FUNCTION

IC001 UNREG SO,UNREG SCK 2 KEY

DC/DC BT901 BATT UNREG CONVERTER SYS DD ON KEY AD3 ZOOM BATTERY EVER 4V SWITCH TERMINAL D1.5V D2.9V MODEL DIAL 4 MODE DIAL CONTROL A2.9V SWITCH

JK-256 (1/2) S109PANEL 2.9V BLOCK

(FLEXIBLE) RESETPANEL 13.2V (SW-392) PANEL -15.3V (2/2) ACV UNREG ACV UNREG D3.1V J101 ST UNREG A4.9V DC IN BATT/ XEXT PANEL 4.9V BT100 M5V LITHIUME BATTERY AUDIO SIGNALCAM 15V (6/10) (SECONDARY) VIDEO SIGNAL CAM-7.5 VIDEO/AUDIO SIGNAL

IC402

EVER 3V INITIAL RESET BACKUP VCC ST UNREG CHARGING ST UNREG BL H CAPACITOR STB CHARGE FLASH XSTB FULL UNIT STB ON

FP-643 ST-82 BOARD

(FLEXIBLE) 3-1 3-2,

DSC-P52 COVER 3. BLOCK DIAGRAMS

3-2. CAMERA BLOCK DIAGRAM ( ) : Number in parenthesis ( ) indicates the division number of schematic diagram where the component is located.

SY-91 BOARD (1/2) (3/10) IC301 (4/10) (4/10)

(1/10) (1/10) IC501 IC502CAMERA DSP

IC351 IC901 (HM (3M SA) BOARD) MC CAM SH DSP EEPROM

CCD CAMERA IMAGER MODULE 2.6 2.1 6.7 6.8 RXD2 203 4 DO (CH-122 (3M) BOARD) 2.7 1.9 7.2 6.5 TXD2 202 3 DIQ352 60 4.92.5 14 66 81 SCK2 204 2 SCKV OUT 10 6 CCD OUT D0 25 . ADIN00 .56 47 14 2.4 1.8 D00 7 ..8 7.7 D0 CS 189 1 CSD13 38 16 DATA BUS 16 54 45 V1 8 18 V1 22 16 ADIN13 .D15 7.3 75 .D15 BUSY 14 7 BUSY52 41 V2 7 10 V2 2.3 1.3 7.1 6 ..9 WE 71 6 RST51 39 V3A 6 19 V3A 20 12 7.9 8.0 V3B 5 20 V3B 74 76

LENS BLOCK MCK12 49 96 CLK TGV4 4 14 V4

WEN 55 183 TG WEN 54 V5A 3 15 V5A . 3.8 TXD0 190 FR SI IRIS V5B 2 16 V5B CAHR 46 CCD HD . 37 62 RXD0 191 FR SO 51 . 79 V6 1 17 V6 CAVR 47 9 CCD FD . 4 . XFR SCK 49 . 1 6.4 SCK0 185 . 81CLPOB 43 OPB CLP 39 66 . SCS0 134 XCS MC6 FRONT H1 17 2 H1 47 .83 CLPDM 44 7 DUM CLP . 35

BLOCK

68 4 H2 18 3 H2 53 . 88 NMI 136 XMC NMI (PAGE 3-5). 33 70 . XCAM SO 41 XCAM SO A01 45 . A125 ADDRESS BUS . 90 UPDATA 74 MC UPDATA RG 12 5 RG . 36 72 . XCAM SCK 42 XCAM SCK A25 44 . .. 92 A25 HELP 157 MC HELP SUB 14 24 VHST 3.4 73 . 50 . 93 XFE CS 39 XFE CS . 31 75 . 48 TG CLK XTG CS 4.8 .95 XTG CS 40 2 . 40 . 9 76 XCAM RST 45 XCAM RESET .9732 78 XCS PANEL TG 137 XCS PANEL TG CSUB 15 46 . VG LCD. 30 (4/10) VG 232 5 BLOCK43 Q351 SUB CNTL V COM 235 V COM AD (PAGE 3-5)

IC781 250

AUCK 259 146 TCLK CLOCK GEN. PLL BYP 104 162 SCL TG CLK 2 FIN CLK3 OUT 4 XWAIT 64 138 WAIT D2.9V X781 USB CLK Q701(1/2) 27MHz CLK2 OUT 11 IRQIMG 62 165 IRQ1 CLK3 ON 5 TG CLK EN AE LOCK 35 LED D703 USB CLK EN WRLX 59 100 WE0 DRIVE (AE/AF LOCK)FP-689 CLK2 ON 13 WRHX 60 101 WE1 (FLEXIBLE) REF OUT 16 MC CLK1 88 CLK RDX 55 RD CN203(1/2) 99 MS DIR 216 D705 IRIS OVF A OVF A IRIS CS XRAM 58 114 CS4 (MS ACCESS) METER 8 14 OUT1A DRIVER IN1 12 242 DIR 2AOVF A OVF A CSX 57 117 CS6 6 15 OUT1B IN2 10 243 DIR 2B

M OVFB5OVF B JK-25617 OUT2A EN1 11 241 EN2

OVF B OVF B RO 212 PANEL R (FLEXIBLE) 7 18 OUT2B EN2 9 (2/10) GO 207 PANEL G CN701

IC203(1/4) BO 204 PANEL B LCD MS DIO 215 6

MS DIO HALL MS SCLK CN201 (2/10) PANELV1BLOCK MS SCLK 213 4BIAS CONT 5 LCD VD 229 MS BS (MS SOCKET) IRIS BIAS+ 4 IRIS BIAS+ 7 IC202 HDO (PAGE 3-5) MS BS 21496LCD HD 225 XMS IN XMS IN H IRIS HALL+ 6 IRIS HALL+ 7ch LENS DRIVER XRST SYS USB D + PULLUP 28 FRONT USB JACK IN IRIS HALL- 3 IRIS HALL- RSTX 94 BLOCK 6 AV JACK IN IRIS BIAS- IRIS BIAS- (PAGE 3-5) CN1015 140 RESETP D3.1V USB JACK IN VCC SHUTTER 19 1SHUTTER NDVDO 227 164 IRQ0 Q501 MOTOR DRIVE+ DRIVE+ DRIVER DP 239 22 USB DATA+ D+ 2 43 OUT7A IN7 48 246 SHUTTER DM 238 21 USB DATA- D-

M SYS VQ201 FRONT

2 (USB) (3/10) DRIVE- DRIVE- BLOCK 1 46 OUT7B EN7 47 M SHUT EN XRST SYS 196 2 (PAGE 3-5) IC601 FOCUS FOCUS A FOCUS A FOCUS VIDEO AMP MOTOR 16 20 OUT3A MOTOR IN3 8 234 DIR 0A STRB ON

FRONT

FOCUS A FOCUS A STROB E1 248 BLOCK 20 21 OUT3B DRIVER IN4 6 235 DIR 0B 3

M (PAGE 3-5)

VAMP ON 13 7 POWER SAVE FOCUS B 14 FOCUS B 23 OUT4A EN3 7 233 EN0 SENCV OPEN VOUT4VOUT FOCUS B FOCUS B SENCV OPEN 201 6 VIDEO IN J102 18 24 OUT4B EN4 5 AV JACK IN SENCV CLOSE 190 SENCV CLOSE 15 A/V OUT 230 CCD TEMP AU OUT (MONO) (7/10) 13 ZOOM FOCUS A 17 FOCUS AMOTOR 37 OUT5A ZOOM IN5 4 238 DIR 1A YO 215 TH351 FOCUS A FOCUS A MOTOR IC151 21 38 OUT5B DRIVER IN6 2 239 DIR 1B

TEMP M FOCUS B FOCUS B AOUT L 278 SENSOR AUDIO AMP14 41 OUT6A EN5 3 237 EN1

FOCUS B FOCUS B AIN 272 18 42 OUT6B EN6 1 XAU LINE MUTE 29 C8 LINE MUTE 236 SENS1 XAU SP MUTE 50 B2 SP SAVE LINE OUT B4 CONTROL SWITCH 232 SENS0 PS 33 CASU 124 G8 LPF SEL MUTE DRVR A5 BLOCK (SW-392) 240 SENS2 XAU PWR SAVE 25 H9 STBY (1/3) ZOOM RESET XZM RST SENS X ZM RST SENS 187 SENS2 CN702 SENSOR 7 (1/3)H4 PB IN SP OUT+ A2 SP+3 SP901 187 CKIO H5 REC OUT SP OUT- D1 SP-2 SPEAKER FOCUS RESET XFC RST SENS XFC RST SENS XFE CS SENSOR 8 226 XFE CS J3 VOL CTLXTG CS 110 XTG CS XCAM RESET E1 BEEP 220 XCAM RESET CN706 LENS TEMP LENS TEMP 13 LENS TEMP F2 XBEEP MUTE MIC IN SENSOR USB CLK MIC IN B8 5 MIC MIC901184 USB CLK CN203(2/2) TG CLK EN MIC SPY B922 TG CLK EN D001 OVF VFC RST SENS 1 OVF RST SENS USB CLK EN SELF TIMER SENSOR 23 USB CLK EN Q704 AF ILLUMINATOR XCAM DR PS LED 192 . CN202 DRIVE A4.9V LENS BARIA CLOSE 12 229 LENS TEMP DC MOTORM28C-028G LENS BARIA OPEN 13 228 HALL AD1 (2/10) SELF TIMER LED (2/10) XCAM SO UA-003(2/10) 200 TXD1IC204 BEEP ON 7 FRONTIC203(2/4) XCAM SCKIC203(3/4) 199 SCK1 BEEP BLOCK (FLEXIBLE)D/A CONV DAC STB (PAGE 3-5)HALL AMP 19 DAC STB GAIN CONT HALL OFFSET 6 A07 DI 14 CAM SOQ20413HALL GAIN XCAM SCK 168 LENS CLOSE ON 5 A06 CLK 13 6 DAC STB 236 LENS OPEN ON27LD 12 S10215HALL REF SENCV OPEN34A05(2/10) 3

IC201(2/2) 1

(2/10) IRIS DRIVE S101

IC201(1/2) 9 IRIS CONT2 SENCV CLOSE

8 1 A02 IRIS DRIVE 10 IRIS CONT1 SP VOL (2/10) (2/10) 15 A01 A10 10 A03 2 PRE LAMP AF ONIC203(4/4)

IC205 XCAM SOIRIS CONT LCDXCAM SCK

7 BARRIER28BLOCK AUDIO SIGNAL 6 MOTOR (PAGE 3-5) 3 VIDEO SIGNAL DRIVER VIDEO/AUDIO SIGNAL 3-3 3-4,

DSC-P52 COVER 3. BLOCK DIAGRAMS

3-3. FRONT/LCD BLOCK DIAGRAM ( ) : Number in parenthesis ( ) indicates the division number of schematic diagram where the component is located.

SY-91 BOARD (2/2)

PANEL R 48 R IN PANEL UNIT PANELGGIN CN70247 (3/3) CN102 PANEL B 46 B IN (5/10) VR VR CAMERA IC801 20 22 19 1 VG VGBLOCK PANEL V 22 23 20 (PAGE 3-4) LCD VB 24 VBHDO DRIVER 24 21 (6/10) RST SYS COM OUT V COM

IC401 RL-060 27 16 11EXT DA2 LCD901

FRONT (FLEXIBLE) 37 COLOR CONTROL CAMERA XCAM SO SID002 LCDBLOCK (POWER) 8 XCAM SCK XSCK MONITOR CAMERA SYS V Q402(2/2) (PAGE 3-4) 39 EXT DA1 BLOCK 2 32 SYS V CN705 XCS 35XRST SYS LED 41 (PAGE 3-4) 77 XRST SYS PWR LED ON 17 DRIVE 10 D2.9V CONTROL FR SI SWITCH 23 FR SI S002 FR SO POWER BLOCK 24 FR SO XFR SCK CAMERA 25 XFR SCK 5 (SW-392) XPWR ON189710 11 33 32 30 29 38 45 4 XCS MCBLOCK 26 XCS MC (3/3) (PAGE 3-4) XMC NMI 80 MC WAKEUP XSHTR ON43MC UPDATA D803 44 XCS LCD XAE LOCK ON51FILTER OSC C818 MC HELP 36 XMC HELP S003 L805 (SHUTTER) D2.9V D702 29 27 26 37 39 40 41 28 25XTALLY LED 15 Q401 (SELF-TIMER/ CONTROL SWITCH GRESGRES 14 11 6 XMS IN Q701(2/2) RECORDING) 6 MS IN BLOCK (SW-392) GPCKGPCK 15 12 7 LED D704 CAMERA Q402(1/2) CHARGE/STB 16 DRIVE (FLASH CHARGE) (2/3)

GSRT

45 SO GSRT 16 13 8 BLOCK 6 USB JACK IN 9 XUSB JACK IN S100,104 46 SI (5/10) 14 STBYB 9(PAGE 3-4) CN702 S107,110 IC802 SBTYB 17 . 42 XSCK 13 AV JACK IN (2/3) RESET 11 AV JACK IN KEY AD0 55 34 FUNCTION LCD TG RESET 18 15 10 KEY 48 XVD SRT 20 17 SRT 14 S101,103 1 HDI OE S105,108 OE 21 18 15 SELF TIMER LED 36 XCLR CLR 19 SELF TIMER LED FUNCTION CLR 22 19 16KEY AD1 56 33 XCS PANEL TG MCKJ CAMERA BEEP ON KEY 44 XCS MCKJ 23 20 1749 BEEP ON HCNT BLOCK79PWM HCNT 24 21 18 (PAGE 3-4) Q403 KEY AD3 58 36 CAMERA

BLOCK

BEEP MODU- 5 VG LATOR 79 MELODY (PAGE 3-4) V COM AD S102 S106 74 MELODY EN V ZOOM W (INDEX) T BL ON ND901 MODE SW BACK LIGHT BL LEVEL MODE DIAL 54 35 4 MODE POWER CN101 DIAL 9 BL H BL HBLOCK 30 428 X1 IN X401 (PAGE 3-7) 10MHz XRESET 73 38 S109(6/10) BL THL BL THL 29 X1 OUT RESET 29 3

IC402

INITIAL RESET BACKUP VCC 52 X2 IN X402 RESET 5 VIDEO SIGNAL32.768kHz 51 X2 OUT VBAT35BT100 VIN 7 EVER 4V LITHIUME

BATTERY

(SECONDARY) CN704 CN501 10 10 Q501,502 T501 D502 ST UNREG ST UNREG XE H 12 12 Q503 Q504

FP-643 TRANS DRIVE

(FLEXIBLE) L501 TRIGGER FLASH

UNIT

XSTB SAVE 75 3 XSTB PWR SAVE 3 Q505 STB CHG 46 9 STB CHARGE 9 FLASH XE L XSTB FULL 34 4 XSTB FULL 4 CHARGE DET

IC501 IGBT DRIVER

CAMERA42BLOCK 3 STB ON 1 STB ON 1 Q506 ST-82 (PAGE 3-4) BOARD 3-5 3-6 OP IN+ OP IN- PD BIAS OP OUT

OSCI VCO OSCO

XCLP BGP SBLK BLACK IN FRP FRP COM FRP PFRP XC SABE XC SAVE XSTB XP SAVE,

DSC-P52 COVER 3. BLOCK DIAGRAMS

3-4. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM ( ) : Number in parenthesis ( ) indicates the division number of schematic diagram where the component is located.

SY-91 BOARD

CN001 1. BATT UINREG F007 BATT UNREG BATT UNREG BT901 2

BATTERY

TERMINAL 3. Q021,022

SWITCHING JK-256 (1/2) FP-643 ST-82 BOARD

(FLEXIBLE) (FLEXIBLE)CN701 CN704 CN501 T501 ACV UNREG 24 Q001 F001 ST UNREG L012 Q501,502 ST UNREG 10 ST UNREG 10 J101 DC IN ACV GND 29 Q005 12 12 31 D1 G1 1 F003 ACV UNREG ACV UNREG 37 4 S1 STB CHARGE STB CHARGE99FLASH BATT/ XEXT 2 (8/10) UNIT30 S1 D002 3 F005 Q703 IC501 D003 D2 IC003 M5VG2822IGBT 5 S2 2 BATT17DET (8/10)

DRIVER

S2 D013 6 L009 D014 L010 IC004 L011 5 DC/DC 1 EVER 4.0V UA-003 CONV CN7062 (FLEXIBLE) Q006 AF LED 4.9V 7. Q007 (9/10) D009 D016 (4/10) (2/10) (2/10) 8 Q002 CHARGE D001IC001 SWITCH Q012,018 FB781 IC781 IC201 IC203 (SELF-TIMER/ DC/DC CONVERTER L006 CH1 D1.5V CLOCK IRIS IRIS/HALL AF ILLUMINATOR)SWITCHING GEN. DRIVE CONT Q004,009 DD CON SENS OUT1-P 36 SWITCH Q702 CN701OUT1-N 37 2. MS V-IN1 55 (2/10) 3 PORT Q013,019 CH3 D701 L007 L205 VCC3 42 SWITCHING D2.9V L206 IC204 JK-256(2/2) HALL REF A2.9V D/A (FLEXIBLE) CONV. OUT3-P PANEL 2.9V32 OUT3-N 33 V-IN3 54 (2/10) (2/10) Q016 CH4 L008 VCC4 SWITCHING D3.1V IC205 IC20219 L203 SHUTTER LENS DRIVE DRIVE LENS ASSY OUT4-P FP-68930 CN201 L202 Q205 (FLEXIBLE)OUT4-N 31 FC SENS VCC 8 FOCUS V-IN4 53 SENSORFB301 (3/10) CH5 Q020,024 FB302 IC301 L005 Q025 CAMERA XLENS RST LED ZM SENS VCC 9 ZOOM VCC5 20 SWITCHING A4.9V DSP SENSORFB303 L302 (HM (3M SA) PANEL 4.9V CN203 OUT5-P 38 AU 2.9V BOARD) OVF SENS VCC 2 OVF OUT5-N 39 SENSOR (4/10) OUT5-S 43 L502 V-IN5 52 FB501 IC501 CH6 FB503 MC CAMQ017,023 SH DSP CAM DD ON L003 Q026 SWITCHING M5V FB502 MS POWER ON L501 OUT6-P 28 Q028-030 (1/10) OUT6-N 29 PANEL -15.3V L901 FB902

SWITCHING

OUT6-S 18 (4/10) IC901 V-IN6 50 L902 CAMERA Q015 Q014,027 D001 IC502 MODULE L002 (1/10)D020 PANEL 13.2V EEPROM FB904 SWITCHING SWITCHING (CH-122 L903 FB903 (3M) IC351 BOARD) CCD OUT9-N 23 CH9 D12 Q905 IMAGER -IN9 80 (1/2) FB905 -IN (S) 9 CAM 15V1 Q011 L601 FB906

SWITCHING

Q905 L163 (7/10) (3/10)CH10 (2/2) OUT10 22 IC151 IC601 AMP IN L152 Q9064 AUDIO VIDEO L351(1/2) CCD 15V -IN10 3 AMP AMP AMP OUT 5 CAM -7.5V CCD -7.5V FB351 PANEL UNIT L001 Q010 Q906 VCC2 41 CH2 L803 (2/2) CN702 CN102

VGH

7 1 LCD901 OUT2-N VGL3593COLOR OUT2-P VSH34 26 24 LCD (5/10) OVP2 VDD

MONITOR

UNREG SO 58 10 23 45 DATA BL L Q802 UNREG SCK V-IN2 60 L804 46 CLK IC801 Q003 XCS DD CON LCD 44 XCS V+IN2 BACK LIGHT BL THH Q80161 L801 DRIVERSWITCHING CONTROL SYS DD ON 57 CONT SWITCH BL H EVER 3.0V (5/10) 56 VCC1 D004 BLOCKBL THL 47 RST (SW-392) BL LEVEL 9 LCD L802 IC802 DRIVER LCD (PAGE 3-5) TG ND901 ON/OFF2 BL ON48 CN101 BACK LIGHT BL L 31 6 BL THH 28 1 (6/10) (6/10) IC402 LI3V 5 BT100 IC401 XRESET INTIAL RESET LITHIUME FRONT BACKUP VCC

BATTERY

BATT IN (SECONDARY)

CONT

BATT /XETX L401 BACKUP VCC FAST CHARGE EVER 3.0V UNREG SO UNREG SCK STB CHARGE XCS DD CON SYS DD ON 3-7 3-8E BATT /XETX FAST CHARGE,

DSC-P52 COVER 4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS 4-3. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS SECTION 4 PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

4-1. FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (1/2) 12345678910 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

A FLASH UNIT ST-82 BOARD OVF_NZM

S003 S002 (SHUTTER) POWER

B

CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (RL-060)

C FP-643FLEXIBLE D

CN203 8P 1 OVF_SENS_RST 2 OVF_SENS_VCC 3 OVF_SENS_GND 4 N.C. 5 OVF_B

E 6 OVF_A

7 OVF_B CN706 10P 8 OVF_A SENCV_OPEN 1 REG_GND 2 SENCV_CLOSE 3 CN201 21P MIC_GND41DRIVE- MIC_IN 5 AF 2 DRIVE+ MIC_GND 6

F 3 HALL- PRELAMP_AF_ON 7

4 BIAS+ PRELAMP_AF_ON85BIAS- AF_LED_4.9V 9 UA-003 UNIT 6 HALL+ AF_LED_4.9V 10 7 XZM_RST_SENS

LENS BLOCK 8 XFC_RST_SENS

9 ZM_SENS_VCC

FP-689 10 FC_SENS_VCCG FLEXIBLE 11 REG_GND

12 REG_GND 13 TEMP_OUT 14 FOCUS_B 15 ZOOM_B SY-91 BOARD(1/2) 16 FOCUS_A 17 ZOOM_A 18 FOCUS_B

H 19 ZOOOM_B

20 FOCUS_A 21 ZOOM_A CN202 2P

I 2 LENS_BARIA_CLOSE

1 LENS_BARIA_OPEN CN001 4P 1 BATT_UNREG

J BT901 2 BATT_UNREGBATTERY TERMINAL

(DRY BATTERY) 3 BATT_GND 4 BATT_GND 4-1 4-2 FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (1/2) CN705 10P PWR_LED 10 EVER_3.0V 9 N.C. 8 REG_GND 7 N.C. 6 XPWR_ON 5 N.C. 4 XSHTR_ON 3 N.C. 2 XAE_LOCK_SW 1 CN704 12P CN501 12P STRB_ON11STRB_ON M_5V22M_5V XSTB_PWRSAVE33XSTB_PWRSAVE XSTB_FULL44XSTB_FULL REG_GND55REG_GND REG_GND66REG_GND REG_GND77REG_GND REG_GND88REG_GND STB_CHARGE99STB_CHARGE ST_UNREG 10 10 ST_UNREG ST_UNREG 11 11 ST_UNREG ST_UNREG 12 12 ST_UNREG,

DSC-P52 COVER 4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS 4-3. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (2/2)

12345678910 11 12 13 14 15 ND901 BACK-LIGHT

A

LCD901 COLOR LCD

MONITOR B

SP901

SPEAKER C D

CN702 39P CN701 39P2121211REG_GND MS_VSS12SP- MS_VCC24343433SP+ MS_VCC 3 S107 S108 S110

E 4 REG_GND MS_SCLK 4CN101 6P MENU

1 BL_THH (DISPLAY/ 5 LI_3V XMS_IN 5 LCD ON-OFF) (SZOOM/DELETE) 6 REG_GND MS_DIO62N.C. 217VGH N.C. 7 3 BL_THL 8 VSS N.C. 8 4 BL_H439VGL MS_BS 9 J101 5 N.C. S101 10 VDD MS_VSS 10 DC IN 6 BL_L 11 GRES MS_VSS 11

F (LEFT/QUICK REVIEW) 12 GPCK AV_GND 12

13 GSRT212121SY-91 BOARD AU_OUT 13 JK BLOCK(JK-256) 14 STBYB (2/2) AV_GND 14 CN101 5P 15 RESET AV_JACK_IN 15 1 VCC CN101434343S104 S103 S100 16 VCOM AV_GND 16 2 D- 17 SRT V_OUT 17 3 D+ (SET) (DOWN/ (UP/FLASH) 18 OE AV_GND 18 4 ID SELF TIMER) (USB)2 1 19 CLR USB_JACK_IN 19 5 GND

G 20 MCLK USB_GND 204 3

S108 21 HCNT USB_DATA- 21 22 VR USB_DATA+ 22 / 23 VG USB_GND 23 J102 (RIGHT/SPOT METER) 2 S106 1 24 VB ACV_UNREG1 24 A/V(MONO) OUT 25 VSS ACV_UNREG1 25

T

4 3 26 VSH ACV_UNREG1 26 27 REG_GND ACV_UNREG1 27

H ZOOM (INDEX) 28 BL_THH ACV_UNREG1 28

29 BL_THL ACV_UNREG1 29 10 MS_VSS 2 S102 1 4MODE 30 BL_H BATT/XEXT 30 9 MS_VCC DIAL W 31 BL_L ACV_GND 31 8 MS_SCLK S1094332 REG_GND ACV_GND 32 7 N.C.

RESET

33 KEY_AD1 ACV_GND 33 6 XMS_IN MEMORY STICK MEMORY STICK 34 KEY_AD0 ACV_GND 34 5 N.C. CONNECTOR 35 MODE_DIAL ACV_GND 35 4 MS_DIO BT100(LITHIUM BATTERY) 36 KEY_AD3 ACV_GND 36 3 N.C.

I CONTROL SW BLOCK 37 REG_GND ACV_GND 37 2 MS_BS

(SW-392) 38 XRST_IN STATIC_GND 38 1 MS_VSS 39 REG_GND STATIC_GND 39

FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (2/2) 4-3 4-4

CN102 24P VSH 24 VDD 23 VSS 22 VB 21 VG 20 VR 19 HCNT 18 MCLK 17 CLR 16 OE 15 SRT 14 STBYB 13 VBC 12 VCOM 11 RESET 10 STBYB 9 GSAT 8 GPCK 7 GRES 6 N.C. 5 VDD 4 VGL 3 VSS 2 VGH 1 SP+ SP-, DSC-P52

COVER

4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS Link ST-82 BOARD (FLASH DRIVE) CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (SW-392) FP-643 FLEXIBLE BOARD CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (RL-060) JK BLOCK (JK-256) (JACK) UA-003 (AF LED, SW) COMMON NOTE FOR SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS,

DSC-P92

COVER 4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS THIS NOTE IS COMMON FOR SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS (In addition to this, the necessary note is printed in each block) (For schematic diagrams) 1. Connection • All capacitors are in µF unless otherwise noted. pF : µ

LµiFn. 5k0 V or less are not indicated except for electrolytics Pattern box

and tantalums. • Chip resistors are 1/10 W unless otherwise noted. kΩ=1000 Ω, MΩ=1000 kΩ. • Caution when replacing chip parts. New parts must be attached after removal of chip. Be careful not to heat the minus side of tantalum About 36cm capacitor, Because it is damaged by the heat. • Some chip part will be indicated as follows. Example C541 L452 22U 10UH TA A 2520 Kinds of capacitor Front of the lens Temperature characteristics External dimensions (mm) • Constants of resistors, capacitors, ICs and etc with XX indicate that they are not used. In such cases, the unused circuits may be indicated. 2. Adjust the distance so that the output waveform of • Parts with * differ according to the model/destination. Fig. a and the Fig. b can be obtain. Refer to the mount table for each function. H • All variable and adjustable resistors have characteristic curve B, unless otherwise noted. • Signal name XEDIT → EDIT PB/XREC → PB/REC • 2: non flammable resistor • 5: fusible resistor • C: panel designation • A: B+ Line • B: B– LineABA=BBA• J : IN/OUT direction of (+,–) B LINE. Fig. a (Video output terminal output waveform) • C: adjustment for repair. • A: VIDEO SIGNAL (ANALOG) • A: AUDIO SIGNAL (ANALOG) • A: VIDEO/AUDIO SIGNAL • A: VIDEO/AUDIO/SERVO SIGNAL • A: SERVO SIGNAL • Circled numbers refer to waveforms. (Measuring conditions voltage and waveform) • Voltages and waveforms are measured between the Fig.b (Picture on monitor TV) measurement points and ground when camera shoots color bar chart of pattern box. They are reference values and reference waveforms. When indicating parts by reference number, please (VOM of DC 10 MΩ input impedance is used) include the board name. • Voltage values change depending upon input impedance of VOM used.) Note : Note : The components identified by Les composants identifiés par mark 0 or dotted line with mark une marque 0 sont critiques 0 are critical for safety. pour la sécurité. Replace only with part number Ne les remplacer que par une specified. pièce portant le numéro spécifié. 4-5 Yellow Cyan Green White Magenta Red Blue,

DSC-P52 COVER 4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS ST-82 PRINTED WIRING BOARD

4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS For Schematic Diagram • Refer to page 4-37 for printed wiring board of ST-82 board. 12345678910 11 12 13

A ST-82 BOARD NO MARK:REC/PB MODE FLASH DRIVE(STRB BLOCK) R :REC MODE P :PB MODE XX MARK:NO MOUNT

Q502 T501 UPA650TT-E1-A DC-DC CONVERTER SWITCH TRANSFORMER D502 HAU160C030TP60545B 4.1 21 P LND501 XE_H 4.13SR512 R504 R508 C505 1M R502 C512 2200 0.22uF2R509 0.1u 82100k B 4700

B

LND503 L501 R506 FLASH TRIGGER 0 2700 UNIT C509

C 47000pF

R503 Q505 250V 10k RN1902FE(TPLR3) Q501 FLASH CHARGE DTC144EMT2L00Q504 DET SWITCH 4.1 MCH3405-TL-E 0 2.863XE_L 0 SWITCH250LND502 Q506 0 CY25AAJ-8-T13 R505 0 276 100k SWITCH14C506 C508 1u 135u

D B 315V

C503 C504 C510 C511 D501 10u 10u 10u 10u MA111-(K8).S0 R507BBBB10k 6.3V 6.3V 6.3V 6.3V R51047

FP-643 FLEXIBLE

C507 0.1u R511 B 1M CN501 12P R501 ST_UNREG 12 12 ST_UNREG ST_UNREG 12 ST_UNREG 11 11 ST_UNREG ST_UNREG 11

E ST_UNREG 10 10 ST_UNREG ST_UNREG 10 IC501

TND721MH5-TL-E STB_CHARGE99STB_CHARGE STB_CHARGE 9 D503 TO REG_GND88REG_GND REG_GND 8 IC501 MAZT082H08SOSY-91 BOARD REG_GND77REG_GND REG_GND 7 (10/10) FLASH DRIVE00CN704 REG_GND66REG_GND REG_GND 6 R5.0/P0 (PAGE REG_GND55REG_GND REG_GND 5 4-26 XSTB_FULL44XSTB_FULL XSTB_FULL 4 of

LEVEL3) XSTB_PWRSAVE33XSTB_PWRSAVE XSTB_PWRSAVE 3F M_5V22M_5V M_5V 2

STRB_ON11STRB_ON STRB_ON 1 Note : Note : The components identified by Les composants identifiés par mark 0 or dotted line with mark une marque 0 sont critiques 0 are critical for safety. pour la sécurité. Replace only with part number Ne les remplacer que par une specified. pièce portant le numéro spécifié.

Schematic diagram of the SY-91 board are not shown. Pages from 4-7 to 4-26 are not shown.

4-27 4-28 ST-82/FP-643 Q503 CPH3209-SONY-TL-E TRANS DRIVE3214518273645,

DSC-P52 COVER 4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS JK BLOCK FLEXIBLE BOARD

12345678

JK BLOCK(JK-256) JACK A XX MARK:NO MOUNT

39P 10P MS_VSS 1 10 MS_VSS MS_VCC29MS_VCC MS_VCC38MS_SCLK MS_SCLK47N.C. XMS_IN56XMS_IN MEMORY

STICK

MS-DIO65N.C. CONNECTOR MEMORY STICK

B N.C. 7 4 MS_DIO

N.C. 8 3 N.C. MS_BS92MS_BS MS_VSS 10 1 MS_VSS MS_VSS 11 AV_GND 12 CL101 AU_OUT 13 AV_GND 14 CL102 J102

C AV_JACK_IN 15 A/V OUT(MONO)

AV_GND 16 CL103 V_OUT 17 AV_GND 18

TO

SY-91 BOARD USB_JACK_IN 19 CN101 5P (10/10) USB_GND 20 CL104 1 VCC CN701 SIGNAL PATH USB_DATA- 21 2 D- (PAGE 4-26 VIDEO SIGNALUSB_DATA+ 22 3 D+

D of LEVEL3) AUDIOUSB_GND 23 4 ID (USB) CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA SIGNAL

ACV_UNREG1 24 5 GND

REC

ACV_UNREG1 25 ACV_UNREG1 26 PB ACV_UNREG1 27 ACV_UNREG1 28 ACV_UNREG1 29 J101 BATT/XEXT 30 DC IN

E ACV_GND 31

ACV_GND 32 ACV_GND 33 ACV_GND 34 SOL001 ACV_GND 35 ACV_GND 36 ACV_GND 37 LND150 STATIC_GND 38 STATIC_GND

F STATIC_GND 39 JK BLOCK (JK-256) 4-29 4-30

,

DSC-P52 COVER 4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS 4-3. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS

• CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (SW-392) is replaced as a block. So that this PRINTED WIRING BOARD is omitted. 12345678910

A CONTROL SWITCH BLOCD

39P (SW-392) REG_GND 1 SP- 2

LCD,CONTROL SW(SW BLOCK) SP901SP+ 3 SPEAKER CN102 24P PANEL UNIT XX MARK:NO MOUNT REG_GND41VGH

LI_3V52VSS BT100 REG_GND 6 LITHIUM BATTERY (SECONDARY) 3 VGL VGH74VDD VSS85N.C.

B VGL96GRES

VDD 10 7 GPCK GRES 11 8 GSAT GPCK 12 9 STBYB GSRT 13 10 RESET LCD901

COLOR

STBYB 14 11 VCOM LCD R106 RESET 15 220k 12 VBC

MONITOR

VCOM 16 13 STBYB

C SRT 17 14 SRT

OE 18 15 OE CLR 19 16 CLR TO MCLK 20 17 MCLK SY-91 BOARD(5/10) CN702 HCNT 21 18 HCNT (PAGE 4-16 VR 22 19 VR of LEVEL3) VG 23 20 VG VB 24 21 VB

D VSS 25 22 VSS

VSH 26 23 VDD REG_GND 27 24 VSH BL_THH 28 CN101 6P ND901 BACK LIGHT BL_THL 29 1 BL_THH BL_H 30 2 N.C.

SIGNAL PATH BL_L 31 3 BL_THL

REG_GND 32 4 BL_H

E AUDIO KEY_AD1 33 5 N.C. SIGNAL KEY_AD0 34 6 BL_L

MODE_DIAL 35

REC

KEY_AD3 36

PB REG_GND 37 R110R107 1500 3300

XRST_IN 38 S110 S100 REG_GND 39 S103 S105 S107 /

F (UP/FLASH) (SET)

MENU (Image Size (RIGHT/ /DELETE) SPOT METER) 2121212121SET UP4343434343S101 R108 150021R109213300 R102 3300 (LEFT/

G 4 3QUICK S108REVIEW) S1044 3

(LCD status/ R104 (DOWN/ LCD ON-OFF) 1200 SELF TIMER) 2 1 R10543Note : Note : The components identified by Les composants identifiés par S102 S106

H2121mark 0 or dotted line with mark une marque 0 sont critiques D100-103

0 are critical for safety. pour la sécurité. MAZS082008SO Replace only with part number Ne les remplacer que par une4343S109 specified. pièce portant le numéro spécifié. STATIC_GND W ZOOM T RESET (INDEX) 4-31 4-32 SW-392 R101 R100 1500 1200 R103,

DSC-P52

COVER 4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS 4-3. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS • CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (RL-060) is replaced as a block. So that this PRINTED WIRING BOARD is omitted. • UA-003 UNIT is replaced as a block. So that this PRINTED WIRING BOARD is omitted. 1234561234

CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK(RL-060) UA-003 UNIT POWER/SHUTTER SWITCH AF LED,SW A XX MARK:NO MOUNT AD002 S101

(POWER) S102 (GREEN) (SENCV CLOSE) (SECV OPEN) PWR_LED 10 SENCV_CLOSE 1 EVER_3.0V 9 S002 REG_GND 2 N.C. 8 POWER SENCV_OPEN 3 REG_GND 7 MIC_GND 4 TO TO MIC901 SY-91 BOARD N.C. 6B SY-91 BOARD(10/10) MIC_IN 5 (10/10) B CN706XPWR_ON 5 CN705 MIC_GND 6S003 (PAGE 4-26 N.C. 4 (SHUTTER) (PAGE 4-26 PRELAMP_AF_ON 7 of LEVEL3) of LEVEL3)XSHTR_ON 3 PRELAMP_AF_ON 8 D001 OPR5052 N.C. 2 R002 AF_LED_4.9V 9 (Self-timer/ XAE_LOCK_SW10AF_LED_4.9V 10 AF illuminator) CN001 D004 D005 D003 10P

C STATIC_GND C SIGNAL PATH AUDIO

16 SIGNAL

REC PB

RL-060/UA-003 4-33 4-34, DSC-P52

COVER

4-3. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS Link ST-82 BOARD JK BLOCK (JK-256) COMMON NOTE FOR PRINTED WIRING BOARDS MOUNTED PARTS LOCATION CIRCUIT BOARDS LOCATION FLEXIBLE BOARDS LOCATION,

DSC-P52

COVER 4-3. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS THIS NOTE IS COMMON FOR WIRING BOARDS (In addition to this, the necessary note is printed in each block) (For printed wiring boards) • : Uses unleaded solder. • Chip parts. • : Pattern from the side which enables seeing. Transistor Diode (The other layers’ patterns are not indicated) C6544565445333123• Through hole is omitted. • Circled numbers refer to waveforms. BE123321123321212121654• There are a few cases that the part printed on diagram isn’t mounted in this model. 12213412344334• C: panel designation5433452143211221BOARD INFORMATION parts location waveform pattern board name CSP IC (shown on page) (shown on page) number of layers layers not shown ST-82 4-47 – 4 2 to 3 – JK BLOCK – – 1 – – SY-91 4-48 4-4582to 7 IC151, 401, 501, 001, 301, 901 4-35,

DSC-P52

COVER 4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS 4-3. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS MOUNTED PARTS LOCATION 4-3. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS ST-82 (FLASH DRIVE) PRINTED WIRING BOARD • : Uses unleaded solder. • Refer to page 4-35 for common note for printed wiring board.

ST-82 BOARD(SIDE A)

8 5

A Q506

1 4 L501 LND503 1-687-747- 11 161234

ST-82 BOARD(SIDE B)

LND501 LND5023412 CN501115C511 C50732R502 Q505

A

1 R511 R503 3 C5064511 R509 1-687-747- 11432116

Printed wiring board of the SY-91 board are not shown. Pages from 4-39 to 4-42 are not shown.

4-37 4-38 ST-82 T501 R512 C505 R508 C509 C510 Q503 C504 C503 R504 D501 R506 Q504 C512 R505 R507 Q502 R501 Q501 R510 IC501 D502

D

S G,

DSC-P52

COVER 4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS 4-3. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS JK BLOCK (JK-256) (JACK) FLEXIBLE BOARD

JK BLOCK (JK-256)

J101 DC IN 7 CN101 (USB) J102 A/V OUT (MONO) Waveforms of the SY-91 board are not shown. Pages from 4-45 to 4-46 are not shown. 1-477-857- 11 JK BLOCK (JK-256) 4-43 4-44,

DSC-P52

COVER 4-3. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS 4-5. MOUNTED PARTS LOCATION no mark : side A * mark : side B ST-82 BOARD * C503 A-3 * C504 A-3 * C505 A-4 * C506 A-2 Mounted parts location of the SY-91 board * C507 A-1 C509 A-1 is not shown. * C510 A-3 * C511 A-4 Page 4-48 is not shown. * C512 A-3 * CN501 A-2 * D502 A-1 * IC501 A-1 L501 A-1 * Q502 A-3 * Q503 A-3 * Q504 A-3 * Q505 A-2 Q506 A-1 * R501 A-2 * R502 A-3 * R503 A-3 * R504 A-3 * R505 A-3 * R506 A-3 * R508 A-4 * R509 A-2 * R510 A-1 * R511 A-1 R512 A-1 * T501 A-4 4-47E ST-82,

DSC-P52

COVER NOTE 5. REPAIR PARTS LIST NOTE: Characters A to Z of the electrical parts list indicate location of exploded views in which the desired part is shown.

Link EXPLODED VIEWS

A B CABINET (FRONT) SECTION CABINET (REAR) BLOCKSECTION MAIN BLOCK SECTION-1 MAIN BLOCK SECTION-2

Link ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST ACCESSORIES

SY-91 BOARD A ST-82 BOARD B,

DSC-P52 COVER 5. REPAIR PARTS LIST

NOTE: • -XX, -X mean standardized parts, so they may have some differences from When indicating parts by reference number, the original one. please include the board name. • Items marked “*” are not stocked since they are seldom required for routine service. Some delay should be anticipated when ordering these items. The components identified by mark 0 or • The mechanical parts with no reference number in the exploded views are not dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. supplied. Replace only with part number specified. • Due to standardization, replacements in the parts list may be different from Les composants identifiés par une marque the parts specified in the diagrams or the components used on the set. 0 sont critiques pour la sécurité. • CAPACITORS: Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant µ le numéro spécifié.uF: F • COILS uH: µH • RESISTORS All resistors are in ohms. METAL: metal-film resistor METAL OXIDE: Metal Oxide-film resistor F: nonflammable • SEMICONDUCTORS In each case, u: µ, for example: uA...: µA... , uPA... , µPA... , uPB... , µPB... , uPC... , µPC... , uPD..., µPD... • Abbreviation CND : Canadian model AUS : Australian model JE : Tourist model CH : Chinese model KR : Korea model HK : Hong Kong model BR : Brazilian model 5-1,

DSC-P52

COVER 5. REPAIR PARTS LIST 5-1. EXPLODED VIEWS 5-1-1. CABINET (FRONT) SECTION ns : not supplied 1 Cabinet (rear) block assembly (See page 5-4) Main block assembly (See page 5-5,5-6)

B A A

B56751ns Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks 1 3-968-729-71 SCREW (M2), LOCK ACE, P2 5 3-080-204-21 SCREW, TAPPING, P2 2 3-082-151-01 OVF, WINDOW 6 1-763-818-31 DC MOTOR 8C-028G 3 3-080-977-01 TRIPOD 7 1-477-908-11 UNIT PARTS (UA-003) 4 X-3953-322-1 CABINET (FRONT) ASSY 5-3,

DSC-P52

COVER 5. REPAIR PARTS LIST 5-1-2. CABINET (REAR) BLOCK SECTION ns : not supplied ns

B

52 55 LCD901 BT100 ND901

A A B

: For the installation position of BT100 (Lithium battery), refer to page 2-3 CAUTION : Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type. Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks 51 3-078-890-11 SCREW, TAPPING 55 3-083-057-01 CUSHION (ISB), ELECTROSTATIC 52 1-477-906-11 CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (SW-392) 0ND901 1-477-761-11 BLOCK LIGHT GUIDE PLATE (1.5) 53 X-3953-323-1 CABINET (REAR) ASSY LCD901 1-805-168-21 INDICATOR MODULE LIQUID CRYST 54 3-080-985-01 COVER, JACK Note : Note : The components identified by Les composants identifiés par mark 0 or dotted line with mark une marque 0 sont critiques 0 are critical for safety. pour la sécurité. Replace only with part number Ne les remplacer que par une 5-4 specified. pièce portant le numéro spécifié.,

DSC-P52

COVER 5. REPAIR PARTS LIST 5-1-3. MAIN BLOCK SECTION-1 ns

B A

B 111 104 103 103 107 IC351 Main block assembly (See page 5-6)

A

101 103 Be sure to read “Precautions upon replacing CCD imager” on page 4-8 when changing the CCD imager. Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks 101 1-758-754-11 LENS, VIDEO (B147A) 108 A-7078-675-A ST-82 (SL) BOARD, COMPLETE 102 3-082-165-01 FRAME (R), LENS 109 1-687-751-11 FP-643 FLEXIBLE BOARD 103 3-078-890-11 SCREW, TAPPING 110 1-477-907-11 CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (RL-060) 104 1-758-923-11 FINDER, OPTICAL (B148B) 111 3-080-204-21 SCREW, TAPPING, P2 105 1-688-214-11 FP-689 FLEXIBLE BOARD 0112 1-477-895-11 FLASH UNIT 106 1-758-916-11 FILTER BLOCK, OPTICAL IC351 A-7016-308-A CCD BLOCK ASSY (CCD IMAGER) 107 3-075-085-01 RUBBER (DQ), SEAL Note : Note : The components identified by Les composants identifiés par mark 0 or dotted line with mark une marque 0 sont critiques 0 are critical for safety. pour la sécurité. Replace only with part number Ne les remplacer que par une 5-5 specified. pièce portant le numéro spécifié.,

DSC-P52

COVER 5. REPAIR PARTS LIST 5-1-4. MAIN BLOCK SECTION-2 ns : not supplied ns 156 ns 153 154 ns ns ns 157 J101 CN101 ns J102 BT901 Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks 151 3-078-890-11 SCREW, TAPPING 157 3-078-889-11 SCREW (M1.7) 152 1-815-853-21 MEMORY STICK CONNECTOR BT901 1-756-358-11 BATTERY HOLDER (WITH TERMINAL) 153 3-080-204-21 SCREW, TAPPING, P2 CN101 1-794-962-11 CONNECTOR, SQUARE TYPE(USB 5P) 154 1-477-857-11 JK BLOCK (JK-256) J101 1-817-331-11 DC JACK 5P (DC IN) 155 3-082-162-01 FRAME, LENS J102 1-569-950-31 JACK (SMALL TYPE) (A/V OUT (MONO)) 156 A-7078-686-A SY-91 BOARD, COMPLETE (SERVICE) 5-6,

DSC-P52 SY-91 ST-82

5-2. ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST Ref. No. Part No. Description Ref. No. Part No. Description A-7078-686-A SY-91 BOARD, COMPLETE R506 1-218-958-11 RES-CHIP 2.7K 5% 1/16W ********************* R507 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R508 1-218-940-11 RES-CHIP 82 5% 1/16W

Electrical parts list of the SY-91 board are R509 1-218-961-11 RES-CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W

R510 1-216-805-11 METAL CHIP 47 5% 1/16W not shown.

Pages from 5-7 to 5-13 are not shown. R511 1-216-857-11 METAL CHIP 1M 5% 1/16W

0R512 1-216-121-11 RES-CHIP 1M 5% 1/10W < TRANSFORMER > ************************************************************ 0T501 1-437-737-11 TRANSFORMER, DC-DC CONVERTER A-7078-675-A ST-82 (SL) BOARD, COMPLETE ************************************************************ ************************* 0 1-477-895-11 FLASH UNIT < CAPACITOR > C503 1-137-710-11 CERAMIC CHIP 10uF 20% 6.3V C504 1-137-710-11 CERAMIC CHIP 10uF 20% 6.3V C505 1-127-715-91 CERAMIC CHIP 0.22uF 10% 16V C506 1-125-837-91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 6.3V C507 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C508 1-100-542-11 ELECT 135uF 99% 315V 0C509 1-137-723-21 CERAMIC CHIP 0.047uF 10% 250V C510 1-137-710-11 CERAMIC CHIP 10uF 20% 6.3V C511 1-137-710-11 CERAMIC CHIP 10uF 20% 6.3V C512 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V < CONNECTOR > CN501 1-816-644-11 FFC/FPC CONNECTOR (LIF) 12P < DIODE > D501 8-719-073-01 DIODE MA111-(K8).S0 0D502 6-500-237-01 DIODE HAU160C030TP D503 8-719-075-15 DIODE MAZT082H08S0 < IC > IC501 6-703-635-01 IC TND721MH5-S-TL-E < COIL > 0L501 1-456-193-11 COIL, TRIGGER < TRANSISTOR > Q501 6-550-119-01 TRANSISTOR DTC144EMT2L Q502 6-550-528-01 TRANSISTOR UPA650TT-E1-A Q503 6-550-183-01 TRANSISTOR CPH3209-SONY-TL-E Q504 8-729-056-01 TRANSISTOR MCH3405-TL-E Q505 8-729-053-57 TRANSISTOR RN1902FE(TPLR3) 0Q506 8-729-053-74 TRANSISTOR CY25AAJ-8-T13 < RESISTOR > R501 1-218-961-11 RES-CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W R502 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R503 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R504 1-218-957-11 RES-CHIP 2.2K 5% 1/16W R505 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W Note : Note : The components identified by Les composants identifiés par mark 0 or dotted line with mark une marque 0 sont critiques 0 are critical for safety. pour la sécurité. Replace only with part number Ne les remplacer que par une 5-14 specified. pièce portant le numéro spécifié.,

DSC-P52

Checking supplied accessories. Make sure that the following accessories are supplied with your camcorder. Power cord (1)(AUS model) Battery charger (BC-CS2)(1) Connection cord Hand strap (1) 0 1-696-819-21 (US,CND,JE model) (AV Cable 1.5m)(1) 3-070-841-01 Power cord (1)(AEP,E model) 0 1-477-814-11 1-824-111-11 0 1-769-608-11 Battery charger (BC-CS2)(1) Power cord (1)(CH model) (AEP,UK,E,HK,AUS,BR model) 0 1-782-476-13 0 1-477-814-21 Power cord (1)(KR model) Battery charger (BC-CS2)(1) 0 1-776-985-11 (CH, KR model) Power cord (1)(UK,HK model) 0 1-477-814-32 0 1-783-374-11 Power cord (1)(US,CND model) 0 1-790-107-22 Power cord (1)(JE model) Battery carrying case (1) Cord with connector (1) 0 1-790-732-12 3-074-757-01 (USB 5P) 1-827-038-11 Memory stick (1) (MSA-16A) (not supplied) CD-ROM (USB DRIVER) (1) 2P conversion adaptor (1) 2P conversion adaptor (1) (SPVD-010) (JE model) (E model) (AEP,UK,E,HK,AUS, 1-569-007-12 1-569-008-12HR6 (size AA) Ni-MH CH,JE,KR,BR model) batteries 3-078-942-03 (not supplied) CD-ROM (USB DRIVER) (1) • Abbreviation (SPVD-010 (I)) (US,CND model) CND : Canadian model JE : Tourist model 3-078-943-03 HK : Hong Kong model KR : Korea model AUS : Australian model BR : Brazilian model CH : Chinese model

Other accessories

3-082-146-11 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ENGLISH) (US,CND,AEP,UK,E,HK,AUS,CH,JE) 3-082-146-21 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (FRENCH/GERMAN) (CND,AEP,JE) 3-082-146-31 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (SPANISH/PORTUGUESE) (AEP,E,JE) 3-082-146-41 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ITALIAN/DUTCH) (AEP) Note : Note : 3-082-146-51 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (CHINESE) (E,HK,CH,JE) The components identified by Les composants identifiés par mark 0 or dotted line with mark une marque 0 sont critiques 3-082-146-61 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (RUSSIAN/SWEDISH) (AEP,JE) 0 are critical for safety. pour la sécurité. 3-082-146-71 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ARABIC) (E) Replace only with part number Ne les remplacer que par une 3-082-146-81 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (KOREAN) (KR,JE) specified. pièce portant le numéro spécifié. 5-15E,

DSC-P52

9-876-248-31 Sony EMCS Co. 2003C1600-1 ©2003.3 — 60 — Published by DI Customer Center,

Reverse 987624831.pdf Revision History

Ver. Date History Contents S.M. Rev. issued 1.0 2003.03 Official Release — —,

DSC-P52 SERVICE MANUAL LEVEL 3 US Model Ver 1.0 2003. 03 Canadian Model

Revision History AEP Model

UK Model E Model Australian Model Hong Kong Model Korea Model Chinese Model Tourist Model Brazilian Model Link

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS PRINTED WIRING BOARDS REPAIR PARTS LIST • For INSTRUCTION MANUAL, refer to SERVICE MANUAL, LEVEL 1 (987624841.pdf). • Reference No. search on printed wiring boards is available. The information that is not described in this Service Manual is described in the LEVEL 2 Service Manual. When repairing, use this manual together with LEVEL 2 Service Manual. Contents of LEVEL 2 Service Manual 1. SERVICE NOTE 2. DISASSEMBLY

OVERALL

3. BLOCK DIAGRAMS

POWER

ST-82, FP-643 FLEXIBLE, JK-256, 4. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (SW- SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS 392), RL-060, UA-003 EXPLODED VIEWS 5. REPAIR PARTS LIST ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST 6. ADJUSTMENTS

DIGITAL STILL CAMERA

,

DSC-P52 COVER

CAUTION : Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type. SAFETY-RELATED COMPONENT WARNING!! ATTENTION AU COMPOSANT AYANT RAPPORT À LA SÉCURITÉ! COMPONENTS IDENTIFIED BY MARK 0 OR DOTTED LINE WITH LES COMPOSANTS IDENTIFÉS PAR UNE MARQUE 0 SUR LES MARK 0 ON THE SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS AND IN THE PARTS DIAGRAMMES SCHÉMATIQUES ET LA LISTE DES PIÈCES SONT LIST ARE CRITICAL TO SAFE OPERATION. REPLACE THESE CRITIQUES POUR LA SÉCURITÉ DE FONCTIONNEMENT. NE COMPONENTS WITH SONY PARTS WHOSE PART NUMBERS REMPLACER CES COMPOSANTS QUE PAR DES PIÈSES SONY APPEAR AS SHOWN IN THIS MANUAL OR IN SUPPLEMENTS DONT LES NUMÉROS SONT DONNÉS DANS CE MANUEL OU PUBLISHED BY SONY. DANS LES SUPPÉMENTS PUBLIÉS PAR SONY.

SAFETY CHECK-OUT

After correcting the original service problem, perform the following safety checks before releasing the set to the customer. 1. Check the area of your repair for unsoldered or poorly-soldered Unleaded solder connections. Check the entire board surface for solder splashes Boards requiring use of unleaded solder are printed with the lead- and bridges. free mark (LF) indicating the solder contains no lead. 2. Check the interboard wiring to ensure that no wires are (Caution: Some printed circuit boards may not come printed with the lead free mark due to their particular size.) "pinched" or contact high-wattage resistors. 3. Look for unauthorized replacement parts, particularly transistors, that were installed during a previous repair. Point : LEAD FREE MARK them out to the customer and recommend their replacement. Unleaded solder has the following characteristics. 4. Look for parts which, through functioning, show obvious signs • Unleaded solder melts at a temperature about 40°C higher than of deterioration. Point them out to the customer and ordinary solder. recommend their replacement. Ordinary soldering irons can be used but the iron tip has to be applied to the solder joint for a slightly longer time. 5. Check the B+ voltage to see it is at the values specified. Soldering irons using a temperature regulator should be set to 6. Flexible Circuit Board Repairing about 350°C. • Keep the temperature of the soldering iron around 270˚C Caution: The printed pattern (copper foil) may peel away if the during repairing. heated tip is applied for too long, so be careful! • Do not touch the soldering iron on the same conductor of the • Strong viscosity circuit board (within 3 times). Unleaded solder is more viscous (sticky, less prone to flow) than • Be careful not to apply force on the conductor when soldering ordinary solder so use caution not to let solder bridges occur such or unsoldering. as on IC pins, etc. • Usable with ordinary solder It is best to use only unleaded solder but unleaded solder may also be added to ordinary solder. — 2 —,

DSC-P52

TABLE OF CONTENTS 4. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS 4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS • SY-91 (1/10)(CCD IMAGER, CAMERA A/D CONV.) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ······························ 4-7 • SY-91 (2/10)(LENS DRIVE) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ······························ 4-9 • SY-91 (3/10)(CAMERA DSP, VIDEO AMP) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-11 • SY-91 (4/10)(SH DSP, CLK GEN) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-13 • SY-91 (5/10)(LCD DRIVE, TIMING GENERATOR) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-15 • SY-91 (6/10)(FRONT CONTROL) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-17 • SY-91 (7/10)(AUDIO I/O) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-19 • SY-91 (8/10)(DC IN) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-21 • SY-91 (9/10)(DC-DC CONVERTER) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-23 • SY-91 (10/10)(CONNECTOR) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-25 4-3. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS • SY-91 (CCD IMAGER CAMERA A/D CONV., LENS DRIVE, CAMERA DSP, VIDEO AMP, SH DSP, CLK GEN, LCD DRIVE TIMING GENERATOR, FRONT CONTROL, AUDIO I/O, DC IN, DC-DC CONVERTER, CONNECTOR) PRINTED WIRING BOARD ······················· 4-39 4-4. WAVEFORMS ······························································ 4-45 4-5. MOUNTED PARTS LOCATION ································· 4-48 5. REPAIR PARTS LIST 5-2. ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST ·········································· 5-7 — 3 —, DSC-P52

COVER

4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

Link

SY-91 BOARD (1/10) (CCD IMAGER, CAMERA A/D CONV.) SY-91 BOARD (6/10) (FRONT CONTROL) SY-91 BOARD (2/10) (LENS DRIVE) SY-91 BOARD (7/10) (AUDIO I/O) SY-91 BOARD (3/10) (CAMERA DSP, VIDEO AMP) SY-91 BOARD (8/10) (DC IN) SY-91 BOARD (4/10) (SH DSP, CLK GEN) SY-91 BOARD (9/10) (DC-DC CONVERTER) SY-91 BOARD (5/10) (LCD DRIVE, TIMING GENERATOR) SY-91 BOARD (10/10) (CONNECTOR) COMMON NOTE FOR SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS WAVEFORMS,

DSC-P92

COVER 4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS THIS NOTE IS COMMON FOR SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS (In addition to this, the necessary note is printed in each block) (For schematic diagrams) 1. Connection • All capacitors are in µF unless otherwise noted. pF : µ

LµiFn. 5k0 V or less are not indicated except for electrolytics Pattern box

and tantalums. • Chip resistors are 1/10 W unless otherwise noted. kΩ=1000 Ω, MΩ=1000 kΩ. • Caution when replacing chip parts. New parts must be attached after removal of chip. Be careful not to heat the minus side of tantalum About 36cm capacitor, Because it is damaged by the heat. • Some chip part will be indicated as follows. Example C541 L452 22U 10UH TA A 2520 Kinds of capacitor Front of the lens Temperature characteristics External dimensions (mm) • Constants of resistors, capacitors, ICs and etc with XX indicate that they are not used. In such cases, the unused circuits may be indicated. 2. Adjust the distance so that the output waveform of • Parts with * differ according to the model/destination. Fig. a and the Fig. b can be obtain. Refer to the mount table for each function. H • All variable and adjustable resistors have characteristic curve B, unless otherwise noted. • Signal name XEDIT → EDIT PB/XREC → PB/REC • 2: non flammable resistor • 5: fusible resistor • C: panel designation • A: B+ Line • B: B– LineABA=BBA• J : IN/OUT direction of (+,–) B LINE. Fig. a (Video output terminal output waveform) • C: adjustment for repair. • A: VIDEO SIGNAL (ANALOG) • A: AUDIO SIGNAL (ANALOG) • A: VIDEO/AUDIO SIGNAL • A: VIDEO/AUDIO/SERVO SIGNAL • A: SERVO SIGNAL • Circled numbers refer to waveforms. (Measuring conditions voltage and waveform) • Voltages and waveforms are measured between the Fig.b (Picture on monitor TV) measurement points and ground when camera shoots color bar chart of pattern box. They are reference values and reference waveforms. When indicating parts by reference number, please (VOM of DC 10 MΩ input impedance is used) include the board name. • Voltage values change depending upon input impedance of VOM used.) Note : Note : The components identified by Les composants identifiés par mark 0 or dotted line with mark une marque 0 sont critiques 0 are critical for safety. pour la sécurité. Replace only with part number Ne les remplacer que par une specified. pièce portant le numéro spécifié. 4-5 Yellow Cyan Green White Magenta Red Blue,

DSC-P52 COVER 4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS SY-91 BOARD SIDE A SY-91 BOARD SIDE B

4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS For Schematic Diagram • Refer to page 4-39 for printed wiring board. 12345678910 11 12

SY-91 BOARD(1/10) :Voltage measurement of the CSP IC NO MARK:REC/PB MODE CCD IMAGER,CAMERA A/D CONV.(CCD,CH BLOCK) and the Transistors with mark,is R :REC MODE A not possible. P :PB MODEXX MARK:NO MOUNT XCAM_SCK 1 (4/10)

XCAM_SCK CAM_SO 1 (2/10) CAM_SO CA_AD00 1 (5/10) CA_AD00 R906 R907 CA_AD0100CA_AD01 CA_AD02 C903 C904 CA_AD02 0.1u XX CA_AD03 B CA_AD03 CA_AD04

B R905

CA_AD04 150 CA_AD05 CA_AD05 C905 CA_AD06 XX CA_AD06 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10987654321CA_AD07 CA_AD07 CA_AD08 CA_AD08 CA_AD09 CA_AD09 CA_AD10 CA_AD10 2 (3/10) CA_AD11 V3A CA_AD11V3A GND CA_AD12 V3B CA_AD12C V3B GND CA_AD13 CA_AD13 NC GND TG_WEN TG_WEN NC GND CA_HD CA_HD NC GND CA_FD VSHT CA_FDVSHT GND MCK12 CA_AD00 MCK12D0 CA_AD01 IC901 GND CLPOB CLPOBD1 GND CLPDM CA_AD02 CLPDMD2 CAMERA A/D CONV. GND VSUB_CONT VSUB_CONT

D CA_AD03 D3 IC901 GNDCA_AD04 D4 GND XCAM_RESET XCAM_RESET

CA_AD05 CSP(CHIP SIZE PACKAGE)ICD5 GND XTG_CS XTG_CS CA_AD06 (CH-122(3M) BOARD)D6 GND XFE_CS XFE_CS 3 (4/10) CA_AD07 D7 GND TG_CLKTH351 TG_CLK CA_AD08 D8 GND CCD_TEMP CA_AD09 C909D9 GND 33u FB903 L903 6.3V 0uH CA_AD10 10uHD10 HVDD TA B D_3.1V

E CA_AD11 D11 DRV3VCA_AD12 0uHD12 FB904FE3V

L902 10uH C908 47u 6.3V Q905 TA RN2907FE(TPLR3) B SWITCH 15.0 CAM_15V 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 C901 R3.3 C902 3.3u41P14.9 0.1u 4 (9/10)

F 35V

B R910 TA B R2.4 82k FB902 L901 5 P14.9 Q906 0uH 10uH R3.3 2 RN1907FE(TPLR3)P14.9 SWITCH R15.036R3.2 P0 P-7.6 R-7.4/P036R0/P14.7 5 C907 FB905 R2.9/P047u 0uH 5 6.3V 2

TA

B 4 -7.4 1 L351 22uH CAM_-7.5V

G CCD_OUT REG_GND

R10.7 R358 C361 C352 2 10p 3.3u FB906P0 3300 CH 35V 0uH Q352 R11.4P0 B 2SC4250(T5LSONY1) TA R912 XX

BUFFER

R14.9 C359 C912 FB910 P0 0.1u R11.4 22u C921 XX P0 C360 R908 16V XX R911 5 (4/10) GND VOUT R14.9 XX 100k TA 0 V1 P0 B CAM_DD_ON V1 3 VDDR-0.5/P0 R14.0 C358V2 P0 0.1u R357 C357 V2 RG 5 (10/10)H V3A R-0.5/P0 0 0.1uV3A GND V3B R-0.5/P0 * R10.6 R356P-0.1 C356 V3B IC351 1MSUB R-0.5/P0 ICX432FQF-13 R10.5 2200p V4 P0 R3550B

IC351 Precautions Upon Replaching CCD imagerV4 CSUBV5A R-0.5/P0 R-7.4P0 C354 0.1u 10.5 R354

V5A VL R2.1 3900 • The SY-91 board mounted as a repair part is not equipped CCD IMAGER V5B R-6.1/P0 P0 V5B 1 H1 R1.2 4 Q351R-6.1/P0 UN9213J-(K8).SO with a CCD imager.V6 P0 C353 V6 H2 C355 22u SWITCH VSUB_CONT R-6.1/P0 0.22u 16V When replaching this board, remove the CCD imager from the 25V B TA 0 H2 B old one and mount it onto the new one. H1 FB351 SIGNAL PATH • If the CCD imager has been replaced, carry out all the

I 0uHRG * Pin number and index mark VIDEO SIGNAL adjustments for the camera section.of IC351 are shown as

VSHT viewed from the bottom. C351 • As the CCD imager may be damaged by static electrictiy from 0.22u R351 CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA B 25V 100k its structure, handle it carefully like for the MOS IC. 16 D351 REC In addition, ensure that the receiver is not covered with dusts MA2S111-(K8).SO

PB nor exposed to strog light.

4-7 4-8 SY-91 (1/10) 12345678937 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 CA_AD13 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 D13 V1 V1 XFE_CS XFE_CS V6V6 XTG_CS XFE_CS V5BV5B CAM_SO XCAM_SO V5AV5A XCAM_SCK XCAM_SCK V4V4 CLPOB R902 220 CLPOB NC CLPDM R901 220 CLPDM NC XCAM_RESET R903 1k XCAM_RESET NC CA_HD R904 220 V2 CA_HR V2 CA_FD R909 220 CA_VR NC TG_CLK TG_CLK NC MCK12 MCK12 NC CCD_OUT TG3V/HVDD CCD_OUT

RG

CAM_-7.5V RG FB901 0uH VM NC H2 CAM_15V H2 H1 TG3V H1 TG_WEN WEN NC 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74,

DSC-P52 COVER 4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS SY-91 BOARD SIDE A SY-91 BOARD SIDE B For Schematic Diagram

• Refer to page 4-39 for printed wiring board. 12345678910 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 R236

SY-91 BOARD(2/10) 2200 A LENS DRIVE(LD BLOCK) CN201 21P XX MARK:NO MOUNT DRIVE- 1

SHUTTER+ R230 DRIVE+ 2 R2311k 16k C228 ±0.5% ±0.5% 0.1u

NO MARK:REC/PB MODE HALL- 3 B R :REC MODE BIAS+ 4 P :PB MODE IC204BIAS- 5 C220

0.01u D/A CONV. HALL+ 6 B XZM_RST_SENS 7 PRELAMP_AF_ON (10/10)

B 9IC201 IC204 BH2223FV-E2XFC_RST_SENS 8 R0.1 FP-689 R229 670215501ZM_SENS_VCC 9 IRIS DRIVE R233 A02 GND180k 100k 0 R0.6P1.8 FLEXIBLE FC_SENS_VCC 10 A03 A01

LENS C211 0 BLOCK REG_GND 11 R213 0.033u R232 A04 DI CAM_SO 100k B 22k 0.9 2.9 CLK 1 (1/10) 1 (4/10) 1 (5/10)REG_GND 12 C216 A05 XCAM_SCK 0.022u R234 1.0 0 TEMP_OUT 13 B 100k A06 LD FOCUS_B C210 R223 1.7 FOCUS_B 14 3300p 180k A07 NCC217 R1.2 ZOOM_B B 0.022u A010 P2.3ZOOM_B 15 C215 A08 SP_VOL 8 (7/10)C FOCUS_AFOCUS_A 16 0.001u 3.2B A09 VCC ZOOM_A C226 C227 L206 OVF ZOOM_A 17876514 13 12 11 10980.1u 10u 10uH FOCUS_B B 6.3VFOCUS_B 18 TA P ZOOM_B

LENS BLOCK is replaced as a block. ZOOM_B 19 FOCUS_A So that there PRINTED WIRING BOARD and FOCUS_A 20 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM are omitted. ZOOM_A IC203ZOOM_A 21

HALL AMP

D

1234Q2041234567Q202 2SD2216J-QR(K8).SO 2SD2216J-QR(K8).SO IRIS BIAS IRIS DRIVE C219 0.6 L205R211 0.01u0.6 10uHB 0.7 100k D_3.1V C208 0.7 R209 C209 0.1u R214 D_2.9V 100 1u B 47k 0.1 6.3V R228 M_5V

E R208 B R212 C2130.1u 0.1 12k C224 C225 6 (9/10)SHUTTER- 10 C204 10k B R220 R225 R227 C223 0.1u 10u0.22u 330 1u B 6.3VD205 R210 22k 1200 TA P

1SS401(TE85L) 10V B B4700 C218 REG_GND

XX F HALL_AD

DAC_STB CN203 8P OVF_A LENS_TEMP OVF_A 8 XZM_RST_SENS1 OVF_B OVF_B 7 XFC_RST_SENS OVF_A OVF_A 6 XOVF_RST_SENS OVF_B OVF_B 5 XLENS_RST_LED 10 (4/10) NC 4 Q205 R217 R216 R207 UN9116J-(K8).SO 56k 56k 56k OVF_SENS_GND 3 SWITCH

G XCAM_DR_PSOVF_SENS_VCC 2

R-0.8 2.9 LENSV_OPEN_ON OVF_SENS_RST 1 P-0.5 L203 4.7uH LENSV_CLOSE_ON 2.9 XZM_RST_SENS1 XZM_RST_SENS1 XFC_RST_SENS

H XFC_RST_SENSXOVF_RST_SENS XOVF_RST_SENS IC205 XLENS_RST_LEDC202 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 XLENS_RST_LED

33u C207 LENS OPEN/CLOSE 10V 0.1u CONTROL TABBR2.4 R0.8 * IC205 LB1938T-TLM-E P5.0 CP1 P2.9 R7.4 IN1 HR_DIR2A P4.6 0 5.0 CP2 EN1 R2.7 HR_EN2CN202 2P VCCR0.7 PGND CP3 P2.9P0.3 0 C205 C206 IN2 HR_DIR2B DC MOTOR LENS_BARIA_CLOSE 2 IN1 R9.9

I R0.7

OUT1 0.01u 0.1u P4.6 0CP4 8C-028G P0.3 0 EN2LENS_BARIA_OPEN 1 OUT2 IN2BBR9.9 IC202 R2.5P4.6 (3/10)VG P2.9 7IN3 HR_DIR0A NC SGND DGND FOCUS/ZOOM DRIVE R1.3 EN3 R2.5 HR_EN0 P0.3 VLIM IC202 P2.9 R1.3 BD6752KV-E2 IN4 HR_DIR0B P0.3 0VREF R2.9 EN4 R0.4 * Pin number and index mark P0 PS P2.9of IC205 are shown as IN5 HR_DIR1A viewed from the bottom. 2.9 0VCC EN5 R2.5 HR_EN1 L202 BR6 P2.910uH IN6 HR_DIR1B

J BR5 EN6 MSHUT_ON

C203 0.1u MSHUT_EN

B

37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48

K SY-91 (2/10) 4-9 4-10

5678D204 MA111-(K8).S04321IC201 NJM2904V(TE2) R0.9 P0 3.2 OUT VCC 0.9 IN(-) OUT 0.9 0.9 IN(+) IN(-) 0.9 GND IN(+) 0.9 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 ZOOM_A 0.4 0.5 FOCUS_B OUT5A OUT4B ZOOM_A 0.4 0.5 OUT5B OUT4A FOCUS_B 5.0 5.0 VM3 VM2 0.5 PGND2 OUT3B FOCUS_A ZOOM_B 0.4 0.5 OUT6A OUT3A FOCUS_A ZOOM_B 0.4 OUT6B PGND1 R5.0 IC203 NJM12902V(TE2) SHUTTER+ P0.4 0.5OUT7A OUT2B OVF_B 0.7 R0.5P1.5 0.5 RNF OUT2A OVF_B OUT OUT 0.1 0.9 R224 180k 5.0 5.0 IN(-) VM1 IN(-)VM4 R0 0.1 0.9 R226 2700 SHUTTER- P0.5 0.4 IN(+) IN(+)OUT7B OUT1B OVF_A R2.9 3.2 P0 0.4 VCC GNDEN7 OUT1A OVF_A 0.9 R0.6/P1.7 0 IN(+) IN7 CNF IN(+) 0.9 R0.6/P1.7 IN(-) IN(-) 1.3 R1.0/P2.0 OUT OUT R235 10k12345678910 11 1287654321910 11 12 13 14 15 16,

DSC-P52 COVER 4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS SY-91 BOARD SIDE A SY-91 BOARD SIDE B For Schematic Diagram

• Refer to page 4-39 for printed wiring board. 12345678910 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22

SY-91 BOARD(3/10) A CAMERA DSP,VIDEO AMP(HMS,VI BLOCK) XX MARK:NO MOUNT

FB303

NO MARK:REC/PB MODE :Voltage measurement of 0uH R :REC MODE the CSP IC and D_2.9V P :PB MODE the Transistors with D_1.5V

mark,is not possible. C310 C306 0.1u 0.1u C318 R313 C323 C325 C320 C321 B 10uB 10k C308 10u 6.3V 0.1u 0.1u 22u ±0.5% B 0.1u 4V 6.3VBBPPCA_HD REG_GND

B CA_HD C326 C328 C309 15 (9/10)CA_FD 0.1u 0.1u R302 0.1u FB301 FB302 C322

CA_FDBB1k B 0uH 0uH 10u TG_WEN TG_WEN 6.3VP

CLPOB

CLPOB JL307 L302 10uH

CLPDM

CLPDM A_2.9V CA_AD13 CA_AD13 CA_AD12 CA_AD12 CA_AD11 CA_AD11 304 303 302 301 300 299 298 297 296 295 294 293 292 291 290 289 288 287 286 285 284 283 282 281 280 279 278 277 276 275 274 273 272 271 270 269 268 267 266 265 264 263 262 261 260 259 258 257 256 255 254 253 252 251 250 249 248 247 246 245 244 243 242 241 240 239 238 237 236 235 234 233 232 231 230 229 CA_AD10

C CA_AD10

CA_AD09 CA_AD09 CA_AD08 2 CA_AD08(1/10) CA_AD07 CA_AD07 CA_AD06 CA_AD06 SMCK CAMVDO CA_AD05 SYS_V CA_AD05 JL309 CAMVDI NTVDO CA_AD04 CA_AD04 EXTVALID FLD CA_AD03 CA_AD03 DGND_0 HD HDO

D CA_AD02CA_AD02 PANEL_VPBLK DGND_13 PANEL_V

CA_AD01 CA_AD01 CLPOB OPBCLP EXTPAL C3130.1u CA_AD00 CA_AD00 CLPDM BDUMCLP NC MCK12 MCK12 CA_HD CCDHD VAVS4 C312 VSUB_CONT VSUB_CONT CA_FD CO 0.1uCCDFD B R305 VCC3_0 VAVD4 XX R303 HR_EN0 ADIN15 VRO2 6800 HR_EN0 CA_AD13 ±0.5% HR_DIR0A ADIN13 VREF2 HR_DIR0A CA_AD12

E HR_DIR0B ADIN12 VAVD3HR_DIR0B CA_AD09

MSHUT_ON MSHUT_ON ADIN09 YO R308 560 ±0.5% R307 C601 MSHUT_EN MSHUT_EN C301 ADIN14 VAVS3 330 1u 16 (5/10) CA_AD11 0.1u B ±0.5% B XFC_RST_SENS ADIN11 VAVS2 XFC_RST_SENS R304 XX XLENS_RST_LED VCC2_0 RO PANEL_R XLENS_RST_LED CA_AD10 7 XZM_RST_SENS1 ADIN10 VAVD2 R316(2/10) XZM_RST_SENS1 CA_AD08 R306 10k R311 18k 0 XOVF_RST_SENS ADIN08 VRO1 XOVF_RST_SENS CA_AD06 HR_DIR2A ADIN06 VREF1 R312 HR_DIR2A CA_AD07

F 27kHR_DIR2B ADIN07 VAVD0 C315HR_DIR2B CA_AD04

HR_DIR1A 0.1u BADIN04 GO PANEL_G HR_DIR1A CA_AD05 R309 HR_DIR1B ADIN05 VAVS0 560 HR_DIR1B CA_AD03 ±0.5% HR_EN2 ADIN03 VAVD1 HR_EN2 CA_AD02 HR_EN1 ADIN02 BO PANEL_B HR_EN1 CA_AD00 R310 C302 ADIN00 VAVS1 ±0.5% CA_AD01 0.1u B ADIN01 DGND_12 C314 MC_A25 MC_A25 0.1u BDGND_1 PIO00 MC_A24 MC_A24 MC_A23G A23 VCC2_6 MC_A23 MC_A23 MC_A25 R317A25 PIO05 100k MC_A22 MC_A22 MC_A22 XLENS_RST_LEDA22 PIO01 MC_A21 MC_A21 MC_A24 A24 PIO06 MC_A20 MC_A20 MC_A19 MSHUT_ENA19 PIO02 MC_A19 MC_A19 MC_A21 A21 PIO03 C316 MC_A18 MC_A18 MC_A18 0.1uA18 PIO09 B MC_A17 MC_A17 MC_A20 A20 VCC3_11 MC_A16 MC_A16 MC_A15 XFC_RST_SENSH A15 PIO10 MC_A15 MC_A15 MC_A14 A14 IC301 PIO04 MC_A14 MC_A14 MC_A17 A17 CAMERA DSP PIO12 MC_A13 MC_A13 MC_A11 A11 PIO07 MC_A12 MC_A12 MC_A16 R318A16 PIO08 100k MC_A11 MC_A11 XOVF_RST_SENSVCC3_1 IC301 PIO13 STRB_ON MC_A10 MC_A10 MC_A13 FLGA304A13 VCC2_5 VAMP_ON MC_A09 MC_A09 MC_A08 A08 CSP(CHIP SEZE PACAGE)IC PIO14 C317 (HM(3M SA)BOARD) 0.1u

I MC_A08 MC_A08 MC_A07 B

XZM_RST_SENS1 A07 PI011 MC_A07 MC_A07 MC_A12 TG_WENA12 PIO15 MC_A06 MC_A06 MC_A05 A05 DGND_11 MC_A05 MC_A05 MC_A10 A10 DQ00 L601 MC_A04 MC_A04 MC_A04 A04 DQ02 10uH MC_A03 MC_A03 MC_A09 A09 VCC3_10 11 (4/10) MC_A02 MC_A02 MC_A03 A03 DQ03 MC_A01 MC_A01 MC_A02 A02 DQ01

J MC_XRD

MC_XRD MC_A06 A06 DQ06 MC_XCS6 MC_XCS6 MC_A01 A01 DQ04 MC_XCS4 JL301 IC601 NJM2574RB1(TE2)MC_XCS4 MC_XRD RDX DQ07 MC_XWE0 MC_XWE0 2.9 2.9VCC2_1 DQ05 LPF/THR SW CL/BI SW MC_XWE1 MC_XWE1 MC_XCS6 JL302 2.9 CSX DGND_10 GND PowerSave IRQIMG MC_XCS4 JL303 1.1 1.6 IRQIMG CSXRAM DQ09 Vsag Video-in XWAIT MC_XWE0 JL304 1.2 2.9 XWAIT WRLX DQ08 V-OUT VCC MC_D15 MC_XWE1 JL305MC_D15 WRHX DQ10

K MC_D14 MC_D14 IRQJPG VCC3_9MC_D13 IRQIMG IC601 C602

MC_D13 IRQIMG DQ12 22u VIDEO AMP 6.3V MC_D12 MC_D12 DGND_2 DQ11 TAJL306 A

XWAIT

MC_D11 MC_D11 XWAIT DGND_9 MC_D10 MC_D10 MC_D09 C603 D09 DQ13 C605 0.1u MC_D09 MC_D02 B MC_D09 D02 DQ14 100u4V MC_D08 MC_D00 MC_D08 D00 DQ16 C604 MC_D07 MC_D08 22uMC_D07 D08 DQ17 4V SENCV_OPEN MC_D06 MC_D13 P

L MC_D06 D13 DQ18 R602 SENCV_CLOSEMC_D05 68 17 (10/10)

MC_D05 VCC3_2 VCC3_8 STRB_ON MC_D04 MC_D05 MC_D04 D05 DQ15 V_OUT MC_D01 MC_D03 MC_D03 D01 DQ19 MC_D02 MC_D04 MC_D02 D04 DQ20 MC_D01 MC_D07 MC_D01 D07 DQ21 MC_D00 MC_D12 SIGNAL PATH MC_D00 D12 DGND_8 MC_D15 AU_LRCK AU_LRCK D15 DQ24 VIDEO SIGNAL

M PLLBYP PLLBYP AUDIO

MC_CLK1 MC_CLK1 CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA SIGNAL VAMP_ON VAMP_ON REC SYS_V SYS_V

PB

12 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152(6/10) SYS_V 14 XRST_SYS(4/10) 14 (5/10) 14 (6/10) XRST_SYSN C304 L301 C307 C3110.01u 10uH 0.1u 0.1uBBBC305 AU_AINL AU_AINL 0.1u B 13 AU_AOUT(7/10) AU_AOUT AU_2.9V C303 R301 AU_2.9V 22u 1k 4V P

O 16

4-11 4-12 SY-91 (3/10) 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10987654321MC_D11 D11 NC MC_D03 D03 NC MC_D06 D06 NC MC_D14 D14 NC MC_D10 D10 NC DGND_3 NC XWAITIN NC MD[0] VSSQR MD[1] VDDQR MD[2] VSSR PLLVCC VDDR MC_CLK1 CLKI VSSQL PLLGND VDDQL PLLMD[0] VSSL PLLINSEL VDDL DACMD /cs VCC2_2 MST XRST_SYS RSTX SM SONYTEST XTST MCK12 CLKTG DGND_16 PLLMD[1] AVDD_3 AU_2.9V PLLMD[2] VRPR PLLXMSK VRNR R315 R314 VCC3_3 AOUTR 10k 5600±0.5% ±0.5% PLL24 AVS_3 PLL12 AVS_2 AU_AINL VCC2_3 AOUTL PLLBYP PLLBYP VRNL NC VRBL XCS00 C324 0.1u BAVDD_2 DGND_4 AVDD_1 XCS01 VRH XCS02 AU_AOUTAIN XCS03 C327 0.1u BVR_1 XRAS VRL XCAS AVS_1

QCLKE

DGND_15 VCC3_4 ACLK NC NC QCLK VCC3_14 DGND_5 XPWDA BA01 XPWAD AQ09 ADCK BA00 XACLK VCC3_5 SCLK AU_LRCK AQ12 AUCK AQ06 VCC2_8 AQ05 SOA AQ11 SIA AQ03 AVDD_0 AQ10 STRBAD DGND_6 VR_0 AQ02 AVS_0 VCC2_4 DGND_14 AQ07 VSUB_CONT

SUBCNTL

AQ08 STROBE2 AQ04 STRB_ON STROBE1 AQ01 VCC3_13 VCC3_6 MSHUT_ON

SHUTTER

AQ00

IRISOUT

XWE VCC2_7 DQM03 HR_DIR2BDIR2B DQM02 HR_DIR2ADIR2A DQM01 HR_EN2EN2 DQM00 XOVF_RST_SENSSENS2 DGND_7 HR_DIR1BDIR1B DQ30 HR_DIR1ADIR1A DQ31 HR_EN1EN1 DQ29 XZM_RST_SENS1SENS1 DQ25 HR_DIR0BDIR0B DQ28 HR_DIR0ADIR0A VCC3_7 HR_EN0EN0 DQ27 XFC_RST_SENSSENS0 DQ23 VCC3_12 DQ22 VPD DQ26 PANEL_VLCDVD 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 22843215678R601 1M,

DSC-P52 COVER 4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS SY-91 BOARD SIDE A SY-91 BOARD SIDE B For Schematic Diagram

• Refer to page 4-39 for printed wiring board. 12345678910 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

SY-91 BOARD(4/10) :Voltage measurement of the CSP IC SH DSP,CLK GEN.(SH,GEN BLOCK) and the Transistors with mark,is A not possible.XX MARK:NO MOUNT NO MARK:REC/PB MODE

D_2.9V XAU_SP_MUTE L502 XAU_SP_MUTE 10uH XAU_LINE_MUTE XAU_LINE_MUTE D_3.1V AU_HGL_SEL 19 (7/10) AU_HGL_SEL XAU_POWER_SAVE XAU_POWER_SAVE FB503 D_1.5V 0uH XCS_PANEL_TGB Q501 3.2 FB501 XCS_PANEL_TGDTA144EMT2L 0uH VCOM_AD 18 SWITCH VCOM_AD (5/10)(9/10) 2.9 R787 R789 10 20R512 0 VGR516 22 82k FB504 VG47k ±0.5% 0uH MC_UPDATE 0.8 MC_UPDATE R509 R511 11 C784 FR_SO 22k 22k C511 0.1u FR_SO R506 ± 0.5% ± 0.5% 0.1u B FR_SI FR_SI C502 C501 1k B R785 R788 10u 22u C506 C507 R520 C511 22 0 XFR_SCK 6.3V 0.1u R513 0.1u R517 100 0.1u XFR_SCK (6/10)4V B 1k 47k B R521PPB47k XCS_MC XCS_MC

C REG_GND MC_HELP MC_HELP

FB502 C513 XMC_NMI 0uH 0.1u XMC_NMIB TG_CLK TG_CLK XTG_CS 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 XTG_CS XCAM_RESET XCAM_RESET 3 (1/10) XFE_CS L501 IC781 XFE_CSCCD_TEMP 245 244 243 242 241 240 239 238 237 236 235 234 233 232 231 230 229 228 227 226 225 224 223 222 221 220 219 218 217 216 215 214 213 212 211 210 209 208 207 206 205 204 203 202 201 200 199 198 197 196 195 194 193 192 191 190 189 188 187 186 185 184 100uH CCD_TEMP

D CLK GEN8 CAM_SO 1 (2/10)CAM_SO

XCAM_SCK (1/10) XCAM_SCK 1 DAC_STB 1 (5/10) DAC_STB XRST_JTAG STATUS1/PTE1 MD0 C514 HALL_ADCL501 HALL_AD XASEMD0 STATUS0/PTE0 MD1 0.1uB12345678LENS_TEMPCL502 LENS_TEMP 10 (2/10) XASEBREAK XVDATA/PTD0 MD2 LENSV_OPEN_ON CL503 RP C781 FB781 LENSV_OPEN_ON XTRST TXENL/PTD1 XX 0uH LENSV_CLOSE_ONCL504 EXTAL LENSV_CLOSE_ONE TCK SUSPND/PTD2 XCAM_DR_PSCL505 XTAL X781 XCAM_DR_PS TDI USB_JACK_IN CL506 27MHzC517 TDO TO2/PTQ1

VSSQ

0.1u TG_CLK_EN CL507 14 (5/10) TO0/PTE2 VCC_PLL2 B XRST_SYS TMS TG_CLK XRST_SYS (3/10)CL508 14 BREQ (RESERVED2) C782 R781 R782 VSS_PLL2 0.1u 0 22 14 (6/10)R501 0 TO3/PTQ2 CL509 B TXDMNS/PTD7 VSS_PLL1 C518 TXDPLS/PTD6 (RESERVED1) 22u 4V 9 CAM_DD_ONVAMP_ON CAM_DD_ONF PTM2 VCC_PLL1 TA P R525 5 (1/10) 5 (10/10) 47k XEPROM_BUSY VSS MS_DIODPLS/PTD4 MS_DIO AUDCK CL513 MS_BSDMNS/PTD5 MS_BS IRQ4/PTF4 LENSV_CLOSE_ON MS_SCLK C503 TEND/PTQ0 MS_SCLK 0.1u D31/PTB7 IRQ3/PTF3 MS_POWER_ON B MS_POWER_ON VCC IRQ2/PTF2 XMS_ACCESS_LED (10/10)XMS_ACCESS_LED 22 DAC_STB D30/PTB6 IRQ1/PTF1 IRQIMG AE_LOCK_LED AE_LOCK_LED SYS_V USB_DATA+ VSS IRQ0/PTF0 USB_DATA+ R502 C515

G D29/PTB5 VCC47k 0.1u

USB_DATA- USB_DATA-

B

TG_CLK_EN SCL/PTF6 PLLBYPD28/PTB4 MC_CLK1 USB_CLK_EN VSS MC_CLK1D27/PTB3 VAMP_ON R505 47k VAMP_ON VSSQ SDA/PTF7 IRQIMG XAU_POWER_SAVE IRQIMG D26/PTB2 TCK

TCK

SYS_V

IC501 TDI SYS_VVCCQ TDI PLLBYP

MC_HELP PLLBYP D25/PTB1 PTN1MC CAM SH DSP AU_LRCK TMS AU_LRCK USB_D+PULLUP TMS XWAIT XAU_LINE_MUTE XTRST XWAIT

H PTM1 TRST MC_XCS4MS_POWER_ON PTN2 MC_XCS4D23/PTA7 MC_XCS6

MC_XCS6 D22/PTA6 AUDATA0/PTG0 MC_XWE0 MC_XWE0 D21/PTA5 IC501 AUDATA1/PTG1 MC_XWE1 R504 47k HJ93D1702LPZ MC_XWE1 D20/PTA4 IRQ7/PTQ4 MC_XRD CSP(CHIP SIZE PACKAGE)IC MC_XRD D19/PTA3 AUDATA2/PTG2 MC_A01 AE_LOCK_LED D18/PTA2 AUDATA3/PTG3 MC_A01 MC_A02 MC_A02 D17/PTA1 IRQ6/PTQ3 CL515 MC_A03R531 MC_A03I D16/PTA0 RDY 47k MC_A04AU_LRCK MC_A04 VSSQ TCLK/PTJ7 MC_A05 MC_D15 VSSQ MC_A05D15 MC_A06 C504 ASEBRKAK/PTG5 XASEBREAK MC_A060.1u VCCQ MC_A07 MC_D14 B XASEMD0 MC_A07 D14 ASEMD0 MC_A08 MC_D13 VCCQ C519 MC_A08D13 0.1u R533 MC_A09 MC_D12 B 1k D12 PTN3 R532 XRST_SYS MC_A09 47k MC_A10 MC_D11 D11 RESETP XRST_JTAG MC_A10 MC_A11 MC_D10

J D10 RESETM R528

MC_A11 47k MC_A12 VCC WAIT XWAIT MC_A12 MC_A13 MC_D09 PTN4 XCS_PANEL_TG MC_A13 11 (3/10)D9 MC_A14 NMI XMC_NMI MC_A14VSS MC_A15 MC_D08 VCC R530 MC_A15D8 47k MC_A16 SCS0/SCPT_3 XCS_MC MC_A16PTM0 MC_A17 MC_D07 VSS MC_A17D7 MC_A18 MC_D06 BACK MC_A18D6 MC_A19

K TDO

MC_A19 VSSQ TDO MC_A20 MC_D05 D5 DACK0/PTC5 MC_A20 MC_A21 DREQ0/PTC4 R529 MC_A21VCCQ 47k MC_A22 MC_D04 IRQ5/PTE5 LENSV_OPEN_ON MC_A22D4 MC_A23 MC_D03 VCCQ MC_A23D3 MC_A24 MC_D02 D2 RASU/PTE5 MC_A24 MC_A25 MC_D01 MC_A25 D1 (RESERVED3) MC_D00 MC_D00 CASU/PTE7 AU_HGL_SEL MC_D00D0 MC_D01 CASL/PTE6 MC_D01L XAU_SP_MUTE A0/PTK0 MC_D02 MC_D02 R503 C520 XEPROM_BUSY MC_D03 47k XX MC_D03 MC_D04 MC_D04 * IC502 AK6417CH-E2 MC_D05 MC_D05 2.9 VCC 2.9 XEEPROM_CS MC_D06 MC_D06 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 R534 0 CS 2.9 EEPROM_SCK MC_D07 XX XEPROM_BUSY 2.9 SCK MC_D07 RST 0 EEPROM_SO MC_D08 DI MC_D08 CL512 GND 2.9 EEPROM_SI MC_D09

M CL514 DO

MC_D09 MC_D10 MC_D10 MC_D11 MC_D11 MC_D12 XEEPROM_WE MC_D12 MC_D13 MC_D13 MC_D14 C510 0.1u C512 B 0.1u IC502 MC_D14MC_D15B MC_D15 EEPROM * Pin number and index mark of IC502 are shown as viewed from the bottom.

N

16 SIGNAL PATH

VIDEO SIGNAL AUDIO CHROMA Y SIGNAL REC PB SY-91 (4/10) 4-13 4-14

61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10987654321

VSSQ

MC_A01 A1 VCCQ MC_A02 A2 VCCQ MC_A03 A3 VCCQ VSSQ VCCQ MC_A04 A4 AVSS_USB R507 27 USB_DATA+ VCCQ DP MC_A05 USB_DATA- A5 DM MC_A06 R508 27 A6 AVCC_USB MC_A07 R510 A7 AN7/PTL7 82k XEEPROM_WE ± 0.5% VCOM_AD PTN6 AN6/PTL6 MC_A08 A8 AVCC_AD MC_A09 A9 AN5/PTL5 MC_UPDATE VG TI2A/PTN7 AN4/PTL4 MC_A10 A10 AN3/PTL3 C508 MC_A11 R514 CCD_TEMP A11 AN2/PTL2 0.1u B 47k LENS_TEMP TI2B/PTQ7 AN1/PTL1 MC_A12 R515 1k HALL_AD A12 AN0/PTL0 C509 MC_A13 0.1u B A13 AVSS_AD VSSQ TO1/PTE3 XFE_CS MC_A14 A14 PTM3 VCCQ CTS5/SCPT2_6 MC_A15 A15 RTS5/SCPT2_5 MC_A16 A16 RXD5/SCPT2_4 CL510 MC_A17 A17 TXD5/SCPT2_4 CL511 MC_A18 XCAM_RESET A18 PTM4 MC_A19 A19/PTK1 VCCQ MC_A20 A20/PTK2 CKIO2 VSS VSSQ MC_A21 XMS_ACCESS_LED A21/PTK3 MSDIR/PTC0 R519 0 MS_DIO VCC MSDIO/PTC1 MC_A22 MS_BS A22/PTK4 MSBS/PTC2 MC_A23 R518 47k MS_SCLK A23/PTK5 MSSCLK/PTC3 VSSQ VCC MC_A24 A24/PTK6 PTM5 VCCQ DACK1/PTC7 MC_A25 A25/PTK7 VSS BS DREQ1/PTC6 MC_XRD RD TXD3/PTH5 MC_XWE0 WE0/DQMLL RXD3/PTH6 MC_XWE1 WE1/DQMLU SCK3/PTH7 WE2/DQMUL SCK2/PTH4 EEPROM_SCK WE3/DQMUU/AH RXD2/PTH3 EEPROM_SI TI3A/PTQ6 TXD2/PTH2 EEPROM_SO RDWR RESERVED4 AUDSYNC/PTG4 TXD1/SCPT_4 CAM_SO XCAM_SCK TI3B/PTQ5 SCK1/SCPT_6 PTM6 CAM_DD_ONVSSQ CS0 SCK4/SCPT2_1 XTG_CS PTN5 RXD4/SCPT2_0 FCE TXD4/SCPT2_0 CS2/PTJ0 CTS4/SCPT2_3 CS3/PTJ1 RTS4/SCPT2_2 MC_XCS4 XCAM_DR_PS CS4/PTJ2 PTM7 FR_SO CS5A/PTJ3 RXD0/SCPT_1 FR_SI CS5B/PTJ4 TXD0/SCPT_0 MC_XCS6 XEEPROM_CS CS6A/PTJ5 PTN0 CS6B/PTJ6 WP R522 0 MC_CLK1 MD3 CKIO VCCQ VSSQ CKE/PTH1 SCK0/SCPT_2 XFR_SCK RASL/PTE4 UCLK/PTH0 USB_CLK 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 1835678IC781 SM8720AV-E2 2.9 REF_OUT 1.4VDD 1.4 VSS

FIN

CCD_SEL2 2.9 1.3 VSS CLK2_ON 0 USB_CLK_EN 2.9 CLK3_OUT VDD 2.9 CLK3_ON CLK2_OUT 0 CCD_SEL1

VSS

2.9 CLK1_ON CLK1_OUT4321VDD,

DSC-P52 COVER 4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS SY-91 BOARD SIDE A SY-91 BOARD SIDE B For Schematic Diagram

• Refer to page 4-39 for printed wiring board. 12345678910 11 12 13 14 15 16

SY-91 BOARD(5/10) LCD DRIVE,TIMING GENERATOR(RGB-TG BLOCK) A XX MARK:NO MOUNT

L803 10uH SIGNAL PATH L804 10uH

NO MARK:REC/PB MODE

C824 C826 VIDEO SIGNAL R :REC MODE 1u 1u AUDIO

P :PB MODE B B16V 16V CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA SIGNAL

R812 C812 C813 C816 C817 2.2u 0.1u 0.1u 22u R821R805 XX 10k REC 100k 25V 16V B 10V B 10VTA A TA A

B PB

R806 Q802 C819 10k UMF5NTR 6.8u SWITCH 16V TA A 4.2 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 4.9 4.9 R801 SP+ 100k 24 (7/10) 0 SP- PANEL_-15.3V R803 Q801 14 PANEL_13.2V 4700 2.2

C UMF5NTR 1.3 2.4 R822 100 VBPANEL_4.9V SWITCH 2.8 D802 EXT_DA2 VB

2.9 2.9 XX 2.9 2.4 PANEL_2.9V XC_SAVE XC.SAVE B_DC_DET R807 C821C803 2.4 0.1u 1k 0.1u XLCD_SCK_P 2.9 R823 100 VG CN702 39P0BR809 XSCK VG 23 470k 13 1 REG_GND(9/10) XTG_SO 2.1 2.4 SI IC801 G_DC_DET 2 SP-7.8 C822 2.9 2.4 0.1u R824 100 VR 3 SP+ R802 D801 L801 XCS LCD DRIVER 33k XX 10uH 12 VR 4 REG_GND2.9 2.4 R828 LI_3V

D Vcc1 R_DC_DET R827 100k 5 LI_3V

C801 C802 IC801 C823 0.1u 33u 2.9 AN12580A-BB 0.1u 100k 6 REG_GND 6.3V TRAP_ADJ GND2BA7VGH 1.6 REG_GND LPF_ADJ GND1 8 VSS C804 R810 0.1u 150k XP_SAVE 2.9 4.9 9 VGL 10V ±0.5% XP.SAVE VSHC805 0.01u 1.9 15 10 VDD13.3 GRES PANEL_B B_IN Vcc4 11 GRES C806 GPCK 0.01u 1.9 12 GPCK 16 PANEL_G G_IN N.CE (3/10) C807 16 GSRT 13 GSRT0.01u 1.9 STBYB PANEL_R R_IN N.C 14 STBYB

RESET

PANEL_V 17 15 RESET HDO 16 VCOM

SRT

17 SRT

OE

18 OE CLR TO12345678910 11 12 19 CLR CONTROL SWITCH MCLK BLOCK 20 MCLK (SW-392)

F HCNT 21 HCNTC815 0.1u B R819 VR (PAGE 4-31

R813 100k 22 VR of LEVEL2) 2700 D803 VG 1SV290(TPL3) 23 VG R818 VB R815 1M 24 VB C818 47k 0.001u 25 VSS R820 C820 C814 R817 1M 270p 26 VSH R816 22k 560p 68k CH C825 CH L805 0.1u 27 REG_GND 27uH B BL_THH 10V 28 BL_THH L802 BL_THLG 14 10uH 29 BL_THL(3/10) BL_H 30 BL_H BL_L 31 BL_L 14 (4/10) XRST_SYS 32 REG_GND R811 KEY_AD1 0 33 KEY_AD1 KEY_AD0 14 34 KEY_AD0(6/10) C808 MODE_DIAL 35 MODE_DIAL XX KEY_AD3 36 KEY_AD3

H 37 REG_GND36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 XRST_IN

38 XRST_IN 39 REG_GND 19 LI_3V LI_3VP_BGP 2.7 1.4 HCNT BGP HCNT KEY_AD01 KEY_AD0(1/10) R826 1.4 68 KEY_AD1 MCLK KEY_AD1 SWCOM MCLK KEY_AD3 25 (6/10) CAM_SO FB801 KEY_AD3

I CAM_SO 0.2 0.41 BLK 0uH CLRSW CLR MODE_DIAL(2/10) XLCD_SCK_P MODE_DIAL

XCAM_SCK XRST_IN R804 P_FRP 1.4 2.4 OE XRST_IN 0 FRP OE 1 (4/10) COM_FRP 1.4 IC802 0.1 SRTCOM_FRP SRT BL_LEVEL TIMING GENERATOR BL_THH XLCD_SCK_P 2.9 2.9 BL_THHXSCK VDD BL_THL BL_THL C810 2.9 IC802 0 RESETVDD RESET BL_H 26 (9/10)0.1u CM7021L3-E2 BL_H B BL_L 2.9 2.9 STBYB BL_L

J XCS_PANEL_TG XCS STBYB BL_ON

XTG_SO 2.2 0 GSRTSO GSRT CAM_SO 0 0.1 GPCKSI GPCK 2.6 GRES VSYB GRES 2.9 XVD 20 CP

K 20 (4/10) 18

12345678910 11 12 CL801

L CL802 VG

CL803 16 VCOM_AD 4-15 4-16 SY-91 (5/10) 31524631524648 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 N.C R_INJECT 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 0.3 N.C EXT_DA1 C811 0 XX N.C C_BG 2.7 N.C BGP P_BGP 2.7 3.0 0.2 BLK HDI POCB N.C BLACK_IN 2.9 HDB SYF N.C GND3 1.4 1.4 W/H OUT BIAS FRP P_FRP 1.4 1.4 BL-ON OP_IN+ COM_FRP COM_FRP+IN R814 2.9 68k 1.4 BL-DET -IN OP_IN- N.C 1.4 6.9 GND GND OP_OUT COM_OUT 2.9 3.2 13.3 TESTI PS VCO Vcc3 1.4 4.9 LED PD N.C Vcc2 2.9 2.9 PWM XC.SAVE XC_SAVE 1.5 TESTI OSCI 1.5 TESTI OSCO 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 2.9 2.9 CPMODE DR.P.SAVE XP_SAVE 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24,

DSC-P52 COVER 4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS SY-91 BOARD SIDE A SY-91 BOARD SIDE B For Schematic Diagram

• Refer to page 4-39 for printed wiring board. 12345678910 11 12 13 14 15

SY-91 BOARD(6/10) :Voltage measurement of the CSP IC 14 (3/10)

and the Transistors with mark,is

A FRONT CONTROL(FR BLOCK) not possible. XX MARK:NO MOUNT XRST_SYS 14 (4/10) NO MARK:REC/PB MODE 14 (5/10)

R420 10k R419 KEY_AD3 2700 R421 KEY_AD3 4700 KEY_AD1

B R430KEY_AD1 0 100k C411KEY_AD0 0.1u B

25 KEY_AD0 0(5/10) MODE_DIAL MODE_DIAL C405 C4080.001u 3.3u R460 C410XRST_IN R4356.3V 470k 0.1u XRST_IN B 1k LI_3V LI_3V R431 C412 Q403 100k 0.01u B XMC_NMI XMC_NMI DTC144EMT2L C413 MC_HELP MOD R429 MC_HELP 100k 0.1u C416 MC_UPDATE R459 XX MC_UPDATE R403

C 470k

R401 470k R409 C415 21 FR_SI 470k 1M XX(4/10) FR_SI FR_SO FR_SO C414 C417 XFR_SCK 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 XX XX R451 XFR_SCK 3.0 10k XCS_MC XCS_MC XMS_IN 0 R450 R452 C404 10k 10k XTALLY_LED 100p XTALLY_LED Q401 B SELF_TIMER_LED SELF_TIMER_LED DTC143TMT2L RB401 STB_CHARGE XPWR_ON INV. R414 1k STB_CHARGE XPWR_ON MODE_DIAL2 XPWR_ON

D XPWR_ON AV_JACK_IN XPB_ON KEY_AD4XSTB_PWRSAVE R415 R442 1k KEY_AD3XSTB_PWRSAVE 1k XLENZ_CAP_OPN KEY_AD3

XSHTR_ON XSHTR_ON XSHTR_ON XSHTR_ON KEY_AD2 27 XAE_LOCK_SW XAE_LOCK_SW R416 1k R443 1k KEY_AD1(10/10) XAE_LOCK_SW XAE_LOCK_ON KEY_AD1 XMS_IN R444 1k XMS_IN KEY_AD0MS_IN KEY_AD0 USB_JACK_IN R405 470k R445 1k MODE_DIAL USB_JACK_IN XLANC_PWR_ON MODE_DIAL1 AV_JACK_IN BATT/XEXT R417 1k C418 9p AV_JACK_IN BATT/XEXT BACK_UP_VCC CH CHARGE_LED IC401 CHARGE_LED X402XUSB_JACK_IN 32kHz_IN R440 PWR_LED PWR_LED R411 1M 10M 32.768kHz

E PWR_LED FR CONTROLLANC_JACK_IN 32kHz_OUT C4199pXSTB_FULL 2.0 0.1 CL403

XSTB_FULL R40263R441 150k CH USB_JACK_IN 10k AV_JACK_IN GND BEEP 0.2 3.0 R418 IC401 30 (7/10) 5 1k LCD_COM/XDATA MB89097LGA-G-151-ER BEEP_ON BEEP_ON2 FAST_CHARGE FAST_CHARGE FAST_CHARGE Q402 C406 GND CSP(CHIP SIZE PACKAGE)IC FAST_CHARGE0.1u B BATT/XEXT BATT/XEXT RN1904FE(TPLR3) 1 4 BATT_UNREG XTALLY_LED INV./LED DRIVE BACK_UP_VCC INIT_CHARGE STB_CHARGE BATT_UNREG XTALLY_LED STB_CHG ACV_UNREG CHARGE_LED ACV_UNREG CHARGE/STB_LED XSTB_POPUP 28 MC_UPDATE(8/10) PWR_LED_ON XCS_LCD R410 470k

F EVER_3.0V XLANC_ON BATT_SI

EVER_4.0V SELF_TIMER_LED R454SELF_TIMER_LED BATT_SO 470k UNREG_SO UNREG_SO (RESERVED) REG_GND 7 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 UNREG_SO

G UNREG_SO IC402UNREG_SCK CL402

UNREG_SCK INITIAL RESET,BACKUP VCC XCS_DDCON XCS_DDCON 29 SYS_DD_ON SYS_DD_ON(9/10) DD_CON_SENS R423 47k D_1.5V SYS_V 12 (3/10) D_2.9V R406 1k L401 XRST_IN 47uH 3.0 3.0 R428 REG_GND RESET CS 1M XRESET 3.0 2.8 VOUT VBAT 4.0 3.1 R426 330

H R413 VIN VCH R427 CL401

47k 3.0 D401 33VRO VSS 1SS357-TPH3 X401 RB403R422 100k 10MHz IC402 S-8425AABPA-TF-G C402 4700p C403 C401 47u C407 C409 XX 6.3V 0.1u 2200pBBB

I SY-91 (6/10) 4-17 4-18

R456 XX R457 XX R458 470k8765123420 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10987654321LI_3V UNREG_SCK XMC_NMI UNREG_SCK MC_WAKE_UP XCS_DDCON XCS_DDCON MELODY FR_SI FR_SI STB_PLUNGER FR_SO FR_SO XRST_SYS XFR_SCK CL407 SYS_DD_ON XFR_SCK SYS_DD_ON XCS_MC XSTB_PWRSAVE XCS_MC XSTB_PWRSAVE MOD0 MELODY_ENV

XRESET

10MHz_IN XRESET 10MHz_OUT (AN15) CL405 MOD1 (AN14) CL406 BATT_IN (AN13) SYS_V DEW_SENS ACV_UNREG XMULTI_IN ACV_SENS XSTB_FULL R434 1k R433 100k BATT_UNREG XSTB_FULL BATT_SENS R453 470k DD_CON_SENS XSETUP_ON DD_CON_SENS MC_HELP R432 470k XMC_HELP MFOCUS_B Program_Dial_A AVss Program_Dial_B AVREF LANC_IN AVCC LANC_OUT MFOCUS_A 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60,

DSC-P52 COVER 4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS SY-91 BOARD SIDE A SY-91 BOARD SIDE B

For Schematic Diagram • Refer to page 4-39 for printed wiring board. 12345678910

SY-91 BOARD(7/10) AU_AOUT

AU_AINL 13 (3/10)

A AUDIO I/O(AU BLOCK) AU_2.9V XX MARK:NO MOUNT C166

C158 C161 0.47u C170 22u 0.015u 0.01u B C168 6.3V 0.1u TA :Voltage measurement of B AB the CSP IC and C162 the Transistors with 0.01u C1671u mark,is not possible. R155 XX SP_VOL 8 (2/10) R156 10k

B

D2 J8 H8 J7 H7 J6 H6 J5 H5 J4 H4 J3 H3 G3 J1 C173 1u C152 B 4.7u R151 B 47k C175 NC(HK) NC 4.7uB NC(HN) SPAGC_DET R157 47k

C XAU_POWER_SAVE STBY XAUDIO_MUTE L163

AU_HGL_SEL LPF_SEL SP_LPF_0 10uHC154 1u B AGC_DET BEEP_OUT C174C169 0.47u 0.001uB WHPF_OUT BEEP_MIX_IN B C153 C155 IC151 0.015u 0.015u WHPF_BIAS AGNDBBAUDIO AMP 19 C172 XX R158 (4/10) WHPF_IN XBEEP_MUTE BEEP_ON C151 (6/10) R153 GAIN_SET IC151 BEEP C180 0.47u B 30 XX BEEP 22k AN12908A-VB 1u R160MIC_OUT VREF_SP C171 B 47k R152 0 CSP(CHIP SIZE PACKAGE)IC R161 0

D GND SP_OUT-

R159 1K XAU_LINE_MUTE LINE_MUTE SP_GND C176 0.047u R162 XAU_SP_MUTE MIC_OFF SP_OUT+ 0 C179 L152 A_2.9V10u C181 XX 10V A 10uH MIC_IN NC(HN) C177 0.047u M_5V NC NC(HK) C1780.1u C156 B 0.1u

E

A9 C7 B9 A8 B7 A7 B6 A6 B5 A5 B4 A4 A3 B2 32 (9/10) MIC_IN 31 C165(10/10) 1u

B

AU_OUT

F

REG_GND C157 C159 C160 C164 10u 1u 1u 1uBBBB24 SP-(5/10) SP+

SIGNAL PATH G AUDIOSIGNAL REC

16 PB 4-19 4-20 SY-91 (7/10) B3 B8 C9 C8 D9 D8 E9 E8 F9 F8 G9 G8 H9 G7 J9 NC(HK) NC NC(HN) AGC_OUT MIC_SPY LPF2B MIC_2V LPF2A R154 MIC_REB LPF1B XX C163 0.015u VREF LPF1A VCC LPF_OUT MUTE_TMG REC_AMP_IN GND REC_OUT MUTE_DRVR AGND LINE_OUT PB_IN VCC_SP VOL_CTL VCC_SP SPAGC_SW SP_SAVE NC(HN) NC(HK) A1 C3 A2 C1 D1 E2 E1 F2 F1 G2 G1 H2 H1 J2 C2,

DSC-P52 COVER 4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS SY-91 BOARD SIDE A SY-91 BOARD SIDE B For Schematic Diagram

• Refer to page 4-39 for printed wiring board. 12345678910

SY-91 BOARD(8/10)

ACV_UNREG1

DC IN(DD BLOCK-1) A Q001 BATT/XEXT1XX MARK:NO MOUNT CPH6311-TL F001 L012

SWITCH 5 2A/24V 1uH 33 (10/10)4.1

NO MARK:REC/PB MODE 6 ST_UNREG

C001 4.1 1 Q005 FDW2508P/N 0.022u R005 2 SWITCH REG_GND B 470k 4.1 0 F0032A/24V R003 0.1 DRAIN1 DRAIN2 10k 4.0 4.0 ACV_UNREG SOURCE1 SOURCE2 4.0 4.0 R071 C002 D002 SOURCE1 SOURCE2 XX 0.022u MA111-(K8).S0 R019 3.9 3.9 F005 470k GATE1 GATE2 2A/24V

B B

D003 D005 MA111-(K8).S0 MA8120-TX LND001 BATT_UNREG C003 R022 STATIC_GND 0.1u 10k Q006 F007 B RN4983FE(TPLR3) 2A/24V CHARGE SWITCH C017 3.963-7.4 0.022u

B

R0202510k R006 -7.4 2.6

C R036 R038220k C010 1M 10k0.022u140.6 28 (6/10)

B FAST_CHARGE -7.5 3.0 CN001 4P BT901 3.9 Q007SSM3K03FE(TPL3) BATT_UNREG 1 R023 0.1 1M CHARGE SWITCH BATTERY BATT_UNREG 2 TERMINAL Q002 (DRY BATTERY) BATT_GND 3 SSM3K03FE(TPL3)

SWITCH

BATT_GND 4 Q004 C011 2SJ347-TE85L R034 0

D XX SWITCH 470k1.5 0.7 0.7

R021 Q009 1k 2SD2216J-QR(K8).SO REG_GND 0.3 SWITCH BATT/XEXT EVER_4.0V EVER_3.0V EVER_3.0V

E ACV_UNREG UNREG

R054 Q022 10k MCH3317-TL-E CAM_-7.5VD014 MA2SD24008S0 D018_OUT L009 L010 D018 0 10uH 100uH MA2S111-(K8).SO D016_OUT 0 L011 R056 D013 D015 D016 MA2SD24008S0 RB160M-30TR 0.56uH MA2SD24008S0 330k 34 (9/10) R053 0

XX F IC004C039IC003 R057XC61CC1502NR R055 S-8321ADMP-DND-T20.022u 0

C026 1M B 0.001u 3.8 4.0 B OUT GND 0 0.1 VDD NC Q021,022 4.0 0.2 SWITCHING C046 33u R052 C047 1M C027 C045 10V 0 XX XX 10u TAB B REG_GND D010 Q021 MA2SD24008S0 SSM3K03FE(TPL3)

G IC003 IC004

BATTERY DETECT DC/DC CONVERTER Note : Note : The components identified by Les composants identifiés par mark 0 or dotted line with mark une marque 0 sont critiques 0 are critical for safety. pour la sécurité. Replace only with part number Ne les remplacer que par une specified. pièce portant le numéro spécifié.

SY-91 (8/10) 4-21 4-22

21344321567845321,

DSC-P52 COVER 4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS SY-91 BOARD SIDE A SY-91 BOARD SIDE B For Schematic Diagram

• Refer to page 4-39 for printed wiring board. 12345678910 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

SY-91 BOARD(9/10) A DC/DC CONVERTER(DD-2 BLOCK) 4.1 1.6 L006 22uH D_1.5V XX MARK:NO MOUNT C032

1u Q012 B MCH3317-TL-E Q018 D_3.1V

NO MARK:REC/PB MODE :Voltage measurement of the CSP IC 3.0 D_3.1V2.2 MCH5801-TL-E1 C041 CAM_15V R :REC MODE and the Transistors with mark,is 10u CAM_15V P :PB MODE not possible. Q012,018 6.3V CAM_-7.5V 4 (1/10)

SWITCHING CAM_-7.5V REG_GND 4.9 D_2.9V

B L007

C033 22uH A_2.9V ACV_UNREG 1u B 2.0 Q013 UNREG MCH3317-TL-E 2.9 Q019MCH5801-TL-E C042 PANEL_2.9V D_3.1V 10u C051 D_3.1V 6.3V XX D_2.9V D018_OUT 1.2 1 D_2.9V D016_OUT Q013,019 M_5V 6 (2/10)M_5V D017 SWITCHING 34 EVER_3.0V 015AZ6.2-Z(TPL3) REG_GND(8/10) CAM_-7.5V

C R069 A_2.9V

33k R070 C050 A_2.9V 15k 0.1u D_2.9V B D_2.9V REG_GND D_1.5V (3/10) D_1.5V 15 R035 C022 0 0.033u Q016 REG_GNDSSM5G04TU(TE85R) C012 SWITCHINGR039 0.033u L0080 22uH5.0 D00934D_3.1V D_3.1VR06025D_3.1V 1k MA2SD24008S0 3.2D R002 D_2.9V10 ± 0.5% C031 C040 D_2.9V±0.5% 10u D_1.5V 18 (4/10) 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 1u D_1.5VB 6.3V3.2 REG_GND R068 PANEL_4.9V C004 PANEL_4.9V 0.033u PGND3 PANEL_13.2V R067 R011 IN2+ PANEL_13.2V 27k 2200 FB1 OUT5n PANEL_2.9V PANEL_2.9V 23 (5/10)

E R012 IN1- OUT5p REG_GND100k

FB3 OUT1n Q020,024 PANEL_-15.3V 0.033u SWITCHING PANEL_-15.3V C005 IN3- OUT1p R013 56k FB4 OUT2n C006 0.01u IN4- NC Q025 UPA650TT-E1-A FB5 IC001 OUT3n A_4.9V REG PANEL_4.9V OUT3p D_2.9V D_2.9V R014 IN5-C007 L005 12k 0.01u NC DC/DC CONVERTER OUT4n 0uH 5 D_1.5V4.1 4.9 4.9 6 4.9 A_4.9V D_1.5V

F NC IC001 OUT4p211SYS_DD_ON4.1145SYS_DD_ONR015 C008 FA7712Q-D-TE2 4.9 4.1 2

NC UNREG_SCK10k 0.033u CSP(CHIP SIZE PACKAGE)IC OUT6n 0.8 2 C044 UNREG_SCK 29 (6/10) FB6 OUT6p UNREG_SO1.6 10u C054 UNREG_SO C029 Q020 Q024 6.3V XX IN6- NC 10u MCH3406-TL-E 3 CPH5802-TL-E B XCS_DDCONB0XCS_DDCON NC NC REG_GND NC NC NC NC R016 C009 A_2.9V 100k 2200p NC OUT9 A_2.9V

G FB9 OUT10 M_5V M_5V 32 (7/10)

IN9- PGND2 REG_GND A_4.9V A_4.9V D_2.9V D_2.9V12345678910 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 M_5V M_5V M_5V (10/10) Q023 35 Q017,023 CPH5802-TL-E EVER_3.0V

H SWITCHING

EVER_3.0V C013 REG_GND 2200p R010 R024 8200 47k D019 L003 ± 0.5% 015AZ6.2-Z(TPL3) 10uH 54.1 5.0 5.0 6 5.0211Q028-030 4.1 R031 1C016 R037 R042 5.0454.1 2 -15.3V REGR008 R064 R065 R025 18k 15k 27k 0.1u 4700 47k R0.9/P0.5 4700 ± 0.5% ± 47k0.5% ± 0.5% B ± 0.5% 2 Q026 C014 C015 C018 R1.8 UPA650TT-E1-A 100p 100p 0.1u C019 R044 C028 B 0.1u 47k 10u Q017 P1.3 C043 CH 3 10u 0 M_5v REG Q028 C049 CH B ± 0.5% B MCH3406-TL-E 6.3V 2SB1462J-QR(K8).SO 0.22u

B B I R027

10k ± 0.5% R051 R058 R063 R009 R026 10k 100k 2.9 82k 100k 75k C048 ± 0.5% ± 0.5% 0.47u 0.4 CAM_15V B 9.604125BL_L 14.4 -0.6 C053 0.5 D020L002 RB520S-30TE61 R06163R0660.1u B 22uH 15.0 33k 120k PANEL_13.2V ± 0.5% BL_H

J5413.3 -19.74.112C037 R04833k R049100k 14.42.2u Q027

R046 L001 35V ±0.5% HN1A01FU-TE85R R062 120k 6.7 4.7uH4.1 F 14.8 13.2V REGR059 D001 100k R004 R007 MA111-(K8).S0 3900 4700BL_ON D004 4700 Q010 ± ± 0.5% MA2S111-(K8).SO ± 0.5% CPH5803-TL-E0.5% Q029 -19.7 -15.5 26 BL_LEVEL SWITCHING63HN1A01FE-Y/GR(TPLR3) (5/10) R017 Q030 100 R02825PANEL_-15.3V 2SD2216J-QR(K8).SO XX C0341u 4.9 13.2 13.3B1Q015 C02414Q014 R018 C052 MCH3406-TL-E 0.22u R001 HN1C01FU-TE85R

K 12k 0.1u

2.9 R1.7/P0.8 2 SWITCHING B 240k 12.7 SWITCH ± 0.5% B 0.3 ± 0.5% R050 C021 C025 3 100k Q003 R047 C0231u 1u B UN9213J-(K8).SO 15k 16V 1u 10V BACK LIGHT B 16V

B

D012 MA2SD24008SO BL_THH C035 BL_THL 2.2u 10V D011MA2SD24008SO043-7.5 CAM_-7.5V52

L C0385.0C030 L004 C036 0.33u

1u 100uH 4.7u 25V B FR3.2/P4.3 16 Q011QS5U26TR CAM -7.5V REG 4-23 4-24 SY-91 (9/10) 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 SCP9 IN2- FB10 FB2 IN10- OVP2 SYS_DD_ON AMPIN CONT EVER_3.0V AMPOUT VCC1 R029 0 CT1 VIN1- R030 0 RT VIN3- R032 0 CT2 VIN4- R033 0 CS VIN5- SCPIN NC CP VIN6- TLOFF NC GND ONOFF2 VREG(2.2V) RST R041 470 UNREG_SCK DT2 CLK R043 470 UNREG_SO DT1 DATA R045 470 XCS_DDCON PGND1 XCS OUT6s OUT5S C020 VCC4 0.033uVCC3 VCC5 VCC2 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 4033221112525343433415236,

DSC-P52 COVER 4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS SY-91 BOARD SIDE A SY-91 BOARD SIDE B For Schematic Diagram

• Refer to page 4-39 for printed wiring board. 12345678910 11 12

SY-91 BOARD(10/10) CONNECTOR(CN BLOCK) CN706 10P

A_4.9V

A XX MARK:NO MOUNT NO MARK:REC/PB MODE 1 AF_LED_4.9V R :REC MODE Q704 4.1 2 AF_LED_4.9VHN1C01FU-TE85R P :PB MODE 6 3SWITCH 3 PRELAMP_AF_ON

9 0 0(2/10) PRELAMP_AF_ON 4 PRELAMP_AF_ON25145MIC_GND TO00UA-003 UNIT R713 R708 6 MIC_INR712 CN001R709 22k R711 R710100 100 1k 10k 10k 7 MIC_GND (PAGE 4-34 A_4.9V A_4.9V 8 SENCV_OPEN of LEVEL2) MIC_IN

B D_2.9V D_2.9V 9 REG_GND35 M_5V AU_OUT R720 1k(9/10) M_5V 10 SENCV_CLOSE

R721 1k EVER_3.0V EVER_3.0V SENCV_OPEN REG_GND SENCV_CLOSE SELF_TIMER_LED STRB_ON MIC_IN 31 MIC_IN V_OUT(7/10) R0AU_OUT Q703 5 P5.0 D714 AU_OUT RN4983FE(TPLR3) XX CN704 12P

SWITCH C 5.0 R5.1

1 STRB_ON M_5V P0.1 2 M_5V 5 R0 3 XSTB_PWRSAVE(1/10) P5.0 CL701 4 XSTB_FULL CAM_DD_ON XSTB_PWRSAVE R2.925REG_GND 5 P0(4/10) 6 REG_GND XSTB_FULL TO 7 REG_GND FP-643 FLEXIBLE R715 SENCV_OPEN 22k 8 REG_GND (PAGE 4-27 SENCV_OPEN STB_CHARGE of LEVEL2) SENCV_CLOSE 9 STB_CHARGE

D 17 SENCV_CLOSE(3/10) STRB_ON 10 ST_UNREGSTRB_ON

V_OUT 11 ST_UNREG V_OUT 12 ST_UNREG SELF_TIMER_LED CN705 10P SELF_TIMER_LED XAE_LOCK_SW XSTB_PWRSAVE 1 XAE_LOCK_SW XSTB_PWRSAVE XSTB_FULL 2 N.C. XSTB_FULL

E XSHTR_ONSTB_CHARGE 3 XSHTR_ONSTB_CHARGE

XAE_LOCK_SW 4 N.C. XAE_LOCK_SW XPWR_ON XSHTR_ON 5 XPWR_ON XSHTR_ON CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK XPWR_ON 6 N.C. (RL-060) XPWR_ON PWR_LED 7 REG_GND (PAGE 4-33 PWR_LED R716 of LEVEL2) XMS_IN 390 8 N.C.XMS_IN EVER_3.0V AV_JACK_IN 9 EVER_3.0V AV_JACK_IN PWR_LED USB_JACK_IN 10 PWR_LED 27 USB_JACK_INF (6/10) R701 Q702 3300 SSM6E01TU(TE85R)

SWITCH

D_2.9V 2.9140XTALLY_LED 5 C702 Q701 2.9 2.7 22u C701 RN1904FE(TPLR3) R704D702 6 3820 6.3V 0.1u LED DRIVE SML-310LTT86 R703 C704470k 0.47u 0.1 TA B CN701 39P 0 (Self-timer/recording) B 1 MS_VSS R705 2.2 220 R702 2 MS_VCC R3.0/P2.8 MS_POWER_ON 2200

G D703 3 MS_VCC

SML-512MWT86 MS_SCLK 4 MS_SCLK (AE/AF LOCK) R706390 XMS_IN R2.8/P2.5 5 XMS_IN MS_DIO CHARGE_LED D704 6 MS_DIO 0 SML-311YTT86 7 N.C (FLASH CHARGE) R707 330 8 N.C XMS_ACCESS_LED MS_BS 9 MS_BS AE_LOCK_LED D705 SML-310LTT86 10 MS_VSS

H (MEMORY STICK ) 11 MS_VSS ACCESS C703

MS_POWER_ON MS_POWER_ON 100p FB70522 0uH 12 AV_GND(4/10) MS_SCLK CH MS_SCLK 13 AU_OUT MS_DIO MS_DIO 14 AV_GND MS_BS AV_JACK_IN MS_BS 15 AV_JACK_IN USB_DATA- USB_DATA- FB7040uH 16 AV_GND USB_DATA+ USB_DATA+ 17 V_OUT 18 AV_GND USB_JACK_IN R717 0

I 19 USB_JACK_IN TOLF701 JK-246 BOARD

0uH 20 USB_GND (PAGE 4-29 USB_DATA- 21 USB_DATA- of LEVEL2) USB_DATA+ 2 3 22 USB_DATA+ 1 4 23 USB_GND 24 ACV_UNREG1 25 ACV_UNREG1 26 ACV_UNREG1

J ST_UNREG 27 ACV_UNREG1

FB701 33 28 ACV_UNREG1(8/10) 0uHACV_UNREG1 29 ACV_UNREG1 R719 1k BATT/XEXT1 30 BATT/XEXT D711 FB703REG_GND MAZS082008SO 0uH 31 ACV_GND 32 ACV_GND

SIGNAL PATH FB7020uH 33 ACV_GND

34 ACV_GND

K VIDEO SIGNAL AUDIO R718 R714 35 ACV_GND0 XX CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA SIGNAL 36 ACV_GND

37 ACV_GND

ANALOG IN

16 38 STATIC_GND

DV IN 39 STATIC_GND SY-91 (10/10) 4-25 4-26

415236D708 MAZT082H08S0 D710 MAZS082008SO D709 MAZT082H08S0 D706 MAZT082H08S0 D707 MAZT082H08S014D712 MA2S111-(K8).SO D701 MA2SD24008S0 D71363MA2S111-(K8).SO, DSC-P52

COVER

4-3. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS Link SY-91 BOARD (SIDE A) SY-91 BOARD (SIDE B) COMMON NOTE FOR PRINTED WIRING BOARDS WAVEFORMS MOUNTED PARTS LOCATION,

DSC-P52

COVER 4-3. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS THIS NOTE IS COMMON FOR WIRING BOARDS (In addition to this, the necessary note is printed in each block) (For printed wiring boards) • : Uses unleaded solder. • Chip parts. • : Pattern from the side which enables seeing. Transistor Diode (The other layers’ patterns are not indicated) C6544565445333123• Through hole is omitted. • Circled numbers refer to waveforms. BE123321123321212121654• There are a few cases that the part printed on diagram isn’t mounted in this model. 12213412344334• C: panel designation5433452143211221BOARD INFORMATION parts location waveform pattern board name CSP IC (shown on page) (shown on page) number of layers layers not shown ST-82 4-47 – 4 2 and 3 – JK BLOCK – – 1 – – SY-91 4-48 4-4582to 7 IC001, 151, 301, 401, 501, 901 4-35,

DSC-P52 COVER 4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS 4-3. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS MOUNTED PARTS LOCATION

4-3. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS SY-91 (CCD IMAGER, CAMERA A/D CONV., LENS DRIVE, CAMERA DSP, VIDEO AMP, SH DSP, CLK GEN, LCD DRIVE, TIMING GENERATOR,

FRONT CONTROL, AUDIO I/O, DC IN, DC-DC CONVERTER, CONNECTOR) PRINTED WIRING BOARD • : Uses unleaded solder.

• Refer to page 4-35 for common note for printed wiring board.

SY-91 BOARD(SIDE A) D018 CL504 CL505 CL508 R602

CL503 CL506 C604 C601 CL501 CL509 CL502 CL507

D017

C019 C602A K L003 AL010 L008 C020 C018 C603

B A C605 L601 R311R051 R062 C315

R03564R312R031 L302 R032 R033 3 R316 JL307 JL309 C322 R029 Q028 1Q029 R066 R303R030 P R306 R039 R024 R063 C324 C013 R064 6 4R314

Q027

R068 R307 R06713R004 R048 R308 R309 R018 R049JL306 R001 R521 CL513 CL515 R069 R310L004 R017 C314

D004 R317R522 B R318C518 P JL302 2180 178 176 174 172 168 164 160 156 152 145 141 137 133 129 127 125 123 120 C316 1

183 181 177 179 175 167 163 159 155 149 146 142 138 134 126 122 124 121 118 JL303 C317 L501 185 184 190 173 170 166 162 158 153 150 148 143 139 135 131 128 130 117 116 187 182 188 171 169 165 161 157 154 151 147 144 140 136 132 111 113 119 114 189 186 191 192 244 109 110 115 112 FB502 193 194 195 196 105 106 107 108 JL305 9 L005 C513 197 198 199 200 101 102 103 104 JL301 1FB302 201 202 203 204 97 98 99 100 205 206 208 207 94 93 95 96 JL304 FB303 C506 212 209 210 211 241 IC501 245 91 90 89 92 R520 216 215 213 214 87 88 86 85 R518 220 219 218 217 84 83 82 81 IC351 224 223 222 221 80 79 78 77 FB503 R519 C511 228 227 226 225 242 76 75 74 73 R517 232 235 230 229 243 72 71 66 69 R512 R511 234 239 233 231 12 16 20 24 27 31 34 37 41 45 49 51 68 62 67 C306P C902 R509 R510 236 237 10 8 11 15 19 23 28 30 33 38 42 46 50 53 70 64 65 R910 C912 238142614 18 22 26 29 35 39 43 47 55 59 57 61 63 C303 FB906

C R506

R507 B 240357913 17 21 25 32 36 40 44 48 52 54 56 58 60 FB910 10 18 C520 R508 R912 TH351 C508 C509 R503 R908 C502P5R513 R787 C901 Q35234R022 B10 R782 R020 9 R781 C017 1 R785 C359 C01048R905 C903

Q005

11 C784 FB901 R357 C358

Q00958C905 R907C781 P

LND001 C011 R021 R036 R038 CN001 C782

D C904 R906 1-688-215- 11

4 1 16123456789

SY-91 4-39 4-40

L007 L006 L002 R534

Q004 Q007 Q006 8 5

1 L00132323IC502FB50111464R059 R007 C052 R034 1 1L502 C501ECB23R019 1 FB504Q501 R002P R041

Q00223EBC012C R043

R023 D005 C507 C514 R028 Q003 R060 R045 R514 C004 61 60 58 56 54 52 50 48 46 44 42 41 R516 C005 R011 62 59 57 55 53 51 49 47 45 43 39 40 C517 64 63 37 38 D009 R515 R012 66 65 35 36R525 C006 68 67 33 34 F007 R013CL511 C515 70 69 31 32 R501 C007 72 71 IC001 29 30 R014 C022 R788 R789 CL510 74 73 27 2876 75 25 26 R531 C008 R015 D019C503 78 77 23 24 R502 R532 R016 80 79357911 13 15 17 19 22 C009 K A1246810 12 14 16 18 20 21 16 9 R505 R528 R044 R504 C519 R009 R010 R042 R070 R008 R025

IC781 C504 R533 R027 C016

R530 C050R026 Q014 C014 R52918C024 R050 D001C015 R037 FB781 CL51464R058 CL51213R061 C510 C512 C301 R911 C302 R065 C048 115 105 70 63 59 56 53 49 45 42 38 36 32 28 24 20 17 14 1084304 303 X781 C921

Q030 1

222 71 65 64 61 57 55 51 47 43 40 37 30 26 22 18 16 12962282 302 76 74 67 69 66 60 54 50 46 41 35 34 31 27 23 19 13731284 280 285 R313 4 L301 79 78 73 72 68 62 58 52 48 44 39 33 29 25 21 15 11 5 286 288 287 278 276 49 72 38 37 34 32 29 C325 IC60182 80 77 75 283 281 275 274 87 84 83 81 279 277 272 271 R315 48 73 36 35 33 31 28 27 C304 C049 89 88 86 85 273 269 270 268 C323 R909 C305 893 91 92 90 C327 57 74 69 9 30 52 25 26 R904 96 94 97 95 260 256 263 261 C328 R601 R901 R30156 70 71 13 47 40 46 39 100 98 101 99 254 252 259 258 C326 R902 103 102 106 289 250 248 257 255

IC901 54 50 58 68 12 8 15 41 42 Q905 C307 R302107 104 111 108 IC301 245 253 249 251

6 4 110 109 112 113 241 243 246 247 C308 44 43 65 66 11 14 16 53 51 114 116 118 120 235 237 242 244 C309 1 Q9063 117 119 122 123 229 233 239 240 FB3015 1 63 64 55 7 10 20 18 121 124 125 127 290 291 236 23864126 131 295 294 292 293 232 234 C3203460 61 62 22 24 17 19 P225 227 230 23113130 137 136 134 208 223 226 228 2 67 6 59 23 21 45 R903 C310 135 141 140 138 132 129 151 157 161 167 171 175 178 183 188 192 196 199 206 210 218 221 224 FB905 C312 C311 139 143 145 146 144 149 153 160 163 169 174 173 177 181 185 190 194 198 203 216 214 219 220 R305 142 299 147 150 152 155 158 164 166 170 180 184 187 189 195 197 201 205 209 211 213 217 301 266 298 148 154 156 159 162 165 168 172 176 179 182 186 191 193 200 202 204 207 212 215 300 R304 C313PPC318 C321 R358 C361

D705

A K

P

296 297 133 128 265 267 262 264BCEBC1 E,

DSC-P52 COVER 4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS 4-3. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS MOUNTED PARTS LOCATION

• Refer to page 4-35 for common note for printed wiring board. • : Uses unleaded solder.

SY-91 BOARD(SIDE B) Q026

A K R70415

D702 R705 6 4

R706 CN705 CN704 CL701

D015 1 3

312310 1 12 1 Q017 RB401KAR71674

Q703 D D70353C046 G S

X402 CL402 CL401 C023 AQ010 Q013 R440 21 1 C025 DK A CL405 C407 C02112

D704 60 58 55 52 51 48 45 43 IC003 C045 C037 G S CN201 CL4068563 61 59 56 53 50 47 44 41 40 R45343C027

65 64 62 57 54 49 46 42 39 38 R047 R04612C033 20 2 IC402

D020

R052 R054 L009 68 67 66 37 36 35 C038 D C4011471 70 69 34 33 32 6 DAGS

D204 R460

73 74 72 IC401 31 30 29GSCL407 76 77 75 26 27 28 1 R056 Q022 D013C408 Q015 78 7926912 15 22 24 25 C041R057131P8014710 14 17 19 21 23 R422 3 Q021 Q025 1 R41935811 13 16 18 20452346R209 Q403 R410 R401233264Q011 C209 R403 Q401 F005 R421 1 Q402 B R214 C208 C405 R456 R801 R40216R210 R211 R803 R457 R40913C819 C813 F0013 1 F003 FB701L202 A 36 CL803 CL403 253446R003R822 C001 C0024124 R005Q801 R821 37 C821 D003 FB70214 R823

IC201 L801 R804Q351 13 C822

CL802 R824 C357 R354ECB58A15 IC801 12 C823 R718 C802 R810 3 C805 16 C003 D707 C355 C351 C806 13 AC211 C210 2 1R355 C807 48 12 C812KA85D351 R213 17 1 R820 FB703

IC205 D803

C820C4L351 R235 R225 R154 C814KAD706132C218 L805R227 R818R155 C8181 C163C219 R228 R817 36 D710 R220 C154 C162 25 K C808 A R811 R151 R707 C1747 1 L804 6 4Q802 37 24 C151 C169 19

IC203 1 3FB904 L163 C172 R805 R806

C171 IC802 8 14 FB903 C170 L802A C180 20 D701 C701 C181 R708 C217 C216 R711 18 1 R161 2 48 R234 R232 R712R223 R709 1R162 2 R713 R710 R224 R720 R721 1 12 R229 CL801 C825 A Q702C179 1-688-215- 111 10D238

CN706 1 39 CN702

98765432116 4-41 4-42 SY-91

CN202

2 1

B

C353 R356 C354 FB351 C356 B R351 C352 C360

Q202

C220 D205BCER230 C223 R231 R212 R208 R233 R226 C204ECBC224 C228 R236 C213 Q204 P C225 L205

IC204

L206 9 16 P C227 C226 FB902 B L901 C907 L902

B

C908 L903 C203 C206 C207 R217 CN203 B R216 B C202 R207 C909 L203 37 36 25 8 124 L152 C205 Q205BCEC152 IC202 L401 C157 R152 C153 B R442 C414 C160 13C156 C168 R153 C155 48 12 R450 R443C403 C41564C159 A9 B9 C9 D9 E9 F9 G9 H9 J9 R451 R444 C416 Q701 A8 B8 C8 D8 E8 F8 G8 H8 J8 C158 1 R452 R445 C417 C164 A7 B7 C7 G7 H7 J7 C161 R42613A6 B6 H6 J6 R431 C165 IC151 C166

D401 R429

A5 B5 H5 J5 D801 R802 C410 C411 C178 A4 B4 H4 J4 R156 R420 R427 R430 R433 A3 B3 C3 G3 H3 J3 C801 R435 C412 A2 B2 C2 D2 E2 F2 G2 H2 J2 C167 R423 A1 C1 D1 E1 F1 G1 H1 R406 C402 J1 C173 C409 R413 C413 R157 C177 R414 C175 R809C176 R459 R415 R159 R160 R158 C804

D802 R416

C817 R405 3 Q704

A

1 R417C803 R807 R812 C418 C404 R815 R813 C811 C4194 6 C406 R411 R816 R814 R441 R418 R454 C810 R458 C815 R819 R428 R434 1 X401 3 RB403 C816 C826 R432 R715 C824 R827 L012 D012 R828 L803 R006 D714KAR719 D002 C035 D011 R703 C036 C053Q001 R702 R826 C704 FB801 C030 C031

D708 D709 FB704 D712 1

C703 D7113 1 D010 3 Q01646231R717 LF701 R071 R055 C040 C039 C026 R05345R701 FB705 D713 C029 C047 2 38 Q020 D016 C702 1 CN701 39 L011 R714 Q024C044

D014 IC004

321C05445C034

D Q019 15 4 C043GS3B34 5 Q012 1 Q018 C051

C032 C042 Q023 C028

B B D G S A

2 3 1,

DSC-P52

COVER SY-91 BOARD SIDE A SY-91 BOARD SIDE B 4-4. WAVEFORMS

SY-91 BOARD

1 IC351 1,2,3 6 IC401 wl (R428) qa IC781 qh qh IC801 rj REC REC/PB REC/PB REC/PB 7.2 Vp-p 3.1 Vp-p 390 mVp-p 100 nsec 8.2 Vp-p 123 µsec 10MHz 2HH2IC351 4,5,6,7,8 7 IC401 ta (R440) qs IC801 w; qj IC801 rk REC REC/PB REC/PB REC/PB 7.2 Vp-p 2.4 Vp-p 470 mVp-p 8.2 Vp-p 123 µsec 30.5 µsec 2H 32.768KHzH3IC351 qs 8 IC781 2 qd IC801 ws qk IC802 1 REC REC/PB REC/PB REC/PB 2.9Vp-p 4.0 Vp-p 4.7 Vp-p 8.2 Vp-p H 41.4 nsec 2H 24.15MHz 37 nsec 27MHz 4 IC351 qk 9 IC781 4 REC REC/PB qf IC801 wf ql IC802 wh REC/PB REC/PB 5.2 Vp-p 3.8 Vp-p 4.6 Vp-p 2H 2.2 Vp-p 41.4 nsec 20.6 nsec 85.5 nsec 24.15MHz 48.5MHz 11.7MHz 5 Q352E0IC781 qa qg IC801 rh w; IC802 rk REC REC/PB REC/PB REC/PB 430 mVp-p 2.9Vp-p

V

450 mVp-p 5.2 Vp-p 123 µsec 37 nsec

H

27MHz SY-91 4-45 4-46,

DSC-P52 COVER 4-3. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS

4-5. MOUNTED PARTS LOCATION no mark : side A * mark : side B

SY-91 BOARD

* C001 B-2 * C202 C-5 C508 C-2 D019 A-3 * L152 D-4 R015 B-3 * R229 D-6 R509 C-2 R909 C-4 * C002 B-2 * C203 C-5 C509 C-2 * D020 A-1 * L163 D-4 R016 B-3 * R230 D-7 R510 C-2 R910 C-4 * C003 C-2 * C204 B-6 C510 C-3 * D204 B-7 * L202 B-5 R017 B-2 * R231 D-7 R511 C-2 R911 C-3 C004 B-2 * C205 C-4 C511 C-2 * D205 B-7 * L203 C-5 R018 B-2 * R232 D-6 R512 C-2 R912 C-3 C005 B-2 * C206 C-5 C512 C-3 * D351 C-8 * L205 D-6 R019 C-2 * R233 D-7 R513 C-2 C006 B-2 * C207 B-5 C513 B-2 * D401 B-4 * L206 D-6 R020 C-2 * R234 D-7 R514 C-2 * RB401 A-4 C007 B-3 * C208 B-6 C514 B-2 * D701 D-2 L301 C-4 R021 D-2 * R235 C-7 R515 C-2 * RB403 A-3 C008 B-3 * C209 B-6 C515 B-2 * D702 A-5 L302 A-4 R022 C-2 * R236 D-6 R516 C-2 C009 B-3 * C210 C-6 C517 B-2 * D703 A-5 * L351 C-7 R023 D-2 R301 C-4 R517 C-2 TH351 C-7 C010 C-2 * C211 C-7 C518 B-2 * D704 A-5 * L401 A-4 R024 A-3 R302 A-4 R518 C-2 C011 D-2 * C213 C-6 C519 B-3 D705 D-9 L501 B-2 R025 A-3 R303 A-5 R519 C-2 * X401 B-3 C012 A-2 * C216 D-6 C520 C-2 * D706 C-2 L502 C-2 R026 B-3 R304 A-5 R520 C-2 * X402 A-4 C013 A-3 * C217 D-7 C601 A-4 * D707 C-2 L601 A-4 R027 A-3 R305 A-4 R521 B-2 X781 D-3 C014 A-3 * C218 C-7 C602 A-4 * D708 D-2 * L801 B-4 R028 B-2 R306 A-5 R522 B-2 C015 A-3 * C219 C-7 C603 A-4 * D709 C-2 * L802 D-3 R029 A-2 R307 B-5 R525 B-2 C016 A-3 * C220 D-7 C604 A-3 * D710 C-2 * L803 C-2 R030 A-2 R308 B-5 R528 B-3 C017 C-2 * C223 C-7 C605 A-3 * D711 C-2 * L804 C-3 R031 A-3 R309 B-5 R529 B-3 C018 A-3 * C224 C-6 * C701 D-2 * D712 B-2 * L805 C-2 R032 A-2 R310 B-5 R530 B-3 C019 A-3 * C225 D-6 * C702 D-2 * D713 C-2 * L901 D-5 R033 A-2 R311 A-5 R531 B-3 C020 A-2 * C226 D-6 * C703 C-2 * D714 A-2 * L902 D-5 R034 D-2 R312 A-5 R532 B-3 * C021 A-2 * C227 D-6 * C704 D-2 * D801 B-4 * L903 D-5 R035 A-2 R313 A-4 R533 B-3 C022 A-2 * C228 D-6 C781 D-3 * D802 D-3 R036 D-2 R314 A-3 R534 C-2 * C023 A-2 C301 B-3 C782 D-3 * D803 C-3 * LF701 C-2 R037 A-3 R315 A-4 R601 A-4 C024 B-3 C302 B-3 C784 D-3 R038 D-2 R316 A-5 R602 A-3 * C025 A-2 C303 C-3 * C801 B-4 * F001 B-2 * Q001 B-2 R039 A-2 R317 B-5 * R701 D-2 * C026 B-2 C304 C-4 * C802 C-4 * F003 B-2 Q002 D-2 R041 A-2 R318 B-5 * R702 D-2 * C027 A-2 C305 C-4 * C803 D-3 * F005 B-2 Q003 B-2 R042 A-3 * R351 C-8 * R703 D-2 * C028 A-1 C306 C-4 * C804 C-3 F007 D-2 Q004 D-2 R043 A-2 * R354 C-8 * R704 A-4 * C029 B-2 C307 C-4 * C805 C-3 Q005 D-2 R044 A-3 * R355 C-8 * R705 A-4 * C030 B-2 C308 A-4 * C806 C-3 FB301 A-4 Q006 C-2 R045 A-2 * R356 C-8 * R706 A-4 * C031 A-2 C309 A-4 * C807 C-3 FB302 B-5 Q007 D-2 * R046 A-2 R357 D-5 * R707 C-9 * C032 B-1 C310 A-4 * C808 C-3 FB303 B-5 Q009 D-2 * R047 A-2 R358 C-7 * R708 D-3 * C033 A-1 C311 C-4 * C810 D-3 * FB351 C-8 * Q010 A-2 R048 B-3 * R401 B-4 * R709 D-3 * C034 B-1 C312 A-4 * C811 B-3 FB501 C-2 * Q011 B-2 R049 B-3 * R402 B-3 * R710 D-3 * C035 B-2 C313 A-5 * C812 C-2 FB502 B-2 * Q012 B-1 R050 A-3 * R403 B-4 * R711 D-3 * C036 B-2 C314 B-5 * C813 B-3 FB503 C-2 * Q013 A-1 R051 A-3 * R405 B-3 * R712 D-3 * C037 A-1 C315 A-5 * C814 C-3 FB504 C-2 Q014 B-3 * R052 A-2 * R406 A-4 * R713 D-3 * C038 A-2 C316 B-5 * C815 C-3 * FB701 B-1 * Q015 B-1 * R053 A-2 * R409 B-3 * R714 B-1 * C039 B-2 C317 B-5 * C816 B-3 * FB702 B-2 * Q016 A-2 * R054 A-2 * R410 B-3 * R715 A-3 * C040 A-2 C318 C-5 * C817 C-3 * FB703 C-2 * Q017 A-1 * R055 B-2 * R411 B-3 * R716 A-4 * C041 B-1 C320 A-4 * C818 C-3 * FB704 C-2 * Q018 B-1 * R056 B-2 * R413 A-4 * R717 C-2 * C042 B-1 C321 B-5 * C819 B-3 * FB705 C-2 * Q019 A-1 * R057 B-2 * R414 B-4 * R718 C-2 * C043 A-1 C322 A-4 * C820 C-2 FB781 D-3 * Q020 B-2 R058 A-3 * R415 B-3 * R719 C-2 * C044 B-1 C323 A-4 * C821 B-2 * FB801 C-2 * Q021 B-2 R059 B-2 * R416 B-3 * R720 D-3 * C045 A-1 C324 A-3 * C822 C-2 FB901 D-5 * Q022 B-2 R060 A-2 * R417 B-3 * R721 D-3 * C046 A-1 C325 A-4 * C823 C-2 * FB902 D-5 * Q023 A-1 R061 A-3 * R418 B-3 R781 C-3 * C047 A-2 C326 A-4 * C824 D-2 * FB903 D-5 * Q024 B-1 R062 A-4 * R419 B-4 R782 C-3 C048 A-3 C327 A-4 * C825 D-2 * FB904 D-5 * Q025 B-1 R063 A-3 * R420 B-4 R785 C-3 C049 A-4 C328 A-4 * C826 D-3 FB905 C-4 * Q026 A-1 R064 A-3 * R421 B-4 R787 C-3 C050 B-3 * C351 C-8 C901 C-5 FB906 C-4 Q027 B-3 R065 A-3 * R422 B-3 R788 D-3 * C051 A-1 * C352 C-8 C902 C-4 FB910 C-4 Q028 A-3 R066 A-4 * R423 A-4 R789 C-3 C052 B-2 * C353 C-8 C903 D-5 Q029 A-4 R067 B-2 * R426 B-4 * R801 B-4 * C053 A-2 * C354 C-8 C904 D-5 IC001 A-3 Q030 A-4 R068 B-2 * R427 B-4 * R802 B-4 * C054 B-1 * C355 C-8 C905 D-5 * IC003 A-2 * Q202 B-7 R069 B-3 * R428 B-3 * R803 B-4 * C151 C-4 * C356 C-8 * C907 D-5 * IC004 A-1 * Q204 C-6 R070 B-3 * R429 A-4 * R804 B-3 * C152 C-4 * C357 C-8 * C908 D-5 * IC151 D-4 * Q205 B-4 * R071 B-2 * R430 A-4 * R805 D-3 * C153 C-4 C358 D-5 * C909 D-5 * IC201 B-6 * Q351 C-8 * R151 C-4 * R431 A-4 * R806 D-3 * C154 C-4 C359 C-7 C912 C-5 * IC202 C-4 Q352 C-7 * R152 D-4 * R432 A-3 * R807 D-3 * C155 C-4 * C360 C-8 C921 C-3 * IC203 D-6 * Q401 B-4 * R153 D-4 * R433 A-4 * R809 C-3 * C156 D-4 C361 C-7 * IC204 D-6 * Q402 B-3 * R154 C-4 * R434 A-3 * R810 C-3 * C157 D-4 * C401 B-4 CN001 D-3 * IC205 C-9 * Q403 B-4 * R155 C-4 * R435 A-4 * R811 C-3 * C158 C-4 * C402 A-4 * CN201 A-7 IC301 B-4 Q501 C-2 * R156 C-4 * R440 A-3 * R812 B-3 * C159 D-4 * C403 B-4 * CN202 C-9 IC351 C-8 * Q701 A-4 * R157 C-4 * R441 A-3 * R813 C-3 * C160 D-4 * C404 B-3 * CN203 B-5 * IC401 B-3 * Q702 D-2 * R158 C-3 * R442 A-4 * R814 C-3 * C161 C-4 * C405 B-4 * CN701 C-2 * IC402 A-4 * Q703 A-2 * R159 D-3 * R443 A-4 * R815 C-3 * C162 C-4 * C406 B-3 * CN702 D-2 IC501 C-3 * Q704 D-3 * R160 D-3 * R444 A-4 * R816 C-3 * C163 C-4 * C407 A-4 * CN704 A-3 IC502 C-2 * Q801 B-4 * R161 D-3 * R445 A-4 * R817 C-3 * C164 D-4 * C408 B-4 * CN705 A-3 IC601 A-4 * Q802 C-3 * R162 D-4 * R450 A-4 * R818 C-3 * C165 D-4 * C409 A-4 * CN706 D-3 IC781 C-3 Q905 C-4 * R207 B-5 * R451 A-4 * R819 C-3 * C166 C-4 * C410 A-4 * IC801 C-3 Q906 C-4 * R208 B-7 * R452 A-4 * R820 C-2 * C167 C-4 * C411 A-4 D001 A-3 * IC802 D-2 * R209 B-6 * R453 A-3 * R821 B-3 * C168 D-4 * C412 A-4 * D002 C-2 IC901 D-4 R001 B-3 * R210 B-7 * R454 A-3 * R822 B-2 * C169 C-3 * C413 A-4 * D003 B-2 R002 A-2 * R211 B-6 * R456 B-3 * R823 B-2 * C170 D-4 * C414 A-4 D004 B-2 L001 A-2 * R003 B-2 * R212 B-7 * R457 B-3 * R824 C-2 * C171 D-3 * C415 A-4 D005 C-2 L002 A-1 R004 B-2 * R213 C-7 * R458 B-3 * R826 D-2 * C172 D-3 * C416 A-4 D009 A-2 L003 A-1 * R005 B-2 * R214 B-7 * R459 B-3 * R827 C-2 * C173 C-4 * C417 A-4 * D010 B-2 L004 B-1 * R006 B-2 * R216 B-5 * R460 B-4 * R828 B-2 * C174 C-3 * C418 A-3 * D011 B-2 L005 B-2 R007 B-2 * R217 B-5 R501 B-3 R901 C-4 * C175 C-3 * C419 A-3 * D012 B-2 L006 B-1 R008 B-3 * R220 C-6 R502 C-3 R902 C-4 * C176 D-3 C501 B-2 * D013 B-1 L007 A-1 R009 B-3 * R223 D-6 R503 C-3 R903 C-4 * C177 D-3 C502 C-2 * D014 B-1 L008 A-2 R010 B-3 * R224 D-6 R504 C-3 R904 C-4 * C178 D-4 C503 C-3 * D015 A-1 * L009 A-1 R011 B-2 * R225 C-6 R505 C-3 R905 D-5 * C179 D-4 C504 C-3 * D016 A-2 L010 A-1 R012 B-2 * R226 D-6 R506 C-2 R906 D-5 * C180 D-3 C506 B-2 D017 A-2 * L011 A-1 R013 B-2 * R227 C-6 R507 C-2 R907 D-5 * C181 D-4 C507 C-2 D018 A-2 * L012 B-2 R014 B-3 * R228 C-6 R508 C-2 R908 C-5

SY-91 4-48E

,

DSC-P52

COVER SECTION 5 SY-91

REPAIR PARTS LIST

5-2. ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST NOTE: • Due to standardization, replacements in the • COILS When indicating parts by reference number, parts list may be different from the parts uH: µH please include the board name. specified in the diagrams or the components • RESISTORS used on the set. All resistors are in ohms. The components identified by mark 0 or • -XX, -X mean standardized parts, so they may METAL: metal-film resistor dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. have some difference from the original one. METAL OXIDE: Metal Oxide-film resistor Replace only with part number specified. • Items marked “*” are not stocked since they F: nonflammable Les composants identifiés par une marque are seldom required for routine service. Some • SEMICONDUCTORS 0 sont critiques pour la sécurité. delay should be anticipated when ordering these In each case, u: µ, for example: Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portantµµle numéro spécifié.items. uA...: A... , uPA... , PA... , • CAPACITORS: uPB... , µPB... , uPC... , µPC... , uF: µF uPD..., µPD... Ref. No. Part No. Description Ref. No. Part No. Description A-7078-686-A SY-91 BOARD, COMPLETE C043 1-137-710-11 CERAMIC CHIP 10uF 20% 6.3V ********************* C044 1-137-710-11 CERAMIC CHIP 10uF 20% 6.3V (IC351 is not included in this COMPLETE) C045 1-137-710-11 CERAMIC CHIP 10uF 20% 6.3V (Including IC301 (HM (3M SA) BOARD)) C046 1-113-682-11 TANTAL. CHIP 33uF 20% 10V (Including IC901 (CH-122 (3M) BOARD)) C048 1-107-823-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.47uF 10% 16V < CAPACITOR > C049 1-164-299-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.22uF 10% 25V C050 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C001 1-107-819-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.022uF 10% 16V C052 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C002 1-107-819-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.022uF 10% 16V C053 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V C003 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V C152 1-127-760-11 CERAMIC CHIP 4.7uF 10% 6.3V C004 1-164-677-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.033uF 10% 16V C005 1-164-677-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.033uF 10% 16V C153 1-127-988-81 CERAMIC CHIP 15000PF 10% 16V C154 1-125-837-91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 6.3V C006 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C155 1-127-988-81 CERAMIC CHIP 15000PF 10% 16V C007 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C156 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C008 1-164-677-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.033uF 10% 16V C157 1-137-710-11 CERAMIC CHIP 10uF 20% 6.3V C009 1-162-966-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.0022uF 10% 50V C010 1-107-819-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.022uF 10% 16V C158 1-127-988-81 CERAMIC CHIP 15000PF 10% 16V C159 1-165-908-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 10V C012 1-164-677-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.033uF 10% 16V C160 1-165-908-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 10V C013 1-162-966-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.0022uF 10% 50V C161 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V C014 1-164-874-11 CERAMIC CHIP 100PF 5% 50V C162 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V C015 1-164-874-11 CERAMIC CHIP 100PF 5% 50V C016 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V C163 1-127-988-81 CERAMIC CHIP 15000PF 10% 16V C164 1-165-908-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 10V C017 1-107-819-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.022uF 10% 16V C165 1-165-908-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 10V C018 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C166 1-117-863-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.47uF 10% 6.3V C019 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C167 1-125-837-91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 6.3V C020 1-164-677-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.033uF 10% 16V C021 1-107-682-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 16V C168 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C169 1-117-863-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.47uF 10% 6.3V C022 1-164-677-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.033uF 10% 16V C170 1-135-259-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20% 6.3V C023 1-107-682-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 16V C171 1-165-908-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 10V C024 1-127-715-91 CERAMIC CHIP 0.22uF 10% 16V C173 1-125-837-91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 6.3V C025 1-165-908-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 10V C026 1-162-964-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.001uF 10% 50V C174 1-162-964-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.001uF 10% 50V C175 1-127-760-11 CERAMIC CHIP 4.7uF 10% 6.3V C028 1-137-710-11 CERAMIC CHIP 10uF 20% 6.3V C176 1-119-923-81 CERAMIC CHIP 0.047uF 10% 10V C029 1-137-710-11 CERAMIC CHIP 10uF 20% 6.3V C177 1-119-923-81 CERAMIC CHIP 0.047uF 10% 10V C030 1-165-908-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 10V C178 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C031 1-165-908-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 10V C032 1-165-908-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 10V C179 1-104-851-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20% 10V C180 1-117-863-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.47uF 10% 6.3V C033 1-165-908-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 10V C202 1-113-682-11 TANTAL. CHIP 33uF 20% 10V C034 1-165-908-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 10V C203 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C035 1-125-889-91 CERAMIC CHIP 2.2uF 10% 10V C204 1-115-467-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.22uF 10% 10V C036 1-100-503-11 CERAMIC CHIP 4.7uF 10% 10V C037 1-165-596-11 CERAMIC CHIP 2.2uF 35V C205 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V C206 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V C038 1-164-336-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.33uF 25V C207 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V C039 1-107-819-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.022uF 10% 16V C208 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V C040 1-137-710-11 CERAMIC CHIP 10uF 20% 6.3V C209 1-125-837-91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 6.3V C041 1-137-710-11 CERAMIC CHIP 10uF 20% 6.3V C042 1-137-710-11 CERAMIC CHIP 10uF 20% 6.3V 5-7,

DSC-P52 SY-91

Ref. No. Part No. Description Ref. No. Part No. Description C210 1-162-967-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.0033uF 10% 50V C411 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C211 1-164-677-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.033uF 10% 16V C412 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V C213 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C413 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C215 1-164-937-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.001uF 10% 50V C418 1-117-746-81 CERAMIC CHIP 8PF 16V C216 1-107-819-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.022uF 10% 16V C419 1-117-747-11 CERAMIC CHIP 9PF 16V C217 1-107-819-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.022uF 10% 16V C501 1-127-895-91 TANTAL. CHIP 22uF 20% 4V C219 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V C502 1-117-919-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20% 6.3V C220 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V C503 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C223 1-125-837-91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 6.3V C504 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C224 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C506 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C225 1-117-919-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20% 6.3V C507 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C226 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C508 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C227 1-117-919-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20% 6.3V C509 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C228 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C510 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C301 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C511 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C302 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C512 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C303 1-127-895-91 TANTAL. CHIP 22uF 20% 4V C513 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C304 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V C514 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C305 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C515 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C306 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C517 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C307 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C518 1-127-895-91 TANTAL. CHIP 22uF 20% 4V C308 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C519 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C309 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C601 1-125-837-91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 6.3V C310 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C602 1-119-750-11 TANTAL. CHIP 22uF 20% 6.3V C311 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C603 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C312 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C604 1-127-895-91 TANTAL. CHIP 22uF 20% 4V C313 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C605 1-127-569-91 TANTAL. CHIP 100uF 20% 4V C314 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C701 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V C315 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C702 1-119-750-11 TANTAL. CHIP 22uF 20% 6.3V C316 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C703 1-162-927-11 CERAMIC CHIP 100PF 5% 50V C317 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C704 1-125-891-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.47uF 10% 10V C318 1-117-919-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20% 6.3V C782 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C320 1-127-895-91 TANTAL. CHIP 22uF 20% 4V C784 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C321 1-117-919-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20% 6.3V C801 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C322 1-117-919-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20% 6.3V * C802 1-165-877-91 TANTAL. CHIP 33uF 20% 6.3V C323 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C803 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C324 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C804 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C325 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C805 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V C326 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C806 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V C327 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C807 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V C328 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C810 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C351 1-115-340-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.22uF 10% 25V C812 1-113-986-11 TANTAL. CHIP 2.2uF 20% 25V C352 1-113-992-11 TANTAL. CHIP 3.3uF 20% 35V C813 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V C353 1-119-751-11 TANTAL. CHIP 22uF 20% 16V C814 1-164-739-11 CERAMIC CHIP 560PF 5% 50V C354 1-100-505-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V C815 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C355 1-115-340-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.22uF 10% 25V C816 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C356 1-164-939-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.0022uF 10% 50V C817 1-165-897-11 TANTAL. CHIP 22uF 20% 10V C357 1-100-505-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V C818 1-164-357-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.001uF 5% 50V C358 1-100-505-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V C819 1-113-994-11 TANTAL. CHIP 6.8uF 20% 16V C359 1-100-505-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V C820 1-164-388-91 CERAMIC CHIP 270PF 5% 50V C361 1-164-850-11 CERAMIC CHIP 10PF 0.50PF 50V C821 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C402 1-164-941-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.0047uF 10% 16V C822 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C403 1-110-569-11 TANTAL. CHIP 47uF 20% 6.3V C823 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C404 1-164-931-11 CERAMIC CHIP 100PF 10% 50V C824 1-127-573-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 16V C405 1-164-937-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.001uF 10% 50V C825 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C406 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C826 1-127-573-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 16V C407 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C901 1-113-992-11 TANTAL. CHIP 3.3uF 20% 35V C408 1-127-578-91 TANTAL. CHIP 3.3uF 20% 6.3V C902 1-164-004-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 25V C409 1-164-939-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.0022uF 10% 50V C903 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V C410 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C907 1-110-569-11 TANTAL. CHIP 47uF 20% 6.3V 5-8,

DSC-P52 SY-91

Ref. No. Part No. Description Ref. No. Part No. Description C908 1-110-569-11 TANTAL. CHIP 47uF 20% 6.3V < FERRITE BEAD > C909 1-104-752-11 TANTAL. CHIP 33uF 20% 6.3V C912 1-119-751-11 TANTAL. CHIP 22uF 20% 16V FB019 1-469-581-21 FERRITE 0uH FB301 1-414-921-11 FERRITE 0uH < CONNECTOR > FB302 1-414-921-11 FERRITE 0uH FB303 1-414-921-11 FERRITE 0uH CN001 1-573-290-21 PIN, CONNECTOR (1.5MM) (SMD)4P FB351 1-414-228-11 FERRITE 0uH CN201 1-794-764-11 CONNECTOR, FPC (ZIF) 21P CN202 1-794-375-21 PIN, CONNECTOR 2P FB501 1-414-921-11 FERRITE 0uH CN203 1-816-655-11 FFC/FPC CONNECTOR (LIF) 8P FB502 1-414-921-11 FERRITE 0uH CN701 1-817-544-11 CONNECTOR, FPC (ZIF) 39P FB503 1-414-921-11 FERRITE 0uH FB504 1-500-284-21 FERRITE 0uH CN702 1-817-544-11 CONNECTOR, FPC (ZIF) 39P FB701 1-469-185-11 FERRITE 0uH CN704 1-816-644-11 FFC/FPC CONNECTOR (LIF) 12P CN705 1-794-767-31 FFC/FPC CONNECTOR (LIF) 10P FB702 1-469-185-11 FERRITE 0uH CN706 1-794-767-31 FFC/FPC CONNECTOR (LIF) 10P FB703 1-414-228-11 FERRITE 0uH FB704 1-500-284-21 FERRITE 0uH < DIODE > FB705 1-500-284-21 FERRITE 0uH FB781 1-414-921-11 FERRITE 0uH D001 8-719-073-01 DIODE MA111-(K8).S0 D002 8-719-073-01 DIODE MA111-(K8).S0 FB801 1-500-283-11 FERRITE 0uH D003 8-719-073-01 DIODE MA111-(K8).S0 FB901 1-234-576-21 FILTER, CHIP EMI D004 8-719-056-23 DIODE MA2S111-(K8).SO FB902 1-414-228-11 FERRITE 0uH D005 8-719-158-49 DIODE MA8120-TX FB903 1-414-228-11 FERRITE 0uH FB904 1-414-228-11 FERRITE 0uH D009 6-500-619-01 DIODE RB520S-40TE61 D010 6-500-619-01 DIODE RB520S-40TE61 FB905 1-469-082-21 FERRITE 0uH D011 6-500-619-01 DIODE RB520S-40TE61 FB906 1-469-082-21 FERRITE 0uH D012 6-500-619-01 DIODE RB520S-40TE61 D013 6-500-619-01 DIODE RB520S-40TE61 < IC > D014 6-500-619-01 DIODE RB520S-40TE61 IC001 6-703-410-01 IC FA7712Q-D-TE2 D015 8-719-081-34 DIODE RB160M-30TR IC003 6-702-371-01 IC XC61CC1502NR D016 6-500-619-01 DIODE RB520S-40TE61 IC004 6-700-429-01 IC S-8321ADMP-DND-T2 D017 8-719-085-69 DIODE 015AZ6.2-Z(TPL3) IC151 6-703-734-01 IC AN12908A-VB D018 8-719-056-23 DIODE MA2S111-(K8).SO IC201 8-759-337-40 IC NJM2904V(TE2) D019 8-719-085-69 DIODE 015AZ6.2-Z(TPL3) IC202 6-701-954-01 IC BD6752KV-E2 D020 8-719-069-29 DIODE RB520S-30TE61 IC203 8-759-681-42 IC NJM12902V(TE2) D204 8-719-073-01 DIODE MA111-(K8).S0 IC204 6-702-155-01 IC BH2223FV-E2 D205 8-719-075-62 DIODE 1SS401(TE85L) IC205 6-701-956-01 IC LB1938T-TLM-E D351 8-719-056-23 DIODE MA2S111-(K8).SO IC301 A-7078-644-A HM (3M SA) BOARD, COMPLETE D401 8-719-027-76 DIODE 1SS357-TPH3 IC351 A-796-308-A CCD BLOCK (CCD IMAGER) D701 6-500-619-01 DIODE RB520S-40TE61 IC401 6-803-134-01 IC MB89097LGA-G-157-ER D702 8-719-064-07 DIODE SML-310LTT86 IC402 6-703-060-01 IC S-8425AABPA-TF-G D703 6-500-287-01 DIODE SML-512MWT86 IC501 Note IC HJ93D1702LPZ D704 8-719-060-92 DIODE SML-311YTT86 IC502 6-702-923-01 ICAK6417CH-E2 D705 8-719-064-07 DIODE SML-310LTT86 IC601 6-700-428-01 IC NJM2574RB1(TE2) D706 8-719-075-15 DIODE MAZT082H08S0 IC781 6-700-962-01 IC SM8720AV-E2 D707 8-719-075-15 DIODE MAZT082H08S0 IC801 6-702-491-01 IC AN12580A-BB D708 8-719-075-15 DIODE MAZT082H08S0 IC802 8-759-833-18 IC CM7021L3-E2 D709 8-719-075-15 DIODE MAZT082H08S0 IC901 A-7078-599-A CH-122 (3M) BOARD, COMPLETE D710 8-719-056-61 DIODE MAZS082008SO < COIL > D711 8-719-056-61 DIODE MAZS082008SO D712 8-719-056-23 DIODE MA2S111-(K8).SO L001 1-456-135-11 INDUCTOR 4.7uH D713 8-719-056-23 DIODE MA2S111-(K8).SO L002 1-456-137-11 INDUCTOR 22uH D803 8-719-084-47 DIODE 1SV290(TPL3) L003 1-419-627-21 INDUCTOR 10uH L004 1-456-017-11 INDUCTOR 100uH < FUSE > L005 1-424-846-11 INDUCTOR 0uH 0F001 1-576-716-11 FUSE 2A/24V 0F003 1-576-716-11 FUSE 2A/24V 0F005 1-576-716-11 FUSE 2A/24V Be sure to read “Precautions upon replacing CCD imager” 0F007 1-576-716-11 FUSE 2A/24V on page 4-8 when changing the CCD imager. Note : Note : Note : The components identified by Les composants identifiés par Part number is not fixed yet. It will be notified Supplement when it mark 0 or dotted line with mark une marque 0 sont critiques fixed. 0 are critical for safety. pour la sécurité. Replace only with part number Ne les remplacer que par une 5-9 specified. pièce portant le numéro spécifié.,

DSC-P52 SY-91

Ref. No. Part No. Description Ref. No. Part No. Description L006 1-456-159-11 INDUCTOR 22uH Q027 8-729-427-70 TRANSISTOR HN1A01FU-TE85R L007 1-456-137-11 INDUCTOR 22uH Q028 8-729-042-26 TRANSISTOR 2SB1462J-QR(K8).SO L008 1-456-159-11 INDUCTOR 22uH Q029 8-729-053-54 TRANSISTOR N1A01FE-Y/GR(TPLR3) L009 1-469-757-21 INDUCTOR 10uH Q030 8-729-037-52 TRANSISTOR 2SD2216J-QR(K8).SO L010 1-419-311-21 INDUCTOR 100uH Q202 8-729-037-52 TRANSISTOR 2SD2216J-QR(K8).SO L011 1-469-546-21 INDUCTOR 0.56uH Q204 8-729-037-52 TRANSISTOR 2SD2216J-QR(K8).SO L012 1-412-026-11 INDUCTOR 1uH Q205 8-729-042-62 TRANSISTOR UN9116J-(K8).SO L152 1-469-555-21 INDUCTOR 10uH Q351 8-729-037-74 TRANSISTOR UN9213J-(K8).SO L163 1-469-757-21 INDUCTOR 10uH Q352 8-729-050-22 TRANSISTOR 2SC4250(T5LSONY1) L202 1-469-757-21 INDUCTOR 10uH Q401 6-550-175-01 TRANSISTOR DTC143TMT2L L203 1-412-028-11 INDUCTOR CHIP 4.7uH Q402 8-729-053-58 TRANSISTOR RN1904FE(TPLR3) L205 1-469-757-21 INDUCTOR 10uH Q403 6-550-119-01 TRANSISTOR DTC144EMT2L L206 1-469-757-21 INDUCTOR 10uH Q501 6-550-239-01 TRANSISTOR DTA144EMT2L L301 1-469-757-21 INDUCTOR 10uH Q701 8-729-053-58 TRANSISTOR RN1904FE(TPLR3) L302 1-469-757-21 INDUCTOR 10uH Q702 6-550-576-01 TRANSISTOR SSM6E01TU L351 1-469-058-11 INDUCTOR 22uH Q703 8-729-054-48 TRANSISTOR RN4983FE(TPLR3) L401 1-469-559-21 INDUCTOR 47uH Q704 8-729-427-72 TRANSISTOR HN1C01FU-TE85R L501 1-469-561-21 INDUCTOR 100uH Q801 6-550-016-01 TRANSISTOR UMF5NTR L502 1-469-757-21 INDUCTOR 10uH Q802 6-550-016-01 TRANSISTOR UMF5NTR L601 1-469-757-21 INDUCTOR 10uH Q905 6-550-509-01 TRANSISTOR RN2907FE(TPLR3) L801 1-469-757-21 INDUCTOR 10uH Q906 6-550-508-01 TRANSISTOR RN1907FE(TPLR3) L802 1-469-757-21 INDUCTOR 10uH L803 1-469-757-21 INDUCTOR 10uH < RESISTOR > L804 1-469-757-21 INDUCTOR 10uH L805 1-469-236-91 INDUCTOR 27uH R001 1-208-944-81 METAL CHIP 240K 0.5% 1/16W R002 1-211-969-11 METAL CHIP 10 0.5% 1/10W L901 1-469-525-91 INDUCTOR 10uH R003 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W L902 1-469-525-91 INDUCTOR 10uH R004 1-208-697-11 METAL CHIP 3.9K 0.5% 1/16W L903 1-469-525-91 INDUCTOR 10uH R005 1-218-985-11 RES-CHIP 470K 5% 1/16W < LINE FILTER > R006 1-218-981-11 RES-CHIP 220K 5% 1/16W R007 1-208-699-11 METAL CHIP 4.7K 0.5% 1/16W LF701 1-400-284-21 INDUCTOR 0uH R008 1-208-711-11 METAL CHIP 15K 0.5% 1/16W R009 1-208-935-11 METAL CHIP 100K 0.5% 1/16W < TRANSISTOR > R010 1-208-909-11 METAL CHIP 8.2K 0.5% 1/16W Q001 8-729-056-45 TRANSISTOR CPH6311-TL-E R011 1-218-957-11 RES-CHIP 2.2K 5% 1/16W Q002 8-729-047-68 TRANSISTOR SSM3K03FE(TPL3) R012 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W Q003 8-729-037-74 TRANSISTOR UN9213J-(K8).SO R013 1-218-974-11 RES-CHIP 56K 5% 1/16W Q004 8-729-032-62 TRANSISTOR 2SJ347-TE85L R014 1-218-966-11 RES-CHIP 12K 5% 1/16W Q005 6-550-352-01 TRANSISTOR FDW2508P/N R015 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W Q006 8-729-054-48 TRANSISTOR RN4983FE(TPLR3) R016 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W Q007 8-729-047-68 TRANSISTOR SSM3K03FE(TPL3) R017 1-218-941-81 RES-CHIP 100 5% 1/16W Q009 8-729-037-52 TRANSISTOR 2SD2216J-QR(K8).SO R018 1-208-709-11 METAL CHIP 12K 0.5% 1/16W Q010 8-729-055-90 TRANSISTOR CPH5803-TL-E R019 1-218-985-11 RES-CHIP 470K 5% 1/16W Q011 6-550-408-01 TRANSISTOR QS5U26TR R020 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W Q012 6-550-171-01 TRANSISTOR MCH3317-TL-E R021 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W Q013 6-550-171-01 TRANSISTOR MCH3317-TL-E R022 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W Q014 8-729-427-72 TRANSISTOR HN1C01FU-TE85R R023 1-218-989-11 RES-CHIP 1M 5% 1/16W Q015 8-729-055-88 TRANSISTOR MCH3406-TL-E R024 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W Q016 6-550-529-01 TRANSISTOR SSM5G04TU(TE85R) R025 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W Q017 8-729-055-88 TRANSISTOR MCH3406-TL-E R026 1-218-892-11 METAL CHIP 75K 0.5% 1/16W Q018 8-729-055-87 TRANSISTOR MCH5801-TL-E R027 1-208-707-11 METAL CHIP 10K 0.5% 1/16W Q019 8-729-055-87 TRANSISTOR MCH5801-TL-E R029 1-218-990-11 SHORT CHIP 0 Q020 8-729-055-88 TRANSISTOR MCH3406-TL-E R030 1-218-990-11 SHORT CHIP 0 Q021 8-729-047-68 TRANSISTOR SSM3K03FE(TPL3) R031 1-218-970-11 METAL CHIP 27K 0.5% 1/16W Q022 6-550-171-01 TRANSISTOR MCH3317-TL-E R032 1-218-990-11 SHORT CHIP 0 Q023 8-729-053-76 TRANSISTOR CPH5802-TL-E R033 1-218-990-11 SHORT CHIP 0 Q024 8-729-053-76 TRANSISTOR CPH5802-TL-E R034 1-218-985-11 RES-CHIP 470K 5% 1/16W Q025 6-550-528-01 TRANSISTOR UPA650TT-E1-A R035 1-218-990-11 SHORT CHIP 0 Q026 6-550-528-01 TRANSISTOR UPA650TT-E1-A R036 1-218-989-11 RES-CHIP 1M 5% 1/16W 5-10,

DSC-P52 SY-91

Ref. No. Part No. Description Ref. No. Part No. Description R037 1-218-961-11 RES-CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W R230 1-208-683-11 METAL CHIP 1K 0.5% 1/16W R038 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R231 1-208-712-11 METAL CHIP 16K 0.5% 1/16W R039 1-218-990-11 SHORT CHIP 0 R232 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W R041 1-218-949-11 RES-CHIP 470 5% 1/16W R233 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R042 1-208-927-11 METAL CHIP 47K 0.5% 1/16W R234 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R043 1-218-949-11 RES-CHIP 470 5% 1/16W R235 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R044 1-208-927-11 METAL CHIP 47K 0.5% 1/16W R236 1-218-957-11 RES-CHIP 2.2K 5% 1/16W R045 1-218-949-11 RES-CHIP 470 5% 1/16W R301 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R046 1-218-978-11 METAL CHIP 120K 0.5% 1/16W R302 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R047 1-208-711-11 METAL CHIP 15K 0.5% 1/16W R303 1-208-703-11 METAL CHIP 6.8K 0.5% 1/16W R048 1-208-719-11 METAL CHIP 33K 0.5% 1/16W R306 1-208-707-11 METAL CHIP 10K 0.5% 1/16W R049 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R307 1-208-671-11 METAL CHIP 330 0.5% 1/16W R050 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R308 1-208-677-11 METAL CHIP 560 0.5% 1/16W R051 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R309 1-208-677-11 METAL CHIP 560 0.5% 1/16W R052 1-218-989-11 RES-CHIP 1M 5% 1/16W R310 1-208-677-11 METAL CHIP 560 0.5% 1/16W R054 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R311 1-208-713-11 METAL CHIP 18K 0.5% 1/16W R055 1-218-989-11 RES-CHIP 1M 5% 1/16W R312 1-218-970-11 METAL CHIP 27K 0.5% 1/16W R056 1-218-983-11 RES-CHIP 330K 5% 1/16W R313 1-208-707-11 METAL CHIP 10K 0.5% 1/16W R057 1-218-990-11 SHORT CHIP 0 R314 1-208-701-11 METAL CHIP 5.6K 0.5% 1/16W R058 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R315 1-208-707-11 METAL CHIP 10K 0.5% 1/16W R059 1-208-699-11 METAL CHIP 4.7K 0.5% 1/16W R316 1-218-990-11 SHORT CHIP 0 R060 1-218-847-11 METAL CHIP 1K 0.5% 1/10W R317 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R061 1-218-971-11 RES-CHIP 33K 5% 1/16W R318 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R062 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R351 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R063 1-218-976-11 RES-CHIP 82K 5% 1/16W R354 1-218-960-11 RES-CHIP 3.9K 5% 1/16W R064 1-218-961-11 RES-CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W R355 1-218-990-11 SHORT CHIP 0 R065 1-208-713-11 METAL CHIP 18K 0.5% 1/16W R356 1-218-989-11 RES-CHIP 1M 5% 1/16W R066 1-218-978-11 METAL CHIP 120K 0.5% 1/16W R357 1-218-990-11 SHORT CHIP 0 R067 1-218-970-11 METAL CHIP 27K 0.5% 1/16W R358 1-218-959-11 RES-CHIP 3.3K 5% 1/16W R068 1-208-695-11 METAL CHIP 3.3K 0.5% 1/16W R401 1-218-985-11 RES-CHIP 470K 5% 1/16W R069 1-218-971-11 RES-CHIP 33K 5% 1/16W R402 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R070 1-218-967-11 RES-CHIP 15K 5% 1/16W R403 1-218-985-11 RES-CHIP 470K 5% 1/16W R151 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W R405 1-218-985-11 RES-CHIP 470K 5% 1/16W R152 1-218-990-11 SHORT CHIP 0 R406 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R153 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R409 1-218-989-11 RES-CHIP 1M 5% 1/16W R156 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R410 1-218-985-11 RES-CHIP 470K 5% 1/16W R157 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W R411 1-218-989-11 RES-CHIP 1M 5% 1/16W R158 1-218-990-11 SHORT CHIP 0 R413 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W R159 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R414 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R160 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W R415 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R161 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W R416 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R162 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W R417 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R207 1-218-974-11 RES-CHIP 56K 5% 1/16W R418 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R208 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R419 1-218-958-11 RES-CHIP 2.7K 5% 1/16W R209 1-218-941-81 RES-CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R420 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R210 1-218-961-11 RES-CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W R421 1-218-961-11 RES-CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W R211 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R422 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R212 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R423 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W R213 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R426 1-218-947-11 RES-CHIP 330 5% 1/16W R214 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W R427 1-216-803-11 METAL CHIP 33 5% 1/16W R216 1-218-974-11 RES-CHIP 56K 5% 1/16W R428 1-218-989-11 RES-CHIP 1M 5% 1/16W R217 1-218-974-11 RES-CHIP 56K 5% 1/16W R429 1-208-935-11 METAL CHIP 100K 0.5% 1/16W R220 1-218-947-11 RES-CHIP 330 5% 1/16W R430 1-208-935-11 METAL CHIP 100K 0.5% 1/16W R223 1-218-980-11 RES-CHIP 180K 5% 1/16W R431 1-208-935-11 METAL CHIP 100K 0.5% 1/16W R224 1-218-980-11 RES-CHIP 180K 5% 1/16W R432 1-218-985-11 RES-CHIP 470K 5% 1/16W R225 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W R433 1-208-935-11 METAL CHIP 100K 0.5% 1/16W R226 1-218-958-11 RES-CHIP 2.7K 5% 1/16W R434 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R227 1-218-954-11 RES-CHIP 1.2K 5% 1/16W R435 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R228 1-218-966-11 RES-CHIP 12K 5% 1/16W R440 1-219-570-11 METAL CHIP 10M 5% 1/10W R229 1-218-980-11 RES-CHIP 180K 5% 1/16W R441 1-218-979-11 RES-CHIP 150K 5% 1/16W 5-11,

DSC-P52 SY-91

Ref. No. Part No. Description Ref. No. Part No. Description R442 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R719 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R443 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R720 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R444 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R721 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R445 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R781 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W R450 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R782 1-218-933-11 RES-CHIP 22 5% 1/16W R451 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R785 1-218-933-11 RES-CHIP 22 5% 1/16W R452 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R787 1-218-933-11 RES-CHIP 22 5% 1/16W R453 1-218-985-11 RES-CHIP 470K 5% 1/16W R788 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W R454 1-218-985-11 RES-CHIP 470K 5% 1/16W R789 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W R458 1-218-985-11 RES-CHIP 470K 5% 1/16W R801 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R459 1-218-985-11 RES-CHIP 470K 5% 1/16W R802 1-218-971-11 RES-CHIP 33K 5% 1/16W R460 1-218-985-11 RES-CHIP 470K 5% 1/16W R803 1-218-961-11 RES-CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W R501 1-218-990-11 SHORT CHIP 0 R804 1-218-990-11 SHORT CHIP 0 R502 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W R805 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R503 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W R806 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R504 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W R807 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R505 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W R809 1-218-985-11 RES-CHIP 470K 5% 1/16W R506 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R810 1-218-899-11 METAL CHIP 150K 0.5% 1/16W R507 1-218-934-11 RES-CHIP 27 5% 1/16W R811 1-218-990-11 SHORT CHIP 0 R508 1-218-934-11 RES-CHIP 27 5% 1/16W R813 1-218-958-11 RES-CHIP 2.7K 5% 1/16W R509 1-208-715-11 METAL CHIP 22K 0.5% 1/16W R814 1-218-975-11 RES-CHIP 68K 5% 1/16W R510 1-208-933-11 METAL CHIP 82K 0.5% 1/16W R815 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W R511 1-208-715-11 METAL CHIP 22K 0.5% 1/16W R816 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W R512 1-208-933-11 METAL CHIP 82K 0.5% 1/16W R817 1-218-975-11 RES-CHIP 68K 5% 1/16W R513 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R818 1-218-989-11 RES-CHIP 1M 5% 1/16W R514 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W R819 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R515 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R820 1-218-989-11 RES-CHIP 1M 5% 1/16W R516 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W R821 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R517 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W R822 1-218-941-81 RES-CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R518 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W R823 1-218-941-81 RES-CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R519 1-218-990-11 SHORT CHIP 0 R824 1-218-941-81 RES-CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R520 1-218-941-81 RES-CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R826 1-218-939-11 RES-CHIP 68 5% 1/16W R521 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W R827 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R522 1-218-990-11 SHORT CHIP 0 R828 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R525 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W R901 1-218-945-11 RES-CHIP 220 5% 1/16W R528 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W R902 1-218-945-11 RES-CHIP 220 5% 1/16W R529 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W R903 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R530 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W R904 1-218-945-11 RES-CHIP 220 5% 1/16W R531 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W R905 1-218-943-11 RES-CHIP 150 5% 1/16W R532 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W R906 1-218-990-11 SHORT CHIP 0 R533 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R907 1-218-990-11 SHORT CHIP 0 R601 1-218-989-11 RES-CHIP 1M 5% 1/16W R908 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R602 1-218-939-11 RES-CHIP 68 5% 1/16W R909 1-218-945-11 RES-CHIP 220 5% 1/16W R701 1-218-959-11 RES-CHIP 3.3K 5% 1/16W R910 1-218-976-11 RES-CHIP 82K 5% 1/16W R702 1-218-957-11 RES-CHIP 2.2K 5% 1/16W R911 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W R703 1-218-985-11 RES-CHIP 470K 5% 1/16W < COMPOSITION CIRCUIT BLOCK > R704 1-218-952-11 RES-CHIP 820 5% 1/16W R705 1-218-945-11 RES-CHIP 220 5% 1/16W RB401 1-234-378-21 RES, NETWORK 10KX4 (1005) R706 1-218-948-11 RES-CHIP 390 5% 1/16W RB403 1-234-383-21 RES, NETWORK 470KX4 (1005) R707 1-218-947-11 RES-CHIP 330 5% 1/16W < THERMISTOR > R708 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R709 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W TH351 1-810-816-11 THERMISTOR, NTC (1608) R710 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R711 1-218-941-81 RES-CHIP 100 5% 1/16W < VIBRATOR > R712 1-218-941-81 RES-CHIP 100 5% 1/16W X401 1-795-244-11 VIBRATOR, CERAMIC (10MHz) R713 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W X402 1-767-994-42 VIBRATOR, CRYSTAL (32.768KHz) R715 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W X781 1-795-172-11 OSCILLATOR, CRYSTAL (27MHz) R716 1-218-948-11 RES-CHIP 390 5% 1/16W ************************************************************ R717 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W R718 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W 5-12E,

DSC-P52

9-876-248-11 Sony EMCS Co. 2003C1600-1 ©2003.3 — 46 — Published by DI Customer Center,

Reverse 987624811.pdf Revision History

Ver. Date History Contents S.M. Rev. issued 1.0 2003.03 Official Release — —,

DSC-P52 Ver 1.0 2003. 03 SECTION 6 ADJ Revision History ADJUSTMENTS Link

Before starting adjustment SERVICE MODE Adjusting items when replacing main parts and boards APPLICATION FOR ADJUSTMENT (SEUS) SERVICE MODE

ADJUSTMENT

PREPARATIONS BEFORE ADJUSTMENT INITIALIZATION OF 0E, 2F, 4F, 6F PAGE DATA VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS CAMERA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS LCD SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT SYSTEM CONTROL SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT Contents of LEVEL 2 and LEVEL 3 Service Manual CONTENTS LEVEL 2 LEVEL 3 1. SERVICE NOTE a ✕ 2. DISASSEMBLY a ✕ 3. BLOCK DIAGRAMS OVERALL, CAMERA, ✕ FRONT/LCD, POWER 4. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND ST-82, JK-256, RL-060, SY-91 BOARD SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS UA-003 BOARD, CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (SW-392), FP-643 FLEXIBLE 5. REPAIR PARTS LIST EXPLODED VIEWS ✕ ELECTRICAL PARTS a (SY-91 BOARD) 2003C1600-1 ©2003.3 9-876-248-51 Sony EMCS Co. Published by DI Customer Center,

DSC-P52

TABLE OF CONTENTS 6. ADJUSTMENT 6-2. SERVICE MODE ·························································· 6-38 1. Before starting adjustment ··············································· 6-1 2-1. APPLICATION FOR ADJUSTMENT (SEUS) ············ 6-38 1-1. Adjusting items when replacing main parts and boards. · 6-2 2-1-1.Using Method of SEUS ·················································6-38 6-1. ADJUSTMENT ······························································· 6-3 1. Connection ·····································································6-38 1-1. PREPARATIONS BEFORE ADJUSTMENT ················· 6-3 2. Operation ······································································· 6-38 1-1-1.List of Service Tools ························································ 6-3 2-1-2.Precaution on Use of SEUS··········································· 6-38 1-1-2.Preparations ····································································· 6-4 2-2. SERVICE MODE ·························································· 6-39 1-1-3.Discharging of the flashlight power supply ····················· 6-4 1. Setting the Test Mode ···················································· 6-39 1-1-4.Precaution ········································································ 6-6 2. Bit value discrimination ················································ 6-39 1. Setting the Switch ···························································· 6-6 3. Switch check (1) ···························································· 6-40 2. Order of Adjustments ······················································ 6-6 4. Switch check (2) ···························································· 6-40 3. Subjects ··········································································· 6-6 5. LED check ·····································································6-40 4. Preparing the Flash Adjustment Box ······························· 6-7 6. Lens Shutter check ························································ 6-40 1-2. INITIALIZATION OF 0E, 2F, 4F, 6F PAGE DATA ··············································································· 6-8 * Color reproduction frame and AF illumination frame are 1-2-1. INITIALIZATION OF 2F PAGE DATA ························· 6-8 shown on page 6-41. 1. Initializing the 2F Page Data ··········································· 6-8 2. 2F Page Table ·································································· 6-8 1-2-2. Initializing the 4F Page Data ··········································· 6-9 1. Initializing the 4F Page Data ··········································· 6-9 2. 4F Page Table ·································································· 6-9 1-2-3. Initializing the 6F Page Data ········································· 6-10 1. Initializing the 6F Page Data ········································· 6-10 2. 6F Page Table ································································ 6-10 1-2-4. INITIALIZATION OF 0E PAGE DATA ······················· 6-12 1. Initializing the 0E Page Data ········································· 6-12 2. 0E Page Table ································································ 6-12 1-3. VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS····························· 6-13 1. Video Output Level Adjustment (SY-91 board) ············ 6-13 1-4. CAMERA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS ························ 6-14 1. Data Setting during Camera System Adjustments ········ 6-14 2. HALL Adjustment ························································· 6-14 3. Flange Back Adjustment ··············································· 6-15 (Using Minipattern Box) ·············································· 6-15 4. Flange Back Check ························································ 6-16 5. Picture Frame Setting ···················································· 6-17 6. F No. Standard Data Input ············································· 6-18 7. Mechanical Shutter Adjustment ···································· 6-18 8. Light Value Adjustment ················································· 6-19 9. Mixed Color Cancel Adjustment ··································· 6-19 10. Auto White Balance 3200K Standard Data Input ········· 6-20 11. Auto White Balance 3200K Check ······························· 6-21 12. Auto White Balance 5800K Standard Data Input ········· 6-22 13. Auto White Balance 5800K Check ······························· 6-23 14. CCD Linearity Check ···················································· 6-24 15. Color Reproduction Adjustment ···································· 6-25 16. Color Reproduction Check ············································ 6-26 17. CCD White Defect Compensation Check ····················· 6-27 18. CCD Black Defect Compensation Check ····················· 6-28 19. Strobe Adjustment ························································· 6-29 20. Auto Focus Illumination Check ···································· 6-30 1-5. LCD SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT ··································· 6-31 1. LCD Initial Data Input (1) ············································· 6-31 2. LCD Initial Data Input (2) ············································· 6-32 3. VCO Adjustment (SY-91 board) ··································· 6-32 4. Bright Adjustment (SY-91 board) ·································· 6-33 4-1. Adjustment without Using Oscilloscope ······················· 6-33 4-2. Adjustment Using Oscilloscope ···································· 6-33 5. Contrast Adjustment (SY-91 board) ······························ 6-34 5-1. Adjustment without Using Oscilloscope ······················· 6-34 5-2. Adjustment Using Oscilloscope ···································· 6-34 6. V COM Level Adjustment (SY-91 board) ····················· 6-35 6-1. Adjustment without Using Oscilloscope ······················· 6-35 6-2. Adjustment Using Oscilloscope ···································· 6-35 7. V COM Adjustment (SY-91 board) ······························· 6-36 8. White Balance Adjustment (SY-91 board) ···················· 6-36 1-6. SYSTEM CONTROL SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT ········ 6-37 1. Battery End Check (SY-91 board) ································· 6-37 — 2 —,

DSC-P52

COVER SECTION 6

ADJUSTMENTS

1. Before starting adjustment

EVR Data Re-writing Procedure When Replacing Board

The data that is stored in the repair board, is not necessarily correct. Perform either procedure 1 or procedure 2 or procedure 3 when replacing board. Procedure 1 Save the EVR data of the machine in which a board is going to be replaced. Download the saved data after a board is replaced. (Machine before starting repair) PC PC (Machine after a board is replaced) Save the EVR data Download the saved to a personal computer. data to a machine. Procedure 2 Remove the EEPROM from the board of the machine that is going to be repaired. Install the removed EEPROM to the replaced board. Remove the EEPROM and install it. (Former board) (New board) Procedure 3 When the data cannot be saved due to defective EEPROM, or when the EEPROM cannot be removed or installed, save the data from the same model of the same destination, and download it. (Machine to be repaired) PC (Machine to be repaired) Download the data. Save the data. (The same model of the same destination) After the EVR data is saved and downloaded, check the respective items of the EVR data. (Refer to page 6-2 for the items to be checked.) 6-1,

DSC-P52 COVER

1-1. Adjusting items when replacing main parts and boards. When replacing main parts, adjust the items indicated by z in the following table. Replaced parts Board EEPROM Block replacement Parts replacement replacement replacement Adjustment Adjustment Section Initialization of 0E, Initialization of 0E, 2F, 4F, 6Fzz2F, 4F, 6F page data page data Video Video output level adj. zzzzHALL adj. zzzzFlange back adj. zzzzFNo. standard data InputzzzzMechanical shutter adj. zzzzLight value adj. zzzzzMixed color cancel adj. zzzzzCamera AWB 3200K standard data inputzzzzzAWB 5800K standard data inputzzzzzCCD linearity checkzzzzzColor reproduction adj. zzzzzCCD white defect compensation checkzzzzzCCD black defect compensation checkzzzzzStrobe adj. zzzzzzAuto focus illumination checkzzzzLCD initial data inputzzVCO adj. zzzzBright adj. zzzLCD Contrast adj. zzzzVCOM level adj. zzzVCOM adj. zzzzWhite balance adj. zzzzzSystem control Battery end checkzzTable. 6-1-1. 6-2 Lens device Flash unit (ST-82) Parts unit (UA-003) LCD block LCD unit (LCD901) LCD block Back light unit SY-91 board IC351 (CCD imager) SY-91 board IC901 (S/H, AGC,A/D) SY-91 board IC301 (CAMERA DSP) SY-91 board IC601 (Video amp.) SY-91 board IC801 (RGB drive) (LCD) SY-91 board IC802 (Timing generator) (LCD) SY-91 board (COMPLETE) SY-91 board IC502 (EEPROM),

DSC-P52 COVER

6-1. ADJUSTMENT 1-1. PREPARATIONS BEFORE ADJUSTMENT 1-1-1. List of Service Tools • Oscilloscope • Color monitor • Vectorscope • AC power adapter • Regulated power supply • Digital voltmeter • Calculator which can hexadecimal calculation. Ref. No. Name Parts Code Usage Auto white balance adjustment/check J-1 Filter for color temperature correction (C14) J-6080-058-A White balance adjustment/check J-2 Pattern box PTB-450 J-6082-200-A J-3 Color chart for pattern box J-6020-250-A J-4 Siemens star chart J-6080-875-A For checking the flange back J-5 Clear chart for pattern box J-6080-621-A J-6 Mini pattern box J-6082-384-A For adjusting the flange back J-7 Camera table J-6082-353-B For adjusting the flange back Personal computer with Windows98/ME/2000/XP J-8 installed and with two USB ports J-9 USB cable 1-823-932-11 For connecting the personal computer Contact our service headquarter of each area how to get J-10 Application for adjustment (SEUS) and HASP key the application for adjustment (SEUS) and HASP key J-11 Background paper J-2501-130-A For adjusting the strobe J-1 J-2 J-3 J-4 J-5 J-6 J-7 J-8 J-9 J-10 J-11 Fig. 6-1-1. 6-3,

DSC-P52

1-1-2. Preparations 1) Connect the equipment for adjustments according to Fig. 6-1-4. Pattern box 2) Start up the application for adjustment (SEUS). Note1: Setting the “Forced Power ON Mode (Forced STILL Mode)” 1) Select page: 00, address: 01, and set data: 01. 2) Select page: 2F, address: 21, and write data: 03. The above procedure will enable the power (STILL mode) to About 36cm be turned on with POWER switch (SY-91 board CN705) disconnected. After completing adjustments, be sure to exit the “Forced Power ON Mode”. Note2: Setting the “Forced Power ON Mode (Forced PLAY Mode)” 1) Select page: 00, address: 01, and set data: 01. 2) Select page: 2F, address: 21, and write data: 04. The above procedure will enable the power (PLAY mode) to be turned on with POWER switch (SY-91 board CN705) Front of the lens disconnected. After completing adjustments, be sure to exit the “Forced Power ON Mode”. Note3: Exiting the “Forced Power ON Mode” 1) Select page: 00, address: 01, and set data: 01. 2) Select page: 2F, address: 21, and write data: 00. 3) Select page: 00, address: 01, and set data: 00. Fig. 6-1-2. 1-1-3. Discharging of the flashlight power supply The capacitor which is used as power supply of flashlight is charged with 200V to 300V voltage. Discharge this voltage when opening the SY-91 board in order to protect service engineers from electric shock. Discharge procedure 1. Remove the power supply (AC power adaptor or battery). 2. Fabricate the discharging jig as shown in Fig. 6-1-3 locally by yourself. Connect the discharging jig to the positive (+) and negative (–) terminal of the flash voltage charge capacitor. Allow ten seconds to discharge the voltage. Capacitor Shorting jig (1kΩ / 1w) ST-82 board Fig. 6-1-3. 6-4,

DSC-P52

[CONNECTION OF EQUIPMENT] Personal computer (with two USB ports) USB2 HASP key USB1 DC IN USB AC power adaptor AC IN Memory stick Fig. 6-1-4. 6-5,

DSC-P52

1-1-4. Precaution 1. Setting the Switch Unless otherwise specified, set the switches as follows and perform adjustments. SETUP settings Switch settings USB connect (SETUP2) ...NORMAL 1. Mode dial ... STILL ( ) MENU settings 2. ZOOM ... WIDE end Camera ... AUTO 3. IMAGE SIZE ... 3.1M 2. Order of Adjustments Basically carry out adjustments in the order given. Color bar chart (Color reproduction adjustment frame)

H

C C=D D Picture frame

V

ABAFig. b LCD screen or under scan A= B Enlargement monitor TV picture Fig. a Video terminal output waveform Difference in level Adjust the camera position and direction to obtain the output waveform shown in Fig. a A and the LCD screen or the monitor TV display shown in Fig. b. Fig.6-1-5. 3. Subjects 1) Color bar chart (Standard picture frame) When performing adjustments using the color bar chart, adjust the picture frame as shown in Fig. 6-1-5. (Standard picture frame) 2) Clear chart (Color reproduction adjustment frame) White Remove the color bar chart from the pattern box and insert a 841mm clear chart in its place. (Do not perform zoom operations during Black this time.) 3) Flange back adjustment chart Make the chart shown in Fig. 6-1-6 using A0 size (1189mm × 841mm) black and white vellum paper. 1189mm Fig. 6-1-6. Note: Use matte vellum paper bigger than A0, and make sure the edges of the black and white paper joined together are not rough. 6-6 Yellow Cyan Green White Magenta Red Blue Yellow Cyan Green White Magenta Red Blue,

DSC-P52

4. Preparing the Flash Adjustment Box A dark room is required to provide an accurate strobe adjustment. If it is not available, prepare the flash adjustment box as given below; 1) Provide woody board A, B and C of 15 mm thickness. woody board A (2 sheets) woody board B (2 sheets) woody board C (1 sheet) 400 mm 370 mm 700 mm 513 mm 513 mm 700 mm 730 mm 700 mm Fig. 6-1-7. 2) Apply black mat paint to one side of woody board A and B. 3) Attach background paper (J-2501-130-A) to woody board C. 4) Assemble so that the black sides and the background paper side of woody board A, B and C are internal. (Fig. 6-1-8.) woody board A woody board B woody board A woody board B woody board C Fig. 6-1-8. 6-7,

DSC-P52 COVER

1-2. INITIALIZATION OF 0E, 2F, 4F, 6F PAGE 2. 2F Page Table DATA Note: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing the 2F Page Data”.) Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of 2F Page 1-2-1. INITIALIZATION OF 2F PAGE DATA Data”.) 1. Initializing the 2F Page Data Address Remark Initial value Adjusting page 2F 00 to 20 Adjusting Address 00 to 7F 21 00 Test mode 22 to 7F Fixed data-1 Initializing Method: Table. 6-1-2. 1) Select page:00, address:01, and set data:01. 2) Click [Page Edit] on the SEUS screen to display the SEUS PAGE EDIT screen. 3) Click [Page] to display the INPUT PAGE screen, and input “2F”. 4) Click [Preset Data Read] on the SEUS PAGE EDIT screen to display the INPUT SETID screen. 5) Input “03” and click [OK] to read the preset data. 6) On the SEUS PAGE EDIT screen, change the data of the “Fixed data-2” address shown in the following table by manual input. Note: New data for changing are not shown in the table because they are different in destination. When changing the data, copy the data built in the same model. If copy the data built in the different model, the camera may not operate. 7) Check that the data of adjustment addresses is the initial value. If not, change the data to the initial value. 8) Click [Write] to write the initializing data to the EEPROM of the camera. 9) Click [Close] to close the SEUS PAGE EDIT screen. Processing after Completing Initializing of 2F Page data Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 20 00 29 Write the data. 2 20 01 29 Write the data. 3 Check “Receive Paket Error” is displayed on the SEUS screen. 4 Turn on the power. 5 Click [Connect] on the SEUS screen. 6-8,

DSC-P52

1-2-2. Initializing the 4F Page Data 2. 4F Page Table Note1: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing the 4F 1. Initializing the 4F Page Data Page Data”.) Note: If the 4F page data has been initialized, the following adjustments Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of 4F need to be performed again. Page Data”.) 1) Video system adjustments 2) LCD system adjustments Address RemarkInitial value Adjusting page 4F 00 to 7E Fixed data-1 80 4E Fixed data (LCD) Adjusting Address 00 to AF 81 FF Initializing Method: 82 80 VCO adj. (LCD) 1) Select page:00, address:01, and set data:01. 83 90 2) Click [Page Edit] on the SEUS screen to display the SEUS 84 6D V COM adj. (LCD) PAGE EDIT screen. 85 16 Bright adj. (LCD) 3) Click [Page] to display the INPUT PAGE screen, and input 86 08 Fixed data (LCD) “4F”. 4) Click [Preset Data Read] on the SEUS PAGE EDIT screen to 87 87 V COM level adj. (LCD) display the INPUT SETID screen. 88 8D White balance adj. 5) Input “03” and click [OK] to read the preset data. 89 59 6) On the SEUS PAGE EDIT screen, change the data of the “Fixed 8A 38 Contrast adj. (LCD) data-2” address shown in the following table by manual input. 8B 00 Fixed data (LCD) Note: New data for changing are not shown in the table because they are different in destination. When changing the data, copy the 8C to 91 Fixed data-1 data built in the same model. If copy the data built in the different 92 05 Fixed data (LCD) model, the camera may not operate. 93 0C 7) Check that the data of adjustment addresses is the initial value. 94 9F If not, change the data to the initial value. 8) Click [Write] to write the initializing data to the EEPROM of 95 1F the camera. 98 to 9F Fixed data-1 9) Click [Close] to close the SEUS PAGE EDIT screen. A0 80 Video output level adj. A1 to A2 Fixed data-1 Processing after Completing Initializing of 4F Page data A3 24 Fixed data (LCD) Order Page Address Data Procedure A4 00 1 20 00 29 Write the data. A5 to A7 Fixed data-1 2 20 01 29 Write the data. A8 Fixed data-2 3 Check “Receive Paket Error” is A9 to AB Fixed data-1 displayed on the SEUS screen. AC 00 Recording counter (Hexadecimal) 4 Turn on the power. AD 00 (Note2) 5 Click [Connect] on the SEUS AE 00 screen. AF 00 Table. 6-1-3. Note2: Calculate the recording counter (N) using following equation. (Hexadecimal calculation) N = DAF + DAE × 100 + DAD × 10000 + DAC × 1000000 6-9,

DSC-P52

1-2-3. Initializing the 6F Page Data 2. 6F Page Table Note: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing the 6F Page 1. Initializing the 6F Page Data Data”.) Note: If the 6F page data has been initialized, the following adjustments Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of 6F Page need to be performed again. Data”.) 1) Camera system adjustments Address Remark Initial value Adjusting page 6F 00 to 13 Fixed data-1 Adjusting Address 00 to FF 10 FF Auto focus illumination check 11 FF Initializing Method: 1) Select page:00, address:01, and set data:01. 12 FF 2) Click [Page Edit] on the SEUS screen to display the SEUS 13 FF PAGE EDIT screen. 14 FF 3) Click [Page] to display the INPUT PAGE screen, and input 15 FF “6F”. 16 FF 4) Click [Preset Data Read] on the SEUS PAGE EDIT screen to 17 FF display the INPUT SETID screen. 5) Input “03” and click [OK] to read the preset data. 18 14 Flange back Adj. 6) On the SEUS PAGE EDIT screen, change the data of the “Fixed 19 40 data-2” address shown in the following table by manual input. 1A 20 Note: New data for changing are not shown in the table because they 1B EB are different in destination. When changing the data, copy the data built in the same model. If copy the data built in the different 1C 10 model, the camera may not operate. 1D 7D 7) Check that the data of adjustment addresses is the initial value. 1E 00 If not, change the data to the initial value. 1F 00 8) Click [Write] to write the initializing data to the EEPROM of 20 00 the camera. 9) Click [Close] to close the SEUS PAGE EDIT screen. 21 00 22 1C Processing after Completing Initializing of 6F Page data 23 00 Order Page Address Data Procedure 24 20 1 20 00 29 Write the data. 25 20 2 20 01 29 Write the data. 26 71 3 Check “Receive Paket Error” is 27 44 displayed on the SEUS screen. 28 0A 4 Turn on the page. 29 00 5 Click [Connect] on the SEUS 2A 00 screen. 2B 00 2C 00 2D 00 2E 00 2F 00 30 00 31 00 32 00 33 00 34 00 35 00 36 00 37 00 38 00 39 00 3A 00 3B 00 3C 00 3D 00 3E FF 3F to 57 Fixed data-1 58 5D HALL adj. 59 8F 6-10,

DSC-P52

6F page Address Remark Address Remark Initial value Initial value 5A 13 HALL adj. 93 00 AWB 5200K standard data input 5B 5B 94 09 5C 75 95 04 5D 5D 96 00 5E to 5F Fixed data-1 97 00 60 00 F No. standard data input 98 00 61 00 99 00 62 00 9A FB 63 00 9B FD 64 00 9C 00 65 30 Light value adj. 9D 00 66 FE 9E 00 67 6D 9F 05 68 68 HALL adj. A0 28 69 to 6A Fixed data-1 A1 C8 6B FF HALL adj./F No. standard data input/ A2 60 6C 00 Mechanical shutter adj. A3 00 6D 00 A4 01 Color reproduction adj. 6E 00 Mixed color cancel adj. A5 F4 6F 00 A6 81 70 44 AWB 3200K standard data input A7 C0 71 A3 A8 09 72 16 A9 04 73 F5 AA 8D 74 42 AB 92 75 C1 AC 7F 76 18 AD C0 77 15 AE FD 78 00 AF F4 79 00 B0 A5 AWB 3200K standard data input 7A 00 B1 8B AWB 5800K standard data input 7B 00 B2 99 AWB 3200K standard data input 7C F5 B3 55 AWB 5800K standard data input 7D 0C B4 02 AWB 3200K standard data input 7E 00 B5 Fixed data-1 7F 00 B6 25 Strobe adj. 80 00 B7 76 81 00 B8 10 Mechanical shutter adj. 82 F1 B9 6B 83 24 BA 0F 84 00 BB F6 85 00 BC 0F 86 00 BD F7 87 05 BE 0F 88 2B AWB 5200K standard data input BF F2 89 4A C0 0F 8A 22 C1 F7 8B 62 C2 00 8C 29 C3 00 8D DA C4 00 8E 23 C5 00 8F D1 C6 00 90 00 C7 30 91 00 C8 1B 92 00 C9 12 6-11,

DSC-P52

6F page 1-2-4. INITIALIZATION OF 0E PAGE DATA Address Remark Initial value 1. Initializing the 0E Page Data CA 0D Mechanical shutter adj. CB 08 Adjusting page 0E CC 80 Adjusting Address 00 to FF CD 88 CE 98 Initializing Method: CF 90 1) Select page:00, address:01, and set data:01. D0 88 2) Click [Page Edit] on the SEUS screen to display the SEUS D1 00 PAGE EDIT screen. D2 00 3) Click [Page] to display the INPUT PAGE screen, and input “0E”. D3 00 4) Click [Preset Data Read] on the SEUS PAGE EDIT screen to D4 00 display the INPUT SETID screen. D5 00 5) Input “00” and click [OK] to read the preset data. D6 00 6) Click [Write] to write the initializing data to the EEPROM of D7 14 the camera. D8 FF Strobe adj. 7) Click [Close] to close the SEUS PAGE EDIT screen. D9 FF Processing after Completing Initializing of 0E Page data DA FF Order Page Address Data Procedure DB 00 1 20 00 29 Write the data. DC 00 2 20 01 29 Write the data. DD 00 DE 00 3 Check “Receive Paket Error” is displayed on the SEUS screen. DF 00 4 Turn on the power. E0 00 5 Click [Connect] on the SEUS E1 00 screen. E2 00 E3 00 2. 0E Page Table E4 00 Note: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing the 0E Page E5 00 Data”.) E6 00 E7 00 E8 00 Address Remark E9 00 F0 to FF Fixed data-1 EA 00 Table. 6-1-5. EB 00 EC 00 ED 00 EE 00 EF 00 F0 to FF Fixed data-1 Table. 6-1-4. 6-12,

DSC-P52 COVER

1-3. VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS 1. Video Output Level Adjustment (SY-91 board) Adjust the sync level of the composite video signal output. Mode PLAY ( ) Signal Arbitrary Measurement Point Video terminal of AV OUT jack (75Ω terminated) Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope Adjustment Page 4F Adjustment Address A0 Specified Value Sync level: A=286 ± 5mV (NTSC mode) A=300 ± 5mV (PAL mode) Burst level: B=286 ± 30mV (NTSC mode) B=300 ± 30mV (PAL mode) SETUP setting: VIDEO OUT (SETUP 2) ... NTSC (NTSC mode) ... PAL (PAL mode) Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 00 01 01 Set the data. 2 60 C1 Read the data, and check it is “01”. 3 4F 02 03 Write the data. 4 40 F1 04 Write the data. 5 4F A0 Change the data and set the sync level (A) to the specified value. 6 4F A0 Write the data. 7 Check that the burst level (B) satisfies the specified value. 8 4F 02 00 Write the data. 9 40 F1 00 Write the data. 10 00 01 00 Set the data.

B A H

Fig.6-1-9. 6-13,

DSC-P52 COVER

1-4. CAMERA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS 2. HALL Adjustment For detecting the position of the lens iris, adjust the hall AMP gain Before perform the camera system adjustments, check that the and offset. specified values of “VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT” are Mode STILL ( ) satisfied. Subject Arbitrary 1. Data Setting during Camera System Adjustments Measurement Point Data of page:10, address: 07 Measuring Instrument Data of page: 6F, address: 6B Perform the following data setting before the camera system Adjustment Page 6F adjustments. Adjustment Address 58 to 5D, 68, 6B to 6D Note1: When the power is turned off, some data settings will be released. So perform this data setting again when the power is turned off. Specified Value1 00 Order Page Address Data Procedure Specified Value2 12 to 1A 1 00 01 01 Set the data. Specified Value3 7F to 87 2 4F 0F 01 Write the data. Note1: If the data of page: 60, address: 02 is “01”, select page: 60, address: 3 4F 02 02 Write the data. 01, and write data: 00. 4 2F 21 03 Set the data. 5 60 C1 Read the data, and check it is “02”. Adjusting method: 6 60 6C 01 Write the data. Order Page Address Data Procedure 7 6F 00 20 Write the data. 1 Check that “1. Data Setting during Camera System Adjustments” is 8 4F 01 20 Write the data. performed. 9 7F 68 00 Write the data. 2 00 01 01 Set the data. 10 75 0A 04 Write the data. 3 60 01 6D Write the data. After completing the camera system adjustments, release the data 4 Wait for 1 sec. setting. 5 60 02 Read the data, and check it is “01”. Order Page Address Data Procedure (Note2) 1 00 01 01 Set the data. 6 60 01 00 Write the data. 2 4F 0F 00 Write the data. Note2: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: 6F, 3 4F 02 00 Write the data. address: 58 to 5D, 68, 6B to 6D. 4 2F 21 00 Write the data. Checking method: 5 4F 01 00 Write the data. Order Page Address Data Procedure 6 7F 68 40 Write the data. 1 6F 6B Read the data, and check it 7 75 0A 00 Write the data. satisfies the specified value 1. 8 00 01 00 Set the data. 2 60 01 01 Write the data. 9 Initialize the 0E page data. 3 10 07 Read the data, and check it (Note2) satisfies the specified value 2. Note2: Refer to “1-2-4. INITIALIZATION OF 0E PAGE DATA”. 4 60 01 00 Write the data. 5 60 01 03 Write the data. 6 10 07 Read the data, and check it satisfies the specified value 3. Processing after Completing Adjustments: Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 60 01 00 Write the data. 2 If finish the camera system adjustments, release the data setting. (See “1. Data Setting during Camera System Adjustments”.) 6-14,

DSC-P52

3. Flange Back Adjustment Adjusting method: (Using Minipattern Box) Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 Check that “1. Data Setting The inner focus lens flange back adjustment is carried out during Camera System automatically. In whichever case, the focus will be deviated during Adjustments” is performed. auto focusing/manual focusing. 2 00 01 01 Set the data. Mode STILL ( ) 3 60 01 13 Write the data. Subject Siemens star chart with ND filter for the minipattern box (Note1) 4 60 01 27 Write the data. Measurement Point Data of page: 6F, address: 24, 3E 5 Wait until the movement of the lens stops. Measuring Instrument 6 60 02 Read the data, and check it is “01”. Adjustment Page 6F (Note3) Adjustment Address 18 to 3E 7 6F 3E Read the data, and check it Specified value1 00 satisfies the specified value 1. Specified value2 0A to 40 8 6F 24 Read the data, and check it satisfies the specified value 2. Note1: Dark siemens star chart. Note2: If the data of page: 60, address: 02 is “01”, select page: 60, address: Note3:The adjustment data will be automatically input to page:6F, address: 01, and write data: 00. 18 to 3E Preparations: Processing after Completing Adjustments: 1) The minipattern box is installed as shown in the following figure. Order Page Address Data Procedure Note: The attachment lenses are not used. 1 60 01 00 Write the data. 2) Install the minipattern box so that the distance between it and 2 Click [Disconnect]. the front of the lens of the camera is less than 3cm. 3 Tuen off the power turn on again. 3) Make the height of the minipattern box and the camcorder equal. 4) Check that the output voltage of the regulated power supply is 4 Perform “Flange Back Check”. the specified voltage. 5 If finish the camera system 5) Check that the center of the siemens star chart and center of adjustments, release the data the exposure screen coincide. setting. (See “1. Data Setting during Specified voltage: Camera System Adjustments”.) The specified voltage varies according to the minipattern box, so adjust the power supply output voltage to the specified voltage written on the sheet which is supplied with the minipattern box. Below 3 cm Minipattern box Camera Camera table Regulated power supply Output voltage : Specified voltage ±0.01Vdc Output current : more than 3.5A Red (+) Black (–) Yellow (SENS +) White (SENS –) Need not connected Black (GND) Fig.6-1-10. 6-15,

DSC-P52

4. Flange Back Check Mode STILL ( ) Subject Siemens star (1.0 m from the front of the lens) (Luminance : approx. 300 lux) Measurement Point Check operation on TV monitor Measuring Instrument Specified Value The lens is focused. Switch setting: CAMERA setting (Menu setting) ... AUTO Checking method: 1) Place the siemens star 1.0m from the front of the lens. 2) Select page: 5F, address: 3D, read the data, and memorize it. Then set data: 50. 3) Select page: 7B, address: 98, read the data, and memorize it. Then set data: A0. 4) Shoot the siemens star with the zoom TELE end. 5) To open the IRIS, decrease the luminous intensity to the siemens star up to a point before noise appear on the image. 6) Observe the TV monitor and check that the lens is focused. 7) Select page: 60, address: 2C, and set data: 01. 8) Shoot the siemens star with the zoom WIDE end. 9) Observe the TV monitor and check that the lens is focused. Processing after Completing Adjustments: 1) Select page: 5F, address: 3D, and set the data memorized at step 2. 2) Select page: 7B, address: 98, and set the data memorized at step 3. 3) Select page: 60, address: 2C, and set data: 00. 6-16,

DSC-P52

5. Picture Frame Setting Mode STILL ( ) Subject Color bar chart and clear chart (Standard picture frame) About 36 cm from the front of the lens Measurement Point Video terminal of A/V OUT jack Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope and TV monitor Specified Value A=C=B/2, E=F Check on an oscilloscope Switch setting: ZOOM ... WIDE end 1. Horizontal period CAMERA setting (Menu setting) ... AUTO

B

A = C = 2 Setting method: A C Order Page Address Data ProcedureB1Check that “1. Data Setting during Camera System Adjustments” is performed. 2 Shoot the color bar chart. 3 Adjust the direction and distance between the pattern box and camera, and set the picture frame to the specified position. 4 Remove the color bar chart and set the clear chart. 5 Check that the whole of the screen is white. If not, adjust the direction and distance slightly. 6 10 44 Read the data, and this data named YH. 7 10 45 Read the data, and this data named YL. Fig. 6-1-11. 8 60 2C 01 Write the data. 2. Vertical period 9 Perform the following adjustments. E E=F F How to reset the focus when they deviated: If the zoom and focus deviated due to some reason reset them in the following method. Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 60 2C 01 Write the data. V 2 60 90 00 Write the data. Fig. 6-1-12. 3 60 91 00 Write the data. 4 60 92 YL Write the data. Note Check on the monitor TV (Underscanned mode) 5 60 93 YH Write the data. Note 6 60 01 79 Write the data. ABC7Wait until the movement of the lens stops. 8 60 07 Read the data, and check it is “01”. 9 60 01 00 Write the data. Note: YH and YL are the data read in the “Setting method”. Color bar chart picture frame Effective picture frame Fig. 6-1-13. 6-17,

DSC-P52

6. F No. Standard Data Input 7. Mechanical Shutter Adjustment Adjusted the dispersion of the iris to every to every F number, and Adjust the dispersion of the opening/closing time and the closing compensate the exposure. loss rate of the mechanical shutter. and compensate the exposure. Mode STILL ( ) Mode STILL ( ) Subject Clear chart Subject Clear chart (Standard picture frame) (Standard picture frame) Measurement Point Data of page: 6F, address: 6B Measurement Point Data of page: 6F, address: 6B Measuring Instrument Measuring Instrument Adjustment Page 6F Adjustment Page 6F Adjustment Address 60 to 64, 6B to 6D Adjustment Address 6B to 6D, B8 to D7 Specified value 00 Specified value 00 Note1: If the data of page: 60, address: 02 is “01”, select page: 60, address: Note1: If the data of page: 60, address: 02 is “01”, select page: 60, address: 01, and write data: 00. 01, and write data: 00. Switch setting: Switch setting: ZOOM ... WIDE end ZOOM ... WIDE end CAMERA setting (Menu setting) ... AUTO CAMERA setting (Menu setting) ... AUTO Adjusting method: Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 Check that “1. Data Setting 1 Check that “1. Data Setting during Camera System during Camera System Adjustments” is performed. Adjustments” is performed. 2 Check the picture frame. 2 Check the picture frame. If deviated, perform “5. Picture If deviated, perform “5. Picture Frame Setting”. Frame Setting”. 3 00 01 01 Set the data. 3 00 01 01 Set the data. 4 60 01 BB Write the data. 4 60 01 AD Write the data. 5 Wait for 1 sec. 5 Wait until the movement of the 6 60 02 Red the data, and check it is “01”. shutter stops. (Note2) 6 60 02 Read the data, and check it is “01”. 7 6F 6B Read the data, and check it (Note2) satisfies the specified value. 7 6F 6B Read the data, and check it satisfies the specified value. Note2: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: 6F, address: 60 to 64, 6B to 6D. Note2: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: 6F, address: 6B to 6D, B8 to D7. Processing after Completing Adjustments: Order Page Address Data Procedure Processing after Completing Adjustments: 1 60 01 00 Write the data. Order Page Address Data Procedure 2 If finish the camera system 1 60 01 00 Write the data. adjustments, release the data 2 If finish the camera system setting. adjustments, release the data (See “1. Data Setting during setting. Camera System Adjustments”.) (See “1. Data Setting during Camera System Adjustments”.) 6-18,

DSC-P52

8. Light Value Adjustment 9. Mixed Color Cancel Adjustment Adjust the standard LV value. Compensate the dispersion of the Cr and Cb filter. Mode STILL ( ) Mode STILL ( ) Subject Clear chart Subject Color bar chart (Standard picture frame) (Standard picture frame) Measurement Point Data of page: 10, address: 0C, 0D Measurement Point Data of page: 6F, address: B5 Measuring Instrument Data of page: 6F, address: 65 Measuring Instrument Adjustment Page 6F Adjustment Page 6F Adjustment Address 65 to 67 Adjustment Address 6E to 6F Specified value1 0FE0 to 1020 Specified value 00 Specified value2 2D to 58 Note1: If the data of page: 60, address: 02 is “01”, select page: 60, address: Note1: If the data of page: 60, address: 02 is “01”, select page: 60, address: 01, and write data: 00. 01, and write data: 00. Switch setting: Switch setting: ZOOM ... WIDE end ZOOM ... WIDE end CAMERA setting (Menu setting) ... AUTO CAMERA setting (Menu setting) ... AUTO Adjusting method: Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 Install the color bar chart. 1 Check that “1. Data Setting 2 Check that “1. Data Setting during Camera System during Camera System Adjustments” is performed. Adjustments” is performed. 2 Check the picture frame. 3 Check the picture frame. If deviated, perform “5. Picture If deviated, perform “5. Picture Frame Setting”. Frame Setting”. 3 00 01 01 Set the data. 4 00 01 01 Set the data. 4 60 01 0D Write the data. 5 6F B5 FF Write the data. 5 Wait for 1 sec. 6 60 01 D7 Write the data. 6 60 02 Read the data, and check it is “01”. 7 Wait for 1 sec. (Note2) 8 60 01 D5 Write the data. 7 10 0C Read the data, and this data is 9 Wait for 1 sec. named D0C. 10 60 02 Read the data, and check it is “01”. 8 10 0D Read the data, and this data is (Note2) named D0D. 11 6F B5 Read the data, and check it 9 Calculate DLV using the satisfies the specified value. following equation. (Hexadecimal calculation.) Note2: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: 6F, DLV = D0C × 100 + D0D address: 6E to 6F. 10 Check that DLV satisfies the specified value1. Processing after Completing Adjustments: 11 6F 65 Read the data, and check it Order Page Address Data Procedure satisfies the specified value2. 1 60 01 00 Write the data. 2 Perform next adjustments. Note2: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: 6F, If finish the camera system address: 65 to 67. adjustments, release the data setting. Processing after Completing Adjustments: (See “1. Data Setting during Order Page Address Data Procedure Camera System Adjustments”.) 1 60 01 00 Write the data. 2 If finish the camera system adjustments, release the data setting. (See “1. Data Setting during Camera System Adjustments”.) 6-19,

DSC-P52

10. Auto White Balance 3200K Standard Data Input Processing after Completing Adjustments: Adjust the white balance standard data at 3200K. Order Page Address Data Procedure Mode STILL ( ) 1 60 37 00 Write the data. Subject Clear chart 2 60 01 00 Write the data. (Standard picture frame) 3 Perform next adjustments. Measurement Point Data of page: 6F, address: B5 If finish the camera system Measuring Instrument adjustments, release the data Adjustment Page 6F setting. (See “1. Data Setting during Adjustment Address 70 to 87, B0, B2, B4 Camera System Adjustments”.) Specified value 00 Note1: If the data of page: 60, address: 02 is “01”, select page: 60, address: 01, and write data: 00. Switch setting: ZOOM ... WIDE end CAMERA setting (Menu setting) ... AUTO Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 Install the Clear chart. 2 Check that “1. Data Setting during Camera System Adjustments” is performed. 3 Check the picture frame. If deviated, perform “5. Picture Frame Setting”. 4 00 01 01 Set the data. 5 6F B5 FF Write the data. 3200K standard data input (1) 6 60 02 Read the data, and check it is “00”. 7 60 37 01 Write the data. 8 60 01 11 Write the data. 9 60 38 Read the data, and check it is “01”. 10 60 01 C1 Write the data. 11 Wait for 1 sec. 12 60 02 Read the data, and check it is “01”. (Note2) 13 60 01 00 Write the data. 3200K standard data input (2) 14 60 02 Read the data, and check it is “00”. 15 60 37 02 Write the data. 16 60 01 0B Write the data. 17 Wait for 3 sec. 18 60 02 Read the data, and check it is “01”. (Note2) 19 60 01 00 Write the data. 20 6F B5 Read the data, and check it satisfies the specified value. Note2: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: 6F, address: 70 to 87, B0, B2, B4. 6-20,

DSC-P52

11. Auto White Balance 3200K Check Order Page Address Data Procedure Check that the white balance standard data at 3200K are inputted 18 Calculate B ratio using the properly. following equation Mode STILL ( ) (Hexadecimal calculation) Subject Clear chart B ratio = D0A × 100 + D0B (Standard picture frame) 19 Check that B ratio satisfies the Measurement Point Data of page: 10, address: 08, 09, 0A, specified value2. 0B, 59, 5B 20 10 59 Read the data (R-Y data), and check Measuring Instrument Data of page: 6F, address: 74, 76, B5 it satisfies the specified value3. Specified value1Rratio = 3F00 to 4100 21 10 5B Read the data (B-Y data), and check Specified value2Bratio = 3F00 to 4100 it satisfies the specified value4. Specified value 3 R-Y data = 7A to 86 22 60 01 00 Write the data. Specified value 4 B-Y data = 7A to 86 3200K standard data Check (2) Specified value 5 R/G data = 20 to 60 23 6F 74 Read the data (R/G data), and check it satisfies the specified value 5. Specified value 6 B/G data = 10 to 40 24 6F 76 Read the data (B/G data), and check Specified value 7 00 it satisfies the specified value 6. Note: If the data of page: 60, address: 02 is “01”, select page: 60, address: 25 6F B5 Read the data, and check it 01, and write data: 00. satisfies the specified value 7. Switch setting: Processing after Completing Adjustments: ZOOM ... WIDE end Order Page Address Data Procedure CAMERA setting (Menu setting) ... AUTO 1 60 37 00 Write the data. Adjusting method: 2 60 01 00 Write the data. Order Page Address Data Procedure 3 Perform next adjustments. If finish the camera system 1 Check that “1. Data Setting during adjustments, release the data Camera System Adjustments” is setting. performed. (See “1. Data Setting during 2 Check the picture frame. Camera System Adjustments”.) If deviated, perform “5. Picture Frame Setting”. 3 00 01 01 Set the data. 4 6F B5 FF Write the data. 3200K standard data Check (1) 5 60 37 0D Write the data. 6 60 01 11 Write the data. 7 Wait for 1 sec. 8 60 38 Read the data, and check it is “01”. 9 60 01 C1 Write the data. 10 Wait for 1 sec. 11 60 02 Read the data, and check it is “01”. 12 10 08 Read the data, and this data is named D08. 13 10 09 Read the data, and this data is named D09. 14 Calculate R ratio using the following equation (Hexadecimal calculation) R ratio = D08 × 100 + D09 15 Check that R ratio satisfies the specified value1. 16 10 0A Read the data, and this data is named D0A. 17 10 0B Read the data, and this data is named D0B. 6-21,

DSC-P52

12. Auto White Balance 5800K Standard Data Input Order Page Address Data Procedure Adjust the white balance standard data at 5800K. 24 60 02 Read the data, and check it is “01”. Mode STILL ( ) (Note2) Subject Clear chart 25 60 01 00 Write the data. (Standard picture frame) 26 6F B5 Read the data, and check it Filter Filter C14 for color temperature satisfies the specified value. correction Measurement Point Data of page: 6F, address: B5 Note2: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: 6F, address: 88 to A3, B1, B3. Measuring Instrument Adjustment Page 6F Processing after Completing Adjustments: Adjustment Address 88 to A3, B1, B3 Order Page Address Data Procedure Specified value 00 1 60 37 00 Write the data. Note1: If the data of page: 60, address: 02 is “01”, select page: 60, address: 2 60 01 00 Write the data. 01, and write data: 00. 3 Perform next adjustments. If finish the camera system Switch setting: adjustments, perform ZOOM ... WIDE end “Processing after Completing CAMERA setting (Menu setting) ... AUTO Adjustments” of “13. Auto White Balance 5800K Check”. Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 Place the C14 filter for color temperature correction on the lens. 2 Check that “1. Data Setting during Camera System Adjustments” is performed. 3 Check the picture frame. If deviated, perform “5. Picture Frame Setting”. 4 00 01 01 Set the data. 5 6F B5 FF Write the data. 6 6F A0 Read the data, this data is named DA0, and memorize it. 7 6F A0 28 Write the data. 8 6F A1 Read the data, this data is named DA1, and memorize it. 9 6F A1 C8 Write the data. 10 6F A2 Read the data, this data is named DA2, and memorize it. 11 6F A2 60 Write the data. 12 6F A3 Read the data, this data is named DA3, and memorize it. 13 6F A3 00 Write the data. 5800K standard data input (1). 14 60 37 07 Write the data. 15 60 01 11 Write the data. 16 60 38 Read the data, and check it is “01”. 17 60 01 C3 Write the data. 18 Wait for 1 sec. 19 60 02 Read the data, and check it is “01”. (Note2) 20 60 01 00 Write the data. 5800K standard data input (2). 21 60 37 08 Write the data. 22 60 01 A5 Write the data. 23 Wait for 2 sec. 6-22,

DSC-P52

13. Auto White Balance 5800K Check Order Page Address Data Procedure Check that the white balance standard data at 5800K are inputted 17 10 0B Read the data, and this data is properly. named D0B. Mode STILL ( ) 18 Calculate B ratio using the Subject Clear chart following equation. (Standard picture frame) (Hexadecimal calculation.) Filter Filter C14 for color temperature B ratio = D0A × 100 + D0B correction 19 Check that B ratio satisfies the Measurement Point Data of page: 10, address: 08, 09, 0A, specified value 2. 0B, 59, 5B 20 10 59 Read the data (R-Y data), and Measuring Instrument Data of page: 6F, address: 8C, 8E, B5 check it satisfies the specified Specified value1Rratio = 26C8 to 2AC8 value 3. Specified value2Bratio = 5E00 to 6200 21 10 5B Read the data (B-Y data), and check it satisfies the specified Specified value 3 R-Y data = 70 to 90 value 4. Specified value 4 B-Y data = 70 to 90 22 60 01 00 Write the data. Specified value 5 R/G data = 10 to 40 5800K standard data Check (2). Specified value 6 B/G data = 10 to 40 23 6F 8C Read the data (R/G data), and Specified value 7 00 check it satisfies the specified value 5. Note1: Before perform this adjustment, perform “Auto White Balance 5800K Standard Data Input”. 24 6F 8E Read the data (B/G data), and Note2: If the data of page: 60, address: 02 is “01”, select page: 60, address: check it satisfies the specified 01, and write data: 00. value 6. 25 6F B5 Read the data, and check it Switch setting: satisfies the specified value 7. ZOOM ... WIDE end CAMERA setting (Menu setting) ... AUTO Processing after Completing Adjustments: Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 60 37 00 Write the data. 1 Place the C14 filter for color 2 60 01 00 Write the data. temperature correction on the 3 6F A0 DA0 Write the data. (Note3) lens. 4 6F A1 DA1 Write the data. (Note3) 2 Check that “1. Data Setting during 5 6F A2 DA2 Write the data. (Note3) Camera System Adjustments” is 6 6F A3 DA3 Write the data. (Note3) performed. 7 Remove the C14 filter. 3 Check the picture frame. If deviated, perform “5. Picture 8 Perform next adjustments. Frame Setting”. If finish the camera system adjustments, release the data 4 00 01 01 Set the data. setting. 5 6F B5 FF Write the data. (See “1. Data Setting during 5800K standard data Check (1). Camera System Adjustments”.) 6 60 37 13 Write the data. Note3: DA0, DA1, DA2, and DA3 are memorized data at “12. Auto White 7 60 01 11 Write the data. Balance 5800K Standard Data Input”. 8 60 38 Read the data, and check it is “01”. 9 60 01 C3 Write the data. 10 Wait for 2 sec. 11 60 02 Read the data, and check it is “01”. 12 10 08 Read the data, and this data is named D08. 13 10 09 Read the data, and this data is named D09. 14 Calculate R ratio using the following equation. (Hexadecimal calculation.) R ratio = D08 × 100 + D09 15 Check that R ratio satisfies the specified value1. 16 10 0A Read the data, and this data is named D0A. 6-23,

DSC-P52

14. CCD Linearity Check Order Page Address Data Procedure Data picking is done to keep output linearity of the CCD imager, 29 Wait for 2 sec. even if the input level of CCD imager changes. 30 60 E1 Read the data, and check it is “08”. Mode STILL ( ) 31 10 80 Read the data, and this data is Subject Clear chart (Standard picture frame) named D80. Specified value1 97 to 103 32 10 81 Read the data, and this data is Specified value2 97 to 103 named D81. Note: 33 Calculate DRG using theIf the data of page: 60, address: 02 is “01”, select page: 60, address: 01, and write data: 00. following equation (Hexadecimal calculation) Switch setting: DRGH = D80 × 100 + D81 ZOOM ... WIDE end 34 10 82 Read the data, and this data is CAMERA setting (Menu setting) ... AUTO named D82. 35 10 83 Read the data, and this data is Adjusting method: named D83. Order Page Address Data Procedure 36 Calculate DBG using the 1 Check that “1. Data Setting following equation during Camera System (Hexadecimal calculation) Adjustments” is performed. DBGH = D82 × 100 + D83 2 Check the picture frame. If 37 60 01 00 Write the data. deviated, perform “5. Picture 38 60 E1 00 Write the data. Frame Setting”. 39 77 72 09 Write the data. 3 00 01 01 Set the data. 40 Wait for 2 sec. 4 75 09 Read the data, and memorize it. 41 60 01 F9 Write the data. 5 75 09 04 Write the data. 42 Wait for 2 sec. 6 60 1F 80 Write the data. 43 60 E1 Read the data, and check it is “08”. 7 77 F7 Read the data, and memorize it. 44 10 80 Read the data, and this data is 8 77 F7 42 Write the data. named D80. 9 77 F2 Read the data, and memorize it. 45 10 81 Read the data, and this data is 10 77 F2 02 Write the data. named D81. 11 60 14 90 Write the data. 46 Calculate DRG using the 12 60 12 9F Write the data. following equation 13 Wait for 2 sec. (Hexadecimal calculation) DRGL = D80 × 100 + D81 14 60 01 F9 Write the data. 47 10 82 Read the data, and this data is 15 Wait for 2 sec. named D82. 16 60 E1 Read the data, and check it is “08”. 48 10 83 Read the data, and this data is 17 10 80 Read the data, and this data is named D83. named D80. 49 Calculate DBG using the 18 10 81 Read the data, and this data is following equation named D81. (Hexadecimal calculation) 19 Calculate DRG using the DBGL = D82 × 100 + D83 following equation 50 60 01 00 Write the data. (Hexadecimal calculation) 51 60 E1 00 Write the data. DRG0 = D80 ×100 + D81 52 Convert DRG0, DBG0, DRGH, 20 10 82 Read the data, and this data is DBGH, DRGL and DBGL to decimal named D82. number, and obtain DRG0’, DBG0’, 21 10 83 Read the data, and this data is DRGH’, DBGH’, DRGL’ and DBGL’. named D83. 53 Calculate R/G ratio (H), B/G 22 Calculate DBG using the ratio (H), R/G ratio (L) and B/G following equation ratio (L), using the following (Hexadecimal calculation) equations (Decimal calculation) DBG0 = D82 × 100 + D83 R/G ratio (H) = 23 60 01 00 Write the data. (DRGH’ / DRG0’) ×100 24 60 E1 00 Write the data. B/G ratio (H) = (DBGH’ / DBG0’) × 100 25 77 72 Read the data, and memorize it. R/G ratio (L) = 26 77 72 30 Write the data. (DRGL’ / DRG0’) × 100 27 Wait for 2 sec. B/G ratio (L) = 28 60 01 F9 Write the data. (DBGL’ / DBG0’) ×100 6-24,

DSC-P52

Order Page Address Data Procedure 15. Color Reproduction Adjustment Adjust the color Separation matrix coefficient so that proper color 54 Check that R/G ratio (H) reproduction is produced. satisfies the specified value 1. (Decimal number) Mode STILL ( ) 55 Check that B/G ratio (H) Subject Color bar chart satisfies the specified value 1. (Standard picture frame) (Decimal number) Measurement Point Data of page: 6F, address: B5 56 Check that R/G ratio (L) Measuring Instrument satisfies the specified value 2. Adjustment Page 6F (Decimal number) Adjustment Address A4 to AF 57 Check that B/G ratio (L) Specified value 00 satisfies the specified value 2. (Decimal number) Note1: If the data of page: 60, address: 02 is “01”, select page: 60, address: 01, and write data: 00. Processing after Completing Adjustments: Switch setting: Order Page Address Data Procedure ZOOM ... WIDE end 1 60 12 00 Write the data. CAMERA setting (Menu setting) ... AUTO 2 60 14 00 Write the data. VIDEO OUT (SET UP setting) ... NTSC 3 60 1F 00 Write the data. Adjusting method: 4 75 09 Write the data memorized at Order Page Address Data Procedure step 4. 1 Install the color bar chart. 5 77 F7 Write the data memorized at step 7. 2 Check that “1. Data Setting during Camera System Adjustments” is 6 77 F2 Write the data memorized at performed. step 9. 3 Check the picture frame. 7 77 72 Write the data memorized at If deviated, perform “5. Picture step 25. Frame Setting”. 8 Perform next adjustments. 4 00 01 01 Set the data. If finish the camera system adjustments, release the data 5 6F B5 FF Write the data. setting. 6 60 01 AB Write the data. (See “1. Data Setting during 7 60 12 80 Write the data. Camera System Adjustments”.) 8 Wait for 1 sec. 9 60 12 00 Write the data. 10 Wait for 2 sec. 11 60 01 A9 Write the data. 12 Wait until the color of the screen stops changing. 13 60 02 Read the data, and check it is “01”. (Note2) 14 6F B5 Read the data, and check it satisfies the specified value. Note2: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: 6F, address: A4 to AF. Processing after Completing Adjustments: Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 60 01 00 Write the data. 2 Perform next adjustments. If finish the camera system adjustments, release the data setting. (See “1. Data Setting during Camera System Adjustments”.) 6-25,

DSC-P52

16. Color Reproduction Check Check that the color reproduction adjustment is done properly. Mode STILL ( ) Subject Color bar chart (Standard picture frame) Measurement Point Video terminal of A/V OUT jack Measuring Instrument NTSC vectorscope Specified Value Each center of all color luminance points should settle within each color reproduction frame. Note: If the data of page: 60, address: 02 is “01”, select page: 60, address: 01, and write data: 00. Switch setting: ZOOM ... WIDE end CAMERA setting (Menu setting) ... AUTO VIDEO OUT (SET UP setting) ... NTSC Checking method: Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 Check that “1. Data Setting during White Camera System Adjustments” is performed. 2 Check the picture frame. If deviated, perform “5. Picture Frame Setting”. 3 00 01 01 Set the data. 4 60 01 AB Write the data. 5 60 12 80 Write the data. 6 Wait for 1 sec. 7 60 12 00 Write the data. 8 Wait for 2 sec. Burst position 9 Adjust the GAIN and PHASE of the vectorscope so that the burst luminance point is set at the specified position. Fig. 6-1-14. 10 Check that each center of all color luminance points is set in each color reproduction frame. Processing after Completing Adjustments: Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 60 01 00 Write the data. 2 Perform next adjustments. If finish the camera system adjustments, release the data setting. (See “1. Data Setting during Camera System Adjustments”.) 6-26,

DSC-P52

17. CCD White Defect Compensation Check The positions of the white defective pixel are detected, and check that the pixels can be corrected. Mode STILL ( ) Subject Clear chart (Standard picture frame) Measurement Point Data of page: 60, address: 55 Measuring Instrument Specified value 1 00 to 7F Specified value 2 00 Note: If the data of page: 60, address: 02 is “01”, select page: 60, address: 01, and write data: 00. Switch setting: ZOOM ... WIDE end CAMERA setting (Menu setting) ... AUTO Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 Install the clear chart. 2 Check that “1. Data Setting during Camera System Adjustments” is performed. 3 Check the picture frame. If deviated, perform “5. Picture Frame Setting”. 4 00 01 01 Set the data. 5 7D 64 1E Write the data. 6 7D 69 11 Write the data. 7 60 01 8B Write the data. 8 Wait for 10 sec. 9 60 02 Read the data, and check it is “01”. 10 60 55 Read the data, and check it satisfies the specified value 1. 11 60 01 00 Write the data. 12 7D 64 0F Write the data. 13 7D 69 60 Write the data. 14 60 01 87 Write the data. 15 Wait for 5 sec. 16 60 02 Read the data, and check it is “01”. 17 60 55 Read the data, and check it satisfies the specified value 2. Processing after Completing Adjustments: Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 60 01 00 Write the data. 2 7D 64 0F Write the data. 3 7D 69 0B Write the data. 4 Perform next adjustments. If finish the camera system adjustments, release the data setting. (See “1. Data Setting during Camera System Adjustments”.) 6-27,

DSC-P52

18. CCD Black Defect Compensation Check Processing after Completing Adjustments: The positions of the black defective pixel are detected, and check Order Page Address Data Procedure that the pixels can be corrected. And confirms that there is no trash 1 60 01 00 Write the data. in the surface of the CCD imager, the optical filter and the inside of the lens. 2 60 2C 00 Write the data. Mode STILL ( ) 3 60 30 00 Write the data. Subject Clear chart 4 60 91 00 Write the data. (Standard picture frame) 5 7D 65 4C Write the data. Measurement Point Data of page: 60, address: 55 6 Perform next adjustments. Measuring Instrument If finish the camera system adjustments, release the data Specified value 1 00 to 14 setting. Specified value 2 00 (See “1. Data Setting during Camera System Adjustments”.) Note1: Check that there are no dust, no dirt and no reflection on the clear chart. Note2: If the data of page: 60, address: 02 is “01”, select page: 60, address: 01, and write data: 00. Switch setting: CAMERA setting (Menu setting) ... AUTO Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 Check that “1. Data Setting during Camera System Adjustments” is performed. 2 Check the picture frame. If deviated, perform “5. Picture Frame Setting”. 3 00 01 01 Set the data. 4 7D 65 4C Write the data. 5 60 2C 01 Write the data. 6 60 90 00 Write the data. 7 60 91 03 Write the data. 8 60 92 00 Write the data. 9 60 93 00 Write the data. 10 60 01 79 Write the data. 11 60 30 08 Write the data. 12 60 07 Read the data, and check it is “01”. 13 Check that the whole of the screen is white. 14 60 01 8D Write the data. 15 Wait for about 30 sec. 16 60 02 Read the data, and check it is “01”. 17 60 55 Read the data, and check it satisfies the specified value 1. If the data is “00”, proceed to “Processing after Completing Adjustments”. 18 60 01 00 Write the data. 19 7D 65 5A Write the data. 20 60 01 89 Write the data. 21 Wait for about 15 sec. 22 60 02 Read the data, and check it is “01”. 23 60 55 Read the data, and check it satisfies the specified value 2. 6-28,

DSC-P52

19. Strobe Adjustment Order Page Address Data Procedure Adjust the light level and white balance when the strobe light flashes. 29 60 02 Read the data, and check it is “01”. Mode STILL ( ) (Note5) Subject Background paper (J-2501-130-A) 30 6F D8 Read the data, and check it is “00”. (50cm from the front of the lens) 31 60 01 00 Write the data. Measurement Point Data of page 6F, address: E8, EA, EC, 32 Wait for 5 sec. EE, B5 33 60 ED Read the data, and check it is “02”. Measuring Instrument Data of page 10, address: 59, 5B 34 60 01 67 Write the data. Adjustment Page 6F 35 Check the flashing. Adjustment Address B6, B7, D8 to EF 36 60 02 Read the data, and check it is “01”. Specified Value1 04 to 09 (Note5) Specified Value2 7C to 84 37 6F D8 Read the data, and check it is “00”. Specified Value3 7C to 84 38 60 01 00 Write the data. Specified Value4 00 39 Wait for 5 sec. Note1: Perform this adjustment in the dark room or use the flash 40 60 ED Read the data, and check it is “02”. adjustment box. 41 6F B5 FF Write the data. Note2: Any light other than the strobe light should not light up the paper. Note3: After the power is turned on, this adjustment can be done only 42 60 01 B9 Write the data. once. 43 Check the flashing. Note4: If the data of page: 60, address: 02 is “01”, select page: 60, address: 01, and write data: 00. 44 60 02 Read the data, and check it is “01”. (Note5) Adjusting method: 45 6F D8 Read the data, and check it is “00”. Order Page Address Data Procedure 46 60 01 00 Write the data. 1 Check that “1. Data Setting during 47 Wait for 5 sec. Camera System Adjustments” is 48 60 ED Read the data, and check it is “02”. performed. 49 60 01 E7 Write the data. 2 00 01 01 Set the data. 50 Check the flashing. 3 60 2C 01 Write the data. 51 60 02 Read the data, and check it is “01”. 4 60 90 00 Write the data. 52 6F D8 Read the data, and check it is “00”. 5 60 91 00 Write the data. 53 6F EA Read the data, and check it 6 60 92 FF Write the data. satisfies the specified value 1. 7 60 93 FF Write the data. 54 6F EC Read the data, and check it 8 60 6C 01 Write the data. satisfies the specified value 1. 9 60 01 79 Write the data. 55 6F EE Read the data, and check it 10 Wait until the movement of the satisfies the specified value 1. lens stops. 56 10 59 Read the data, and check it 11 60 07 Read the data, and check it is “01”. satisfies the specified value 2. 12 60 01 67 Write the data. 57 10 5B Read the data, and check it 13 Check the flashing. satisfies the specified value 3. 14 60 02 Read the data, and check it is “01”. 58 6F B5 Read the data, and check it (Note5) satisfies the specified value 4. 15 6F D8 Read the data, and check it is “00”. Note5: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: 6F, 16 6F E8 Read the data, and check it address: B6, B7, D8 to EF. satisfies the specified value 1. Processing after Completing Adjustments: 17 60 01 00 Write the data. Order Page Address Data Procedure 18 Wait for 5 sec. 1 60 01 00 Write the data. 19 60 ED Read the data, and check it is “02”. 2 60 2C 00 Write the data. 20 60 01 67 Write the data. 3 60 6C 00 Write the data. 21 Check the flashing. 4 60 90 00 Write the data. 22 60 02 Read the data, and check it is “01”. (Note5) 5 60 91 00 Write the data. 23 6F D8 Read the data, and check it is “00”. 6 60 92 00 Write the data. 24 60 01 00 Write the data. 7 60 93 00 Write the data. 25 Wait for 5 sec. 8 If finish the camera system adjustments, release the data 26 60 ED Read the data, and check it is “02”. setting. 27 60 01 67 Write the data. (See “1. Data Setting during 28 Check the flashing. Camera System Adjustments”.) 6-29,

DSC-P52

20. Auto Focus Illumination Check Processing after Completing Adjustments: Check the auto focus illumination optical axis. Order Page Address Data Procedure Mode STILL ( ) 1 60 01 00 Write the data. Subject Background paper (J-2501-130-A). 2 5F 3D Write the data memorized at step (50cm from the front of the lens) 3. Measurement Point LCD screen or monitor TV 3 If finish the camera system Measuring Instrument (under scan) adjustments, release the data Adjustment Page 6F setting. (See “1. Data Setting during Adjustment Address 10 to 17 Camera System Adjustments”.) Specified Value1 Center of luminance point should settle within the specified frame. Specified Value2 Date of page: 6F, address:10 is “00”. Note1: Perform this adjustment in the dark room or use the flash adjustment box. Note2: Any light other than the strobe light should not light up the paper. Note3: If the data of page: 60, address: 02 is “01”, select page: 60, address: 01, and write data: 00. Switch setting: CAMERA setting (Menu setting) ... AUTO Preparations: 1) Take a copy of the AF illumination axis frame with a clear sheet. (Reduce or enlarge the frame in same size as the effective picture frame of the LCD screen or the monitor TV.) Adjusting method: Fig. 6-1-15. Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 Check that “1. Data Setting during Camera System Adjustments” is performed. 2 00 01 01 Set the data. 3 5F 3D Read the data, and memorize it. 4 5F 3D Decrease the data, and stop it when the black frame just appears on the LCD screen. 5 Attach the copied AF illumination axis frame (transparent) on the LCD screen. (The frame of the AF illumination axis frame and the black frame of the LCD screen must be agree.) 6 7B A9 06 Set the data. 7 60 01 EF Write the data. 8 Check that the auto focus illumination is lit. 9 60 02 Read the data, and check it is “01”. (Note4) 10 Check that center of the luminance point is set in the specified frame of the AF illumination axis frame. 11 6F 10 Read the data, and check it satisfies the specified value 2. Note4: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: 6F, address: 10 to 17. 6-30,

DSC-P52 COVER

1-5. LCD SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT 1. LCD Initial Data Input (1) Mode PLAY ( ) Note: When replacing the LCD unit, be careful to prevent damages caused Signal Arbitrary by static electricity. Adjustment Page 4F SETUP setting: Adjustment Address 80 to 8B, 92 to 95, A3, A4 LCD BRIGHTNESS (SETUP1) ...NORMAL LCD BACKLIGHT (SETUP1) ... BRIGHT Adjusting method: VIDEO OUT (SETUP2) ... NTSC 1) Select page: 00, address: 01, and set data: 01. (Adjustments must be performed in NTSC mode, so don’t set 2) Select page: 4F, and write the data in the following table. the setup setting to “PAL”.) 3) Select page: 00, address: 01, and set data: 00. [Measuring points] Address Data Remark The measuring points when using the oscilloscope or the digital 80 4E Fixed data voltmeter are CL802 (Pin ws of IC801 (VG)) and CL803 (Pin wj of 81 FF Fixed data IC801) of SY-91 board. 82 80 VCO adj. 83 90 VCO adj. 84 6D V COM adj. SY-91 Board 85 16 Bright adj. 86 08 Fixed data 87 87 P sig level adj. 88 8D White balance adj. CL803 25 89 59 White balance adj.36 37 24 CL802 8A 38 Contrast adj. 48 13 8B 00 VG center adj. 1 12 IC801 92 05 Fixed data 93 0C Fixed data 94 9F Fixed data 95 1F Fixed data Fig. 6-1-16. A3 24 Fixed data A4 00 Fixed data 6-31,

DSC-P52

2. LCD Initial Data Input (2) 3. VCO Adjustment (SY-91 board) Mode PLAY ( ) Set the VCO free-run frequency. If deviated, the LCD screen will be blurred. Signal Arbitrary Mode PLAY ( ) Adjustment Page 5F Signal Arbitrary Adjustment Address 3A to 3F Measurement Point Check on LCD display Adjusting method: Measuring Instrument 1) Select page: 00, address: 01, and set data: 01. Adjustment Page 4F 2) Select page: 5F, and write the data in the following table. Adjustment Address 82, 83 3) Select page: 00, address: 01, and set data: 00. Address Data Remark Setup setting: 3A 57 Fixed data 3B FE Fixed data Adjusting method: 3C 02 Fixed data Order Page Address Data Procedure 3D 5A Fixed data 1 00 01 01 Set the data. 3E 00 Fixed data 2 40 F1 09 Write the data. 3F 01 Fixed data 3 4F 02 03 Write the data. 4 4F 82 80 Write the data. 5 4F 82 Increase the data, and stop it when the LCD screen just begins to fall into the disorder. 6 4F 82 Read the data, and this data is named DH. 7 4F 82 80 Write the data. 8 4F 82 Decrease the data, and stop it when the LCD screen just begins to fall into the disorder. 9 4F 82 Read the data, and this data is named DL. 10 Calculate D82 using following equation. (Hexadecimal calculation.) D82 = (DH + DL)/2 11 4F 82 D82 Write the data. 12 Calculate D83 using following equation. (Hexadecimal calculation.) D83 = D82 + 16 13 4F 83 D83 Write the data. 14 4F 02 00 Write the data. 15 40 F1 00 Write the data. 16 00 01 00 Set the data. 6-32,

DSC-P52

4. Bright Adjustment (SY-91 board) 4-2. Adjustment Using Oscilloscope Set the level of the VIDEO signal for driving the LCD to the specified value. If deviated, the screen image will be blackish or saturated Mode PLAY ( ) (whitish). Note: Signal ArbitraryDo either of “Adjustment without Using Oscilloscope” or “Adjustment Using Oscilloscope”. Measurement Point CL802 (Pin ws of IC801) (VG) Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope 4-1. Adjustment without Using Oscilloscope Adjustment Page 4F Adjustment Address 85 Mode PLAY ( ) Specified Value A = 2.95 ± 0.05V Signal Arbitrary Measurement Point Data of page: 40, address: 11, 12 Adjusting method: Measuring Instrument Order Page Address Data Procedure Adjustment Page 4F 1 00 01 01 Set the data. Adjustment Address 85 2 40 F1 08 Write the data. Specified Value 0D7 to 0DF 3 4F 02 03 Write the data. 4 4F 85 Change the data and set the Adjusting method: voltage (A) between the reversed Order Page Address Data Procedure waveform pedestal and non- 1 00 01 01 Set the data. reversed waveform pedestal to 2 40 F1 08 Write the data. the specified value. (Note1) 3 4F 02 03 Write the data. 5 4F 85 Write the data. 4 40 10 00 Write the data. 6 4F 02 00 Write the data. 5 40 10 90 Write the data. 7 40 F1 00 Write the data. 6 40 11 Read the data, and this data is 8 00 01 00 Set the data. named D11A. Note1: The data should be “00” to “3F”. 7 40 12 Read the data, and this data is named D12A. Pedestal 8 40 10 91 Write the data. 9 40 11 Read the data, and this data is named D11B. 10 40 12 Read the data, and this data is named D12B.

A

11 Calculate DA and DB using Pedestal following equation. (Hexadecimal calculation.) (Note1) DA = (D11A × 4 + D12A / 40) DB = (D11B × 4 + D 2H12B / 40) 12 Calculate the signal level using Fig. 6-1-17. following equation. (Hexadecimal calculation.) When DA DB Signal level = DA – DB When DA < DB Signal level = DB – DA 13 When the signal level satisfies the specified value proceed to step 16, in case of others proceed to step 14. 14 4F 85 Change the data. (Note2) 15 4F 85 Write the data, and return to step 4. 16 4F 02 00 Write the data. 17 40 F1 00 Write the data. 18 00 01 00 Set the data. Note1: When dividing D12A or D12B by 40. If there is a fraction below decimal point, truncate it. Note2: When the signal level is smaller than specified value, increase the data. (The data should be “00” to “3F”.) 6-33,

DSC-P52

5. Contrast Adjustment (SY-91 board) 5-2. Adjustment Using Oscilloscope Set the level of the VIDEO signal for driving the LCD to the specified value. If deviated, the screen image will be blackish or saturated Mode PLAY ( ) (whitish). Signal Arbitrary Note: Do either of “Adjustment without Using Oscilloscope” or Measurement Point CL802 (Pin ws of IC801) (VG) “Adjustment Using Oscilloscope”. Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope Adjustment Page 4F 5-1. Adjustment without Using Oscilloscope Adjustment Address 8A Mode PLAY ( ) Specified Value A = 2.42 ± 0.05V Signal Arbitrary Adjusting method: Measurement Point Data of page: 40, address: 11, 12 Order Page Address Data Procedure Measuring Instrument 1 00 01 01 Set the data. Adjustment Page 4F 2 40 F1 01 Write the data. Adjustment Address 8A 3 4F 02 03 Write the data. Specified Value 0B0 to 0B8 4 4F 8A Change the data and set the voltage (A) to the specified Adjusting method: value. (Note1) Order Page Address Data Procedure 5 4F 8A Write the data. 1 00 01 01 Set the data. 6 4F 02 00 Write the data. 2 40 F1 01 Write the data. 7 40 F1 00 Write the data. 3 4F 02 03 Write the data. 8 00 01 00 Set the data. 4 40 10 00 Write the data. 5 40 10 90 Write the data. Note1: The data should be “00” to “7F”. 6 40 11 Read the data, and this data is named D11A. White(100%) 7 40 12 Read the data, and this data is named D12A. 8 40 10 91 Write the data. 9 40 11 Read the data, and this data is named D11B. A White(100%) 10 40 12 Read the data, and this data is named D12B. 11 Calculate DA and DB using following equation. (Hexadecimal calculation.) 2H (Note1) DA = (D11A × 4+ D12A / 40) DB = (D11B × 4+ D / 40) Fig. 6-1-18.12B 12 Calculate the signal level using following equation. (Hexadecimal calculation.) When DA DB Signal level = DA – DB When DA < DB Signal level = DB – DA 13 When the signal level satisfies the specified value proceed to step 16, in case of others proceed to step 14. 14 4F 8A Change the data. (Note2) 15 4F 8A Write the data, and return to step 4. 16 4F 02 00 Write the data. 17 40 F1 00 Write the data. 18 00 01 00 Set the data. Note1: When dividing D12A or D12B by 40. If there is a fraction below decimal point, truncate it. Note2: When the signal level is smaller than specified value, increase the data. (The data should be “00” to “7F”.) 6-34,

DSC-P52

6. V COM Level Adjustment (SY-91 board) 6-2. Adjustment Using Oscilloscope Set the V COM signal level to an appropriate level. Mode PLAY ( ) Note: Do either of “Adjustment without Using Oscilloscope” or “Adjustment Using Oscilloscope”. Signal Arbitrary Measurement Point CL803 (Pin wj of IC801) (VCOM) 6-1. Adjustment without Using Oscilloscope Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope Adjustment Page 4F Mode PLAY ( ) Adjustment Address 87 Signal Arbitrary Specified Value A = 5.65 ± 0.05V Measurement Point Data of page: 40, address: 11, 12 Measuring Instrument Adjusting method: Adjustment Page 4F Order Page Address Data Procedure Adjustment Address 87 1 00 01 01 Set the data. Specified Value 1A0 to 1A8 2 40 F1 02 Write the data. 3 4F 02 03 Write the data. Adjusting method: 4 4F 87 Change the data and set the Order Page Address Data Procedure signal level (A) to the specified 1 00 01 01 Set the data. value. 2 40 F1 02 Write the data. 5 4F 87 Write the data. 3 4F 02 03 Write the data. 6 4F 02 00 Write the data. 4 40 10 00 Write the data. 7 40 F1 00 Write the data. 5 40 10 80 Write the data. 8 00 01 00 Set the data. 6 40 11 Read the data, and this data is named D11A. 7 40 12 Read the data, and this data is named D12A. 8 40 10 81 Write the data. 9 40 11 Read the data, and this data is named D11B. 10 40 12 Read the data, and this data is A named D12B. 11 Calculate DA and DB using following equation. (Hexadecimal calculation.) (Note1) DA = (D11A × 4+ D12A / 40) DB = (D11B × 4+ D12B / 40) 12 Calculate the signal level using 2H following equation. (Hexadecimal calculation.) Fig. 6-1-19. When DA DB Signal level = DA - DB When DA < DB Signal level = DB - DA 13 When the signal level satisfies the specified value proceed to step 16, in case of others proceed to step 14. 14 4F 87 Change the data. (Note2) 15 4F 87 Write the data, and return to step 4. 16 4F 02 00 Write the data. 17 40 F1 00 Write the data. 18 00 01 00 Set the data. Note1: When dividing D12A or D12B by 40. If there is a fraction below decimal point, truncate it. Note2: When the signal level is smaller than specified value, increase the data. 6-35,

DSC-P52

7. V COM Adjustment (SY-91 board) 8. White Balance Adjustment (SY-91 board) Set the DC bias of the common electrode drive signal of LCD to the Correct the white balance. specified value. If deviated, the LCD screen color cannot be reproduced. If deviated, the LCD display will move, producing flicker and Mode PLAY ( ) conspicuous vertical lines. Subject Arbitrary Mode PLAY ( ) Measurement Point Check on LCD display Signal Arbitrary Measuring Instrument Measurement Point Check on LCD display Adjustment Page 4F Measuring Instrument Adjustment Address 88, 89 Adjustment Page 4F Specified Value The LCD screen should not be colored. Adjustment Address 84 Specified Value The brightness difference between the Note1: Use the AC power adaptor during this adjustment. section A and section B is minimum. Note2: Check the white balance only when replacing the following parts. If necessary, adjust them. Note1: Perform “Bright Adjustment” and “Contrast Adjustment” before 1. LCD panel this adjustment. 2. Light induction plate 3. IC801 Adjusting method: Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 00 01 01 Set the data. 1 00 01 01 Set the data. 2 40 F1 82 Write the data. 2 40 F1 0A Write the data. 3 4F 02 03 Write the data. 3 4F 02 03 Write the data. 4 4F 84 Change the data so that the brightness of the section A and 4 4F 88 8D Write the data. that of the section B is equal. 5 4F 89 59 Write the data. (Note2) 6 4F 88 Check that the LCD screen is 5 4F 84 Write the data. not colored. If not colored, 6 4F 02 00 Write the data. proceed to step 12. 7 40 F1 00 Write the data. 7 4F 88 Change the data so that the LCD screen is not colored. 8 00 01 00 Set the data. 8 4F 88 Write the data. Note2: The data should be “40” to “7F”. 9 4F 89 Change the data so that the LCD screen is not colored. 10 4F 89 Write the data. B A 11 4F 89 If the LCD screen is colored, repeat steps 7 to 11. A B 12 4F 02 00 Write the data. 13 40 F1 00 Write the data. B A 14 00 01 00 Set the data. A B Fig. 6-1-20. 6-36,

DSC-P52 COVER

1-6. SYSTEM CONTROL SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT Checking method: Order Page Address Data Procedure 1. Battery End Check (SY-91 board) 1 Decrease the output voltage of Check the battery end voltage. the regulated power supply so Mode STILL ( ) that the digital voltmeter display Subject Arbitrary is 2.20 ± 0.01Vdc. Measurement Point Data of page: 20, address: 9B 2 20 9B Read the data, and check it Measuring Instrument satisfies the specified value. Specified Value 56 to 60 Switch setting: FOCUS (Menu setting) ... 0.5m Connection: 1) Connect the regulated power supply and the digital voltmeter to the battery terminal as shown in Fig. 6-1-21. Preparations: 1) Adjust the output voltage of the regulated power supply so that the digital voltmeter display is 4.2 ± 0.1Vdc. Digital voltmeter Regulated power supply Fig. 6-1-21. 6-37,

DSC-P52 COVER

6-2. SERVICE MODE 2. Operation 2-1. APPLICATION FOR ADJUSTMENT (SEUS) • Page change The application for adjustment (SEUS) is used for changing the To change the page, click [Page] on the SEUS screen and enter calculation coefficient in signal processing, EVR data, etc. The SEUS the page to be changed. The page is displayed in hexadecimal performs bi-directional communication between the personal notation. computer (PC) and the unit using the USB signal. The resultant data of this bi-directional communication is written in the non- • Address change volatile memory. To change the address, click [Address] on the SEUS screen and enter the address to be changed. Or click [B] to increase the 2-1-1. Using Method of SEUS address, click [b] to decrease the address. The address is displayed in hexadecimal notation. 1. Connection 1) Connect the HASP key to the USB port of the PC. • Data change 2) Connect the camera to another USB port of the PC. To change the data, click [Set] on the SEUS screen and enter the 3) Insert a memory stick to the camera. data. Or click [v] to increase the data, click [V] to decrease the 4) Confirm that the camera starts in the USB mode. data. The data is displayed in hexadecimal notation. 5) Start the SEUS on the PC. This operation does not write the data to the nonvolatile memory. 6) Click [Connect] on the SEUS screen. If the connection is If you want to write the changed data, click [Store] to write it. normal, the SEUS screen will be as shown in Fig. 6-2-1, indicating the “connected” state. • Data writing Note: The SEUS will go in “disconnect” state, if the camera is turned To write the data to the nonvolatile memory, click [Write] on the off (for instance, by resetting the unit). In such a case, click SEUS screen and enter the data to be written. [Connect] on the SEUS screen to restore the “connected” state. • Data reading The data displayed on the SEUS screen are the data values at the time when the pages and addresses were set, and they are not updated automatically. To check the data change, click [Read] on the SEUS screen and update the displayed data. 2-1-2. Precaution on Use of SEUS Mishandling of the SEUS may erase the correct adjustment data at times. To prevent this, it is recommended that all adjustment data be saved before beginning adjustments. 1) Click [Page Edit] on the SEUS screen. 2) Click [Page], and enter the page number to be saved. 3) Click [Read] to read the data to be saved from the camera. 4) Click [File] and save the data. Fig. 6-2-1 6-38,

DSC-P52 COVER

2-2. SERVICE MODE 2. Bit value discrimination Bit values must be discriminated using the hexadecimal data for 1. Setting the Test Mode following items. Use the table below to discriminate if the bit value Page 2F Address 21 is “1” or “0”. Data Function Hexadecimal data 00 Normal 02 Forced MOVIE mode power ON 03 Forced STILL mode power ON 04 Forced PLAY mode power ON • Before setting the data, select page: 00, address: 01, and set data: bit3 to bit0 discrimination 01. • For page 2F, the data set is recorded in the non-volatile memory bit7 to bit4 discrimination by clicking [Write] button. In this case, take note that the test mode will not be exited even when the main power is turned off. • After completing adjustments/repairs, be sure to return the Display on the Bit values data of this address to “00”, and press [Write] button. adjustment bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0 Select page: 00, address: 01, and set data: 00. remote or or or or commander bit7 bit6 bit5 bit40000010001200103001140100501016011070111A8100091001A(A) 1010B(b) 1011C(c) 1100D(d) 1101BE(E) 1110F(F) 1111Examples: If the hexadecimal data is “8E”, the bit values for bit7 to bit4 are shown in the A column, and the bit values for bit3 to bit0 are shown in the B column. 6-39,

DSC-P52

3. Switch check (1) Page 20 Address 80 Bit Function When bit value=1 When bit value=0 POWER switch (XPWER ON) 0 OFF ON (Control switch block (RL-060) S002) Shutter button (XSHTR ON SW) 3 OFF ON (Control switch block (RL-060) S003) Shutter button (XAE LOCK SW) 4 OFF ON (Control switch block (RL-060) S003) Using method: 1) Select page: 20, address: 80. 2) Read the data. By discriminating the bit value of the data, the state of the switches can be discriminated. 4. Switch check (2) Page 20 Address 90 to 92, 94 Using method: 1) Select page: 20, address: 90 to 92, 94. 2) Read the data. By discriminating the data, the pressed key can be discriminated. Data Address 00 to 0C 0D to 27 28 to 48 49 to 73 DD to FF 90 Mode dial Mode dial Mode dial Mode dial (MODE DIAL1) SET UP MOVIE STILL PLAY No key input (IC401 tf) (SW-392 block) (SW-392 block) (SW-392 block) (SW-392 block) 91 Control button Control button MENU IMAGE SIZE/ (KEY AD0) DOWN (S104) UP (S100) (S107) DELETE (S110) No key input (IC401 tg) (SW-392 block) (SW-392 block) (SW-392 block) (SW-392 block) 92 Control button Control button Control button LCD STATUS/ (KEY AD1) RIGHT (S105) LEFT (S101) SET (S103) LCD ON-OFF (S108) No key input (IC401 th) (SW-392 block) (SW-392 block) (SW-392 block) (SW-392 block) 94 ZOOM WIDE ZOOM WIDE (KEY AD2) (S102) (S106) No key input (IC401 tk) (SW-392 block) (SW-392 block) 5. LED check Page 20 Address 04 Using method: 1) Select page: 20, address: 04, set data: 02. 2) Check that all LED (TALLY/ACCESS LED, AE LOCK/FLASH LED, STROB/CHARGE LED, MS LED) are lit. 3) Select page: 20, address: 04, set data: 00. 6. Lens Shutter check Page 60 Address 5B, 5C Using method: 1) Select page: 60, address: 5B, and write data: 01. 2) Check that the lens shutter is closed. Select page: 60, address: 5C, and check the data is “01”. 3) Select page: 60, address: 5B, and write data: 02. 4) Check that the lens shutter is open. Select page: 60, address: 5C, and check the data is “02”. 5) Select page: 60, address: 5B, and write data: 00. 6-40,

DSC-P52

〈FOR CAMERA COLOR REPRODUCTION ADJUSTMENT〉 Take a copy of CAMERA COLOR REPRODUCTION FRAME with a clear sheet for use. ✂ 〈AF ILLUMINATION FRAME〉 6-41E ✂,

Reverse 987624851.pdf Revision History

Ver. Date History Contents S.M. Rev. issued 1.0 2003.03 Official Release — —]
15

Similar documents

CAUTION You are cautioned that any changes or For the Customers in the U.S.A. Notice on the supplied battery
DSC-P52 SERVICE MANUAL LEVEL 1 US Model Ver 1.0 2003. 03 Canadian Model Revision History AEP Model UK Model E Model Australian Model Hong Kong Model Korea Model Chinese Model Tourist Model Brazilian Model Link SPECIFICATIONS SELF DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION ORNAMENTAL PARTS • INSTRUCTION MANUAL is shown at t
DSC-P7 SERVICE MANUAL LEVEL 2 US Model Canadian Model UK Model E Model Hong Kong Model Australian Model Chinese Model Korea Model Tourist Model Japanese Model
DSC-P7 SERVICE MANUAL LEVEL 2 US Model Ver 1.0 2002. 06 Canadian Model Revision History AEP Model UK Model E Model Hong Kong Model Australian Model Chinese Model Korea Model Tourist Model Japanese Model Link SPECIFICATIONS BLOCK DIAGRAMS PRINTED WIRING BOARDS SERVICE NOTE FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS RE
DSC-P7 SERVICE MANUAL LEVEL 1 US Model Ver 1.2 2002. 10 Canadian Model Revision History AEP Model UK Model E Model Hong Kong Model Australian Model Chinese Model
DSC-P7 SERVICE MANUAL LEVEL 1 US Model Ver 1.2 2002. 10 Canadian Model Revision History AEP Model UK Model E Model Hong Kong Model Australian Model Chinese Model Korea Model Tourist Model Japanese Model Link SPECIFICATIONS SELF DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION ORNAMENTAL PARTS • INSTRUCTION MANUAL is shown at the
DSC-P7 SERVICE MANUAL LEVEL 1 US Model Ver 1.0 2002. 06 Canadian Model Revision History AEP Model UK Model E Model Hong Kong Model Australian Model Chinese Model
DSC-P7 SERVICE MANUAL LEVEL 1 US Model Ver 1.0 2002. 06 Canadian Model Revision History AEP Model UK Model E Model Hong Kong Model Australian Model Chinese Model Korea Model Tourist Model Japanese Model Link SPECIFICATIONS SELF DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION ORNAMENTAL PARTS • INSTRUCTION MANUAL is shown at the
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to For the Customers in the U.S.A.
DSC-P73 SERVICE MANUAL LEVEL 1 US Model Ver 1.0 2004.04 Canadian Model Revision History AEP Model UK Model E Model Hong Kong Model Australian Model Chinese Model Korea Model Argentine Model Brazilian Model Tourist Model Photo: Silver Japanese Model Link SPECIFICATIONS SELF DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION ORNAMEN
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to For the Customers in the U.S.A.
DSC-P73 SERVICE MANUAL LEVEL 1 US Model Ver 1.1 2005.05 Canadian Model Revision History AEP Model UK Model E Model Hong Kong Model Australian Model Chinese Model Korea Model Argentine Model Brazilian Model Tourist Model Photo: Silver Japanese Model Link SPECIFICATIONS SELF DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION ORNAMEN
DSC-P8 US Model SERVICE MANUAL Canadian Model AEP Model E Model Hong Kong Model Australian Model Chinese Model Korea Model CORRECTION-1 Tourist Model
DSC-P8 LEVEL 2 US Model SERVICE MANUAL Canadian Model AEP Model Ver 1.1 2003. 06 UK Model E Model Hong Kong Model Australian Model Chinese Model Korea Model CORRECTION-1 Tourist Model We will inform you that there are printing errors Japanese Model in the service manual previously issued. • Correcti
DSC-P8 SERVICE MANUAL LEVEL 1 US Model Ver 1.0 2003. 03 Canadian Model Revision History AEP Model UK Model E Model Hong Kong Model Australian Model Chinese Model
DSC-P8 SERVICE MANUAL LEVEL 1 US Model Ver 1.0 2003. 03 Canadian Model Revision History AEP Model UK Model E Model Hong Kong Model Australian Model Chinese Model Korea Model Tourist Model Japanese Model Link SPECIFICATIONS SELF DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION ORNAMENTAL PARTS • INSTRUCTION MANUAL is shown at the
DSC-P8 SERVICE MANUAL LEVEL 2 US Model Canadian Model UK Model E Model Hong Kong Model Australian Model Chinese Model Korea Model Tourist Model Japanese Model
DSC-P8 SERVICE MANUAL LEVEL 2 US Model Ver 1.0 2003. 03 Canadian Model Revision History AEP Model UK Model E Model Hong Kong Model Australian Model Chinese Model Korea Model Tourist Model Japanese Model Link SPECIFICATIONS BLOCK DIAGRAMS PRINTED WIRING BOARDS SERVICE NOTE FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS RE
DSC-P8 SERVICE MANUAL LEVEL 2 US Model Canadian Model UK Model E Model Hong Kong Model Australian Model Chinese Model Korea Model Tourist Model Japanese Model
DSC-P8 SERVICE MANUAL LEVEL 2 US Model Ver 1.1 2003. 06 Canadian Model Revision History AEP Model UK Model E Model Hong Kong Model Australian Model Chinese Model Korea Model Tourist Model Japanese Model Link SPECIFICATIONS BLOCK DIAGRAMS PRINTED WIRING BOARDS SERVICE NOTE FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS RE
DSC-P8 SERVICE MANUAL LEVEL 2 US Model Canadian Model UK Model E Model Hong Kong Model Australian Model Chinese Model Korea Model Tourist Model Japanese Model
DSC-P8 SERVICE MANUAL LEVEL 2 US Model Ver 1.2 2004.10 Canadian Model Revision History AEP Model UK Model E Model Hong Kong Model Australian Model Chinese Model Korea Model Tourist Model Japanese Model Link SPECIFICATIONS BLOCK DIAGRAMS PRINTED WIRING BOARDS SERVICE NOTE FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS REP
DSC-P9 SERVICE MANUAL LEVEL 2 US Model Ver 1.0 2002. 04 Canadian Model UK Model E Model Hong Kong Model Australian Model Chinese Model Korea Model Tourist Model
DSC-P9 SERVICE MANUAL LEVEL 2 US Model Ver 1.0 2002. 04 Canadian Model Revision History AEP Model UK Model E Model Hong Kong Model Australian Model Chinese Model Korea Model Tourist Model Japanese Model Link SPECIFICATIONS BLOCK DIAGRAMS PRINTED WIRING BOARDS SERVICE NOTE FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS AD
For the Customers in the U.S.A. Notice on the supplied battery Certain countries may regulate disposal of the battery used to power this product.
DSC-P92 SERVICE MANUAL LEVEL 1 US Model Ver 1.0 2003. 04 Canadian Model Revision History AEP Model UK Model E Model Australian Model Hong Kong Model Korea Model Chinese Model Tourist Model Brazilian Model Japanese Model Link SPECIFICATIONS SELF DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION ORNAMENTAL PARTS • INSTRUCTION MANUA
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to For the Customers in the U.S.A.
DSC-P93 SERVICE MANUAL LEVEL 1 US Model Ver 1.0 2004.03 Canadian Model Revision History AEP Model UK Model E Model Hong Kong Model Australian Model Chinese Model Korea Model Argentine Model Brazilian Model Tourist Model Link SPECIFICATIONS SELF DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION ORNAMENTAL PARTS • INSTRUCTION MANUA
DSC-R1 SERVICE MANUAL LEVEL 1 US Model Ver 1.0 2005.10 Canadian Model UK Model E Model Australian Model Hong Kong Model Chinese Model Korea Model Japanese Model
DSC-R1 SERVICE MANUAL LEVEL 1 US Model Ver 1.0 2005.10 Canadian Model Revision History AEP Model UK Model E Model Australian Model Hong Kong Model Chinese Model Korea Model Japanese Model Tourist Model Link SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSORIES INSTRUCTION MANUAL SERVICE NOTE The components identified by Les c
DSC-R1 SERVICE MANUAL LEVEL 3 US Model Ver 1.1 2005.11 Canadian Model UK Model Hong Kong Model Chinese Model Korea Model Japanese Model Tourist Model
DSC-R1 SERVICE MANUAL LEVEL 3 US Model Ver 1.1 2005.11 Canadian Model Revision History AEP Model UK Model How to use E Model Acrobat Reader Australian Model Hong Kong Model Chinese Model Korea Model Japanese Model Tourist Model Link FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM PRINTED WIRING BOARDS REPAIR PARTS LIST SCH
DSC-R1 SERVICE MANUAL LEVEL 2 US Model UK Model Hong Kong Model Chinese Model Korea Model Japanese Model Tourist Model
DSC-R1 SERVICE MANUAL LEVEL 2 US Model Ver 1.0 2005.10 Canadian Model Revision History AEP Model UK Model How to use E Model Acrobat Reader Australian Model Hong Kong Model Chinese Model Korea Model Japanese Model Tourist Model Link SPECIFICATIONS BLOCK DIAGRAMS PRINTED WIRING BOARDS SERVICE NOTE FR
DSC-R1 SERVICE MANUAL LEVEL 3 US Model Ver 1.2 2006.05 Canadian Model UK Model Hong Kong Model Chinese Model Korea Model Japanese Model Tourist Model
DSC-R1 SERVICE MANUAL LEVEL 3 US Model Ver 1.2 2006.05 Canadian Model Revision History AEP Model UK Model How to use E Model Acrobat Reader Australian Model Hong Kong Model Chinese Model Korea Model Japanese Model Tourist Model Link FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM PRINTED WIRING BOARDS REPAIR PARTS LIST SCH
SAFETY-RELATED COMPONENT WARNING!!
DSC-S30/S50 SERVICE MANUAL AEP Model UK Model Level 1 Ver 1.3 2004. 07 Photo: DSC-S30 SPECIFICATIONS System Output connector Operation temperature Storage temperature Image device A/V OUT (Monaural) 32˚F to 104˚F –4˚F to +140˚F 1/2.7 type color CCD (DSC-S50 only) (0˚C to 40˚C) (–20˚C to +60˚C) Minij
SAFETY-RELATED COMPONENT WARNING!!
DSC-S30/S50 SERVICE MANUAL AEP Model UK Model Level 1 Ver 1.1 2000. 09 With SUPPLEMENT-1 (9-929-819-81) Photo: DSC-S30 SPECIFICATIONS System Output connector Operation temperature Storage temperature Image device A/V OUT (Monaural) 32˚F to 104˚F –4˚F to +140˚F 1/2.7 type color CCD (DSC-S50 only) (0˚
- : Points changed portion.
DSC-S30/S50 US Model Canadian Model SERVICE MANUAL AEP ModelUK Model Level2EModel Hong Kong Model Ver 1.3 2004. 07 Australian Model Chinese Model Korea Model Tourist Model Japanese Model CORRECTION-1 File this correction with the service manual. • Correction of SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS • Correction of EXP
DSC-R1 SERVICE MANUAL LEVEL 2 US Model UK Model Hong Kong Model Chinese Model Korea Model Japanese Model Tourist Model
DSC-R1 SERVICE MANUAL LEVEL 2 US Model Ver 1.1 2005.11 Canadian Model Revision History AEP Model UK Model How to use E Model Acrobat Reader Australian Model Hong Kong Model Chinese Model Korea Model Japanese Model Tourist Model Link SPECIFICATIONS BLOCK DIAGRAMS PRINTED WIRING BOARDS SERVICE NOTE FR
Supplied accessories
DSC-S30/S50 SERVICE MANUAL US Model Ver 1.1 2000. 09 Canadian ModelLevel 2 With SUPPLEMENT-1(9-929-819-82) AEP Model UK Model E Model Hong Kong Model Australian Model Chinese Model Korea Model Tourist Model Photo: DSC-S30 Japanese Model This service manual contains information for Japanese model as
! : Points deleted portion.
DSC-S40 Auto-ADJ SERVICE MANUAL Ver 1.1 2005.11 CORRECTION-1 We will inform you that there are printing errors in the service manual previously issued. • Correction of the Before starting adjustment • Correction of the Table 6-1-1 • Correction of the Service tool DSC-S40 2005K0500-1© 2005.11 9-876-8
& : Points added portion.
DSC-S40 LEVEL 2 US Model SERVICE MANUAL Canadian Model AEP Model Ver 1.2 2005.09 UK Model E Model Australian Model Hong Kong Model Chinese Model Korea Model Japanese Model SUPPLEMENT-1 Tourist Model File this supplement with the service manual. (PV05-041) • Change of Repair Parts Suffix No. of ST-11
SPECIFICATIONS Camera [Power, general]
DSC-S40 SERVICE MANUAL LEVEL 2 US Model Ver 1.0 2005.03 Canadian Model Revision History AEP Model UK Model How to use E Model Acrobat Reader Australian Model Hong Kong Model Chinese Model Korea Model Japanese Model Tourist Model Link SPECIFICATIONS BLOCK DIAGRAMS PRINTED WIRING BOARDS SERVICE NOTE F
SPECIFICATIONS Camera [Power, general]
DSC-S40 SERVICE MANUAL LEVEL 2 US Model Ver 1.1 2005.06 Canadian Model Revision History AEP Model UK Model How to use E Model Acrobat Reader Australian Model Hong Kong Model Chinese Model Korea Model Japanese Model Tourist Model Link SPECIFICATIONS BLOCK DIAGRAMS PRINTED WIRING BOARDS SERVICE NOTE F
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DSC-S30/S50 SERVICE MANUAL US Model Canadian Model Level 3 Ver 1.1 2000. 09 With SUPPLEMENT 1 AEP Model (9-929-819-83) UK Model E Model Hong Kong Model Australian Model Chinese Model Korea Model Tourist Model Photo: DSC-S30 Japanese Model This service manual contains information for Japanese model a
SPECIFICATIONS Camera [Power, general]
DSC-S40 SERVICE MANUAL LEVEL 2 US Model Ver 1.2 2005.09 Canadian Model Revision History AEP Model UK Model How to use E Model Acrobat Reader Australian Model Hong Kong Model Chinese Model Korea Model Japanese Model Tourist Model Link SPECIFICATIONS BLOCK DIAGRAMS PRINTED WIRING BOARDS SERVICE NOTE F
SPECIFICATIONS Camera [Power, general]
DSC-S40 SERVICE MANUAL LEVEL 2 US Model Ver 1.2 2005.09 Canadian Model Revision History AEP Model UK Model How to use E Model Acrobat Reader Australian Model Hong Kong Model Chinese Model Korea Model Japanese Model Tourist Model Link SPECIFICATIONS BLOCK DIAGRAMS PRINTED WIRING BOARDS SERVICE NOTE F